The Fundamentals of Pa Kua Chang 
Volume II 
The Method of Lu Shui-Tien
as Taught by Park Bok Nam
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Volume II 
The Method o f L u Shui-Tien

 
 

by Park Bok Nam and Dan Miller 
 

High View Publications, Pacific Grove, CA 

 
 

The  Fundamentals  of  Pa  Kua  Chang, 

Volume II: 
The Method of Lu Shui‐Tʹien as Taught 
by Park Bok Nam 
Copyright © 1995 by Dan Miller 
ISBN 1‐883175‐05‐4 All Right 
Reserved 
Published by High View Publications 
P.O. Box 51967 
Pacific Grove, CA 93950 
 
Printed in the United States of America 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The  author  and  publisher  of  the  book  are  not  responsible  for  any  injury  which  may  result  from 
following the instructions contained herein. 
Before embarking on any of the physical activities described in this book, the reader should consult 
his or her physician for advice regarding their individual suitability for performing such activity. 

 
 

 
Table of Contents 
 
 
 

Acknowledgments vi 
Dedication vii 
Preface viii 
A Note on Romanization of Chinese xi 
 
 
Chapter 1 ‐ Introduction 1 
 
Introduction 2 
Getting the Most Out of This Book 3 
 
 
Chapter 2 ‐ Pa Kua Chang Fighting Strategy 7 

Philosophical Connection to Pa Kua Chang Martial Application 8 
Philosophical Connection to Pa Kua Chang Training 9 
The Evolution of Pa Kua Strategy 10 
The Birth of Pa Kua Strategy 10 
Pa Kua Adaptability 11 
Adapting to Fit the Situation 12 
The Individual Expression of the Art 12 
Principle Vs. Technique 13 

Strategies of Pa Kua Chang Fighting 15 
Distance and Degree 15 
Know Your Distance 15 
Rooting as a Function of Angle 18 
Angle Vs. Strength 18 
Allow No Time or Space 18 
Jab, Bridge, Finish 19 
Lien Huan (Continuously Linked) 20 
Sequence of Training 21 
 
 
Chapter 3 ‐ Pa Kua Chang Footwork Training 23 

Why Walk the Circle? 24 
Physical Benefits 24 

 
  

 
Table of Contents
 
Internal Cultivation 27 
Circle Walking as a Meditative Practice 27 
Circle Walking for Chʹi Cultivation 29 
Fighting Skills 31 
Circle Walking Variations 31 
The Foot Placement 31 
Snake Step 31 
Lion Step 34 
Crane Step 
Conclusion                                                                                                                  35 
Advanced Circle Walking: Training to Fight 36 
The Opponent Attacks First 37 
You Initiate the Attack 37 
Advanced Circle Walking 38 
Pivot Stepping and the Pa Kua Diagram 86 
Circle Walking 87 
Tʹai Chi Diagram Circle Walk Pole Training 39 
Spiral Pattern Pole Training 42 
Two or Three Pole Practice 45 
Adding More Poles 48 
The Tee‐Pee Pole Arrangement 49 
Changing the Poles 49 
Conclusion 50 
 
 
Chapter 4 ‐ Pa Kua Chang Body Training 51 
 
Hiding Flower Under Leaf Exercises 55 
The ʺMovingʺ Hiding Flower Exercise 57 
The Single Palm Change 61 
The Four Pillars of Pa Kua Training 61 
The Study of Pa Kua Chang Movement 63 
The Definition of Single Palm Change 65 
The ʺFormʺ of Single Palm Change 66 
The Movements of the ʺStandardʺ Single Palm Change 67 
The Principles 69 
Variations 71 
Kʹou Pu and Pai Pu in Application 81 
Kʹou Pu Usage 81 
Kʹou Pu and Pai Pu Kicks 85 
 
The Single Palm Change: Conclusion 86   
 
 
 
 
 

 
 

  Table of Contents
 
Chapter 5 ‐ Pa Kua Chang Palm Training  87 
 
The Eight ʺForty Eight Monthʺ Palms  90 
Single and Double Palm Change  92 
Throwing Palm  94 
Slapping Palm  96 
Lifting Palm  105 
Chopping Palm  109 
White Clouds Chasing the Stars Palm  118 
Sliding the Window Shutter to Look at the Moon Palm  124 
Follow‐on 48 Month Palm Training  127 
 
The Supplemental Palms  133 
Piercing Palm  133 
Swallow Penetrates Through the Forest Palm  137 
Three Basins Settling to the Ground Palm  142 
Embracing the Moon at the Chest Palm  146 
Conclusion  148 
Chapter 6 ‐ Pa Kua Chang Elbow Training  149 
 
The Basic Elbow Exercises  151 
The Eight Elbow Combination Drills  157 
Conclusion  167 
 
 
Chapter 7 ‐ Pa Kua Chang Chʹi Kung  169 
 
Introduction  170 
The Mind in Chʹi Kung Practice  174 
Body Motion in Chʹi Kung Practice  181 
Breathing in Chʹi Kung Practice  185 
The ʺStandard Eightʺ Chʹi Kung Set  187 
Sliding the Window Shutter to Look at the Moon  188 
Double Palm Change  190 
Unicorn Turns its Body  192 
Serving Tea Cups  194 
Serving Tea Cups with Throwing Palm  197 
Yin and Yang Opposing Palms  201 
Scooping the Moon From Sea Bottom  204 
Closing  204 
Conclusion  207 
 
 
Chapter 8 ‐ Conclusion  209

 
 

Acknowledgments 
 
 
 
I would like to thank a number of individuals who have made this book possible. 
First  and  foremost,  I  would  like  to  thank  Park  Bok  Nam  for  his  teaching  and 
guidance  and  his  patience  in  dealing  with  my  questions  and  endless  picture 
taking.  Thanks  is  also  due  to  my  senior  classmate.  Glen  Moore,  who  proofread 
the  material, gave  valuable  suggestions, and answered  many  of my  questions. I 
would also like to thank Jimmy Koo for helping with some of the computer work 
and Chris Stevens for his proofreading job. Very special thanks to Mariann Draga 
for  her  patience,  love,  and  support,  and  for  answering  the  phones  and  doing 
most of the office work during the months I was engrossed in this project. Thanks 
is also due to all of my students, each one has taught me something new about 
teaching Pa Kua Chang. 
There are three other individuals 1 would like to thank, not so much for their 
work  on  this  particular  project,  but  for  the  invaluable  lessons  they  have  taught 
me  about  martial arts  in  general.  Although  all  of  the  material  here  is from  Park 
Bok Namʹs system of Pa Kua Chang and the ideas and principles expressed here 
are all taught by Park, my ability to put these concepts into words comes from a 
culmination  of  my  martial  arts  background  and  experience.  During  my  martial 
arts  career,  there  have  been  three  individuals,  other  than  Glen  Moore  and  Park 
Bok Nam, who have helped to greatly improve my understanding of the internal 
martial  arts  and  my  ability  to  explain  the  principles  of  the  martial  arts  as  I 
understand  them.  These  individuals,  Vince  Black,  Tim  Cartmell,  and  Ken  Fish, 
are all brilliant teachers and I am forever in their debt for the lessons they have 
taught me. Thanks guys. 
 
 

vi 
 

Dedication 
 
 
 

 
Dedicated in Memory of   
Pa Kua Chang Master   
Lu Shui‐Tʹien   
(1894 ‐ 1978) 
 

vii 
  

Preface 
 
It  has  been  three  years  since  I  sat  down  to  There  were  no  beginners  in  the  class,  everyone 
write  the  preface  to  the  first  volume  of this  book.  was male, and everyone was in about the same age 
In  that  three  years  1  have  learned  a  lot.  1  have  group. Park did not teach beginning level material 
learned  a  lot  about  Pa  Kua  Chang  and  1  have  there.  Because  everyone  there  was  just  gaining  a 
learned  a  lot  about  Park  Bok  Namʹs  system  of  Pa  foundation  in  Parkʹs  system,  all  were  taught  the 
Kua  Chang.  Since  writing  the  first  volume  of  this  same basic material. 
book  I  have  made  four  trips  to  mainland  China,  When  I  moved  to  California  in  late  1992,  Park 
two  trips  to  Taiwan,  and  one  trip  to  Hong  Kong  asked me to start a class here. I started teaching a 
researching the art of Pa Kua Chang as it is taught  few  guys  in  a  local  school  yard  every  evening. 
by  various  instructors  in  China.  Shortly  after  There were only a few people in the class and they 
writing the last book, my status in Park Bok Namʹs  all had a martial arts background. Basically 1 used 
school  also  changed  from  that  of  being  a  student  the  time  to  do  my  own  workout  and  these  guys 
to  that  of  being  an  assistant  instructor  and  then,  followed  along.  I  did  not  have  to  do  a  lot  of 
most  recently,  a  licensed  instructor.  In  making  teaching because they picked it up pretty fast. The 
these transitions, my Pa Kua Chang training under  way  I  taught  was  the  way  I  had  been  shown.  I 
Park Bok Nam changed. It was only after I started  started by teaching the material that was presented 
actually  teaching  Parkʹs  Pa  Kua  system  as  an  in  the  first  book.  The  students  learned  the  eight 
assistant  instructor  that  I  really  began  to  direction  rooted  stepping,  the  circle  walk,  the  fan 
appreciate  the  depth  of  his  art,  his  teaching  style,  Chang  exercises,  the  palm  exercises,  etc.  Park  came 
and  his  systematic  approach  to  helping  his  out  to  California  about  four  times  that  first  year 
students reach their full potential in the art.  and  watched  what  we  were  practicing,  made 
Park  teaches  all  students  by  ʺprescription.ʺ  corrections, and taught some new things. 
This means that each student is given exactly what  In  late  1993,  the  local  kung  fu  teacher  decided 
he or she needs based on age, sex, physical health,  he would move out of town the next Spring and he 
ability, coordination, occupation, size, personality,  asked  if  I  would  be  interested  in  taking  over  his 
and goals. When I first began studying with Park,  school  when  he  left  in  April  of  1994.  The  school 
1 had about seven years experience in the internal  was  located  right  across  the  hall  from  my 
martial  arts,  I  was  relatively  young  and  in  fairly  publishing  office  and  we  had  used  the  school  on 
good  shape,  and  so  he  began  teaching  me  his  Pa  numerous  occasions  to  host  seminars  conducted 
Kua Chang pretty much as it was presented in the  by Park and other visiting instructors. I thought it 
last  volume  of  this  book.  For  the  first  six  or  eight  would be a good opportunity since the old teacher 
months of training, all of my lessons were private  already  had  a  group  of  students  who  wanted  to 
and so I did not get a chance to see how any of the  continue  training.  1  called  Park  and  asked  if  he 
other  students  were  training.  I  figured  that  they  would give me permission to open up a school. He 
were  being  taught  about  the  same  thing  1  was  told me that I could open up a school and teach for 
being taught.  him  as  an  assistant  instructor.  He  said  that  1  did 
Later,  Park  started  teaching  a  group  class  in  not have enough experience teaching to be an full 
Baltimore, Maryland, and I attended those classes.  instructor  on  my  own.  That  was  fine  with  me.  1 
The prerequisite for the class was that the students  figured my small group would just carry on as we 
have a martial arts background. What Park taught  had  been  in  the  school  yard,  except  for  now  we 
there was pretty much the way I had been taught.  would have a place to practice indoors. 

viii 
 

The  next  time  Park  visited,  several  months  students needed, ʺThis one needs to concentrate on 

before I opened my school, he said, ʺYou want to  slow shaking palm because he has trouble with his 
have  a  school,  you  need  to  learn  how  to  teach.ʺ  body connections and his hips are tight, that other 
What  1  found  out  was  that  since  Park  teaches  by  one  needs  more  stance  training  because  his  legs 
prescription,  all  Iʹd  really  seen  of  his  Pa  Kua  are  weak,  etc.ʺ  So  I  began  to  learn  how  to  teach 
program  was  my  personal  prescription.  1  got  the  each  individual  student  based  on  their  unique 
prescription  that  he  gives  to  people  who  are  needs.  Some  students  needed  more  of  one  thing 
young, in good shape, and already have a martial  than others, some students needed to learn things 
arts background.  the  other  students  didnʹt  need  to  learn,  and  some 
What Park began to teach me next was the basic  students could skip over some of the basics if they 
prescription  he  gives  to  beginners  who  have  no  already  had  a  good  foundation,  flexible  body,  or 
martial  arts  background  whatsoever.  There  was  good  balance.  Over  the  past  two  years  Park  has 
quite  a  difference.  This  program  included  basic  continued  to  monitor  my  students  and  suggest 
posture  holding  in  various  low  stances,  basic  low  what they need and donʹt need in their individual 
posture  forms,  jumping  sets,  Shaolin  Long  Fist  training programs. 
forms,  Praying  Mantis  forms,  and  rudimentary  What  was  interesting  to  me  was  that  my 
straight line sets. All of this was integrated in with  research into the history of Pa Kua Chang and the 
the fan chang exercises, basic circle walking, palm  biographies  of  the  old  masters  which  I  conducted 
exercises,  and  eight  direction  rooted  stepping  during my trips to China was very consistent with 
exercises  in  a  systematic  method  designed  for  Parkʹs  method.  In  researching  the  backgrounds  of 
beginners.  the most famous Pa Kua Chang masters in China, I 
When  Park  began  teaching  me  these  things,  I  found  out  that  the  majority  of  them  were  from 
asked, ʺHow come I never learned this before?ʺ He  small  farming  villages,  began  their  practice  of 
said,  ʺYou  didnʹt  need  these  things.  You  already  martial arts with Shaolin based arts, and then later 
had some background. But beginners who have no  practiced  Pa  Kua  Chang  as  a  ʺgraduateʺ  level 
martial  arts  foundation,  no  flexibility,  no  martial  arts  study.  Parkʹs  teacher,  Lu  Shui  Tʹien, 
coordination,  no  balance,  need  these  basics.ʺ  I  had this identical background. 
learned  all  of  these  ʺbeginnersʺ  exercises  and  In the old days, the pattern of development was 
began teaching them to the beginners who signed  such  that  the  students  first  gain  physical  strength 
up  at  my  school  starting  in  April  of  1994.  In  my  and endurance working around the village and in 
classes,  I  mixed  these  exercises,  forms,  and  the  fields  performing  manual  labor.  At  the  same 
practice  drills  in  with  the  material  which  was  time  they  gained  increased  levels  of  flexibility, 
presented  in  the  first  book  in  order  to  form  a  coordination, balance, and basic martial arts skills 
training curriculum for the school.  in  the  study  of  a  Shaolin  based  systems  (ʺvillageʺ 
Now  1  thought  I  was  on  my  way.  I  had  a  style, ʺfamilyʺ style, or ʺfarmerʺ style martial arts). 
beginners curriculum and I started teaching all of  Later  they  progressed  to  Pa  Kua  Chang  where 
the  exercises,  forms  and  drills  in  sequence  to  my  they  learned  how  to  refine  the  strength  and  skill 
students. The next time Park visited, he looked at  they had already developed. 
my  students  practicing  and  he  said,  ʺNow  you  One  of  the  main  problems  I  see  in  the  United 
need  to  learn  to  teach  by  prescription.ʺ  He  began  States  today  is  that  many  practitioners  are  trying 
pointing  out  different  characteristics  about  to  jump  straight  into  the  performance  of  Pa  Kua 
students  at  my  school  as  they  were  practicing.  Chang  forms  which  are  specifically  designed  to 
Heʹd  say,  ʺThis  guy  has  a  very  stiff  upper  body.  refine  martial  arts  skill  and  polish  ʺtrained 
You need to teach him the first Long Fist form and  strengthʺ  without  having  any  strength  or  skill  to 
have him practice more tʹien fan chang. Heʹd spot  begin  with.  They  are  trying  to  build  a  house  on  a 
someone  else,  ʺThis  guy  over  here  has  trouble  shaky  foundation.  Parkʹs  method  is  different.  His 
with coordination. You need to teach him the basic  training  program  develops  basic  strengths  and 
Shaolin  kicking  set.ʺ  Through  the  course  of  his  skills  in  the  performance  of  exercises  which  are 
visit  he  would  tell  me  what  he  thought  all  of  the  designed  to  build  a  strong  foundation  before  any 

i x 
 

of  the  ʺclassicalʺ  Pa  Kua  Chang  sequences  are  Personally,  1  would  be  very  happy  if  the  only 
taught.  Parkʹs  idea  is  that  if  the  student  has  not  things  you  got  out  of  reading  this  book  is  an 
developed  basic  strengths  and  basic  skills,  they  appreciation for the depth of Pa Kua Chang and a 
will  not  fully  understand  Pa  Kua  Chang.  So  his  desire to take what is presented here and explore it 
method  develops  students  in  progressive  stages  on your own terms. Take what we have presented 
just as the masters of old.  in these two volumes and see how many different 
In learning more about Parkʹs Pa Kua and how  ways you can combine them in practice. Once you 
to  teach  his  Pa  Kua,  Iʹve  gained  a  great  have  built  a  foundation,  donʹt  be  afraid  to 
appreciation  for  the  depth  of  this  system  and  its  experiment  and  try  new  things.  If  you  already 
adaptability to not only suit different practitioners,  practice  another  style  of  Pa  Kua,  see  how  these 
but  also  various  opponentʹs  and  combat  ideas,  movements,  and  concepts  fit  into  your 
environments.  In  reading  this  book  you  will  system.  Explore  the  combinations  and  find  out  if 
probably  get  sick  of  me  emphasizing  the  point  they work in the two person practice environment. 
about  how  adaptable  and  variable  Pa  Kua  Chang  If something works for you in a very efficient and 
is  to  situation  and  individual  practitioner.  1  effective  manner,  then  keep  it,  its  yours.  If  it 
emphasize this point in every chapter of this book  doesnʹt  work,  go  back  to  the  drawing  board  and 
because  after  answering  literally  hundreds  of  try  to  find  out  why.  Was  the  distancing  off?  Was 
phone calls and letters about Pa Kua Chang in my  the  timing  wrong?  Could  the  angle  have  been 
capacity as the editor and publisher of the Pa Kua  better?  Everyone  has  different  strengths  and 
Chang Journal, the one point most people who are  weaknesses and what works well for one may not 
interested  in  studying  Pa  Kua  donʹt  get  is  that  it  work  well  for  all.  Pa  Kua  Chang  study  is  about 
can change from person to person and situation to  finding  out what  works best  for you  in  any  given 
situation. Iʹve had dozens of people ask me, ʺWhy  situation.  If  it  is  natural,  fluid,  smooth,  efficient, 
are there so many different Pa Kua Chang styles if  and effective, then it is Pa Kua Chang. 
Pa Kua is only one hundred a fifty years old?ʺ It is  Enough  of  the  component  parts  and  principles 
because  every  person  should  learn  to  do  Pa  Kua  of Lu Shui Tʹienʹs Pa Kua Chang system have been 
Chang  differently  in  order  to  make  it  their  own.  presented in the two volumes of this book for the 
As Park always says, ʺPa Kua means changing.ʺ  beginner  to  be  able  to  learn  to  develop  useful 
On  many  occasions,  1  have  seen  Park  get  internal body mechanics and applications. It is up 
frustrated  with  the  same  kind  of  questioning.  to  you  to  do  the  work.  If  you  are  an  experienced 
People  at  demonstrations  and  seminars  will  ask,  practitioner  of  Pa  Kua,  1  hope  that  some  of  the 
ʺIf  somebody  grabbed  you  like  this,  what  would  exercises, ideas, and concepts presented here help 
you do?ʺ They do not understand that there is no  you in the study of your own style. If you are new 
ʺanswerʺ  to  that  question.  The  response  to  the  to this art, 1 hope that what we have written here 
grab  would  be  a  very  spontaneous  reaction  and  will  provide  you  with  a  foundation  for  future 
would  be  a  result  of  exactly  how  the  opponent  study. Have fun in your practice and research. 
executed  the  grab  in  terms  of  the  direction  of  the   
force, the magnitude of the force, the energy of the   
motion,  the  angle  and  movement  of  the   
opponentʹs body position, the opponentʹs size and  Dan Miller   
ability  level,  the  surrounding  environment,  the  Fall 1995   
timing  and  rhythm  of  the  motion,  etc.  Out  of  20  Carmel, CA 
different grabs which appeared to be ʺthe sameʺ to   
an  untrained  observer.  Park  might  execute  a 
different response to each. The response is ʺin the 
moment,ʺ not a pre‐calculated ʺtechnique.ʺ Instead 
of  trying  to  explain  all  of  these  things.  Parkʹs 
typical  response  to  an  over  zealous  ʺwhat  would 
you do ifʺ question is, ʺJust die. Thatʹs all.ʺ 

x 
 

A Note on the Romanization of Chinese 

 
 
The  question  of  romanization  of  Chinese  terms  is  always  a  difficult  one. 
There  is  really  no  great  romanization  system  for  Chinese.  Both  of  the  commonly 
used systems, Wade‐Giles and Pinyin have their shortcomings. We have chosen to 
express  the  Chinese  terms  in  this  volume  in  the  Wade‐Giles  system  of 
romanization  simply  because  we  used  this  system  in  the  previous  volume.  We 
chose to use Wade‐Giles in the first book because it had been the standard in the 
United States  for  years  and  we  felt  the  terms  were more  familiar  to  the  reader  in 
that  system.  Now  the  Pinyin  system  seems  to  be  more  prevalent,  however,  for 
consistency we will stay with Wade‐Giles. In order to help with the Chinese terms, 
we have included the Chinese characters for the terms in parenthesis after the first 
appearance of those terms. 
As  a  simple  guide  to  pronunciation  in  the  Wade‐Giles  system,  please  refer  to 
the chart below: 
t, without apostrophe, as in Tao: is pronounced like d   
p, without apostrophe, as in Pa Kua: is pronounced like b   
k, without apostrophe, as in Pa Kua: is pronounced like g 
j, without apostrophe, as in jen mai: is pronounced like r   
ch, without apostrophe, as in Tai Chi: is pronounced like j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

x i 
 

xii 
 
 

 
Chapter 1 
Introduction 

 
 

1 

Chapter 1 
Introduction
Welcome to the second volume of the
Fundamentals of Pa Kua Chang! If you quickly
skim through the contents of this book, you will
see that the chapter headings are pretty much the
same as those in the first volume. Hopefully you
have taken the time to study and practice the
material in the first volume in order to gain a
foundation for the material which is presented
here in the second volume.
In volume one, we introduced the reader to the
background of both Park Bok Nam and his
teacher, Lu Shui-T'ien, we discussed some of the
basic theories of Park's system of training, and
we presented some rudimentary footwork, body
training, palm striking, and ch'i kung exercises.
This volume continues from where the last book
left off in terms of the training progression, but
more importantly, this book will give you
enough of the training methods, and ideas about
how they might be combined in practice and in
application, to enable you to begin to develop
your own ideas about Pa Kua Chang training
exercises, form routines, and martial applications.
As we discussed in the previous volume, Lu
Shui-T'ien's system of Pa Kua Chang, is a very
systematic, progressive method of training
which develops each individual student in a
gradual, balanced, and complete manner.
However, the goal of this progressive method is
not to keep the student training exercise after
exercise, form after form, year after year. Park's
goal in developing a student is for the student to
gain enough physical, theoretical, and practical
2 
 
experience in the practice of the "fundamentals"
that he or she can then begin to discover Pa Kua
Chang on their own terms.
Park does not want the student to always
follow his ideas, he wants the student to make Pa
Kua Chang their own. He wants students to have
their own ideas, come up with their own forms,
have their own specialties, and create their own
individual expression of this art. His job is to give
students the fundamental tools, which includes the
physical fundamentals as well as the theoretical
principles, and then make sure that each student's
individual expression of this art conforms to the
overall principles. He does not try to insure that
each student learns the exact same set of standard
exercises and forms and performs them identically
to everyone else in the school. That method of
teaching is not Pa Kua Chang.
Park's method is to first develop the student's
body in terms of flexibility, coordination, balance,
and stability. Because every student starts from a
different place in terms of these components, each
individual has a slightly different training program.
Along with that training, the student also practices
methods which teach the proper mechanics of
efficient physical motion for the development of
subtle power, and begins to develop an
internal-external harmony by uniting the mind,
body, and breath through the practice of ch'i kung
and meditation.
Once the student has made progress along
these lines, he or she will then be taught the
rudiments of Pa Kua Chang as we presented them

Introduction 
in the first book. The students learn a little bit about
how to remain stable and balanced when employing
various combat footwork methods, they learn how to
begin to develop internal striking power, and they
practice exercises which continue to develop their
bodies in terms of flexibility, balance, and
internal-external harmony. This is what we presented
in the first volume.
Once the student has formed a foundation in all
of the areas listed above, they will start expanding their
knowledge in each of those areas. They will learn
more about internal striking power by practicing the
"forty eight month" palms and the "supplemental"
palm exercises which are presented in Chapter 5 of
this volume. They will learn how to use their elbows
in both blocking and striking by practicing the elbow
exercises which are presented in Chapter 6 of this
volume. They learn how to begin to integrate some of
the body training methods into the circle walk practice
by executing a number of variations of the single palm
change as presented in Chapter 3 of this volume. They
will also learn more about footwork by practicing
advanced methods of k'ou pu, pai pu, and walking the
circle as presented in Chapter 2 of this volume.
Once the student learns all of these fundamentals,
he or she is now ready to start learning an integrated
Pa Kua Chang. Up until this point in the training
program, the exercises and drills have only been
components of Pa Kua Chang. The continuously
flowing, twisting, turning, circling forms and
applications which are characteristic of Pa Kua Chang
have not really been prominent thus far in the training.
This is because, in Park's system, the student was not
ready for this training if he or she had not thoroughly
practiced all of the fundamentals. So the beginning
levels of practice in Park's school consists only of
fundamentals, or prerequisites to an integrated Pa Kua
Chang.
At the intermediate level, Park's Pa Kua Chang is
made up of several basic component's as follows:
circle walking, k'ou pu and pai pu footwork, eight
direction rooted stepping, single palm change, double
palm change, eight animal postures and their
associated changes, forty eight month palms,
supplemental palms, basic kicks, ch'i kung training,
and the elbow blocks and strikes. Every circle
3 
walking and linear combat form and application
which is taught at the intermediate level consists of
combinations of all of these exercises. If the students
have practiced all of these components thousands of
times as repetitive exercises, it becomes very easy for
them to learn dozens of different form routines and
applications based on these movements. More
importantly, the students are also taught how to think
about the combinations of the fundamental
components such that they can begin to create their
own forms, applications, and variations.
In Chapter 4 of this volume we present at least a
dozen different variations of Pa Kua Chang's single
palm change. All of these changes are based on
exercises which were presented in the first volume of
this book. Add to this the double palm executions
from the palm training chapter, the sixty-four possible
changes which come out of the eight animal training,
the various circle walking components which are
presented in Chapter 2 of this volume, and the elbow
strikes which are presented in Chapter 6 of this
volume, and you have an almost unlimited number of
Pa Kua Chang forms, changes, variations, and
applications that you can create by yourself.
In writing this book, we want to present you with
enough material and ideas about how all of the
components in both books can be integrated together
so that you can begin to understand how to create your
own Pa Kua Chang training routines and applications.
If you only study a choreographed form routine, that is
all you have. If you study component parts in a
systematic method and then learn how those
components can be blended in a variety of ways, then
you have something with endless possibilities. You
have something that can be adaptable in any situation
and in any environment. You have something that is
yours.
Getting the Most Out of This Book
Obviously, you are free to study any or all parts
of this book as you like. However, we have some
recommendations for how the exercises and drills in
this book might best be studied in order for you to
get the most out of this training process. Not all
students in Park's school will train in this exact
sequence because Park teaches each student by

    The Fundamentals of Pa Kua Chang, Volume II
prescription. However, this is a general sequence that
you can follow for your own training purposes. The
recommendations are as follows:    speed and power; and then integrating those
 
1) First, we recommend that you have practiced all of
the material presented in the first volume and have a
good experiential knowledge of that material. If you
have not practiced the shaking palm, dragon back, and
single and double palm change striking exercises
sufficiently, you will not be able to get the most out of
the palm and elbow exercises presented in this book.
If you have not practiced the circle walking with the
basic change of directions, the k'ou pu and pai pu
exercises, and the eight animal circle walking form as
presented in the last volume, the circle walking
practice presented in this book will not be natural and
fluid. If you have not practiced the "body training"
exercises which were presented in the last volume, the
single palm change variations which are presented in
this book will be awkward for you.
So, number one, practice the material in volume
one as a prerequisite to anything in this volume.
2) Begin the study of this book with the T'ai Chi
diagram circle walking as explained in Chapter 3 and
the "standard eight" ch'i kung set presented in Chapter
7. It is best to practice the ch'i kung set for a few
months before you try to practice the "forty eight
month" palms. You should also practice the two
"hiding flower under leaf" exercises that are shown in
Chapter 4. These exercises will help to loosen your
body and prepare you for the next level of training.
3) Next, begin to practice the single palm change
variations as they are outlined in Chapter 4. These are
all built from exercises you practiced in the first
volume. Practice each one until it can be executed
fluidly and smoothly with no breaks or hesitations in
the movements. You can also start to practice the forty
eight month palms (Chapter 5) and elbow sets
(Chapter 6) after you feel you have gained an
increased level of flexibility and suppleness through
the practice of the standard
eight ch 'i kung set. Keep in mind that this practice
includes a sequential study beginning with slow
movements, then increasing the speed of those
movements while maintaining smoothness,
4 
fluidity, and precision; then practicing those
movements with power; then practicing with both
movements will all of the eight direction rooted
stepping techniques.
4) Now begin to practice the eight animals circle
walking form (as presented in the first volume)
utilizing the outside single palm change (variation
#6 in Chapter 4) to change directions. You can
also begin to practice combinations of the forty
eight month palms and supplemental palm
maneuvers. Experiment and see which ones flow
smoothly and fluidly to the next. Create various
combinations that feel comfortable to you and
practice them statically at first, and then combine
them with the eight direction rooted stepping
footwork. A glimpse of Park executing some of
these combinations is shown on the companion
video.
5) After you have gained some experience with
the material as outlined above, begin to
incorporated the eight animal postures into the
T'ai Chi diagram circle walking. You can also
begin to practice adding the forty eight month
palm and supplemental palm maneuvers into the
single palm change variations. Some hints about
how to do this are given in Chapter 4. However,
you can experiment and see which combinations
work best for you. When experimenting, always
keep in mind the lien huan ( - continuously
linked) principle which is explained in Chapter 2.
Now that you have practiced the eight animal
form executing the simple directional change
presented in the previous volume, the outside
change as presented in Chapter 4 of this volume,
and in the practice of the T'ai Chi diagram circle
walk as presented in Chapter 3 of this volume, you
should now try and vary the order of the animal
changes to learn how each animal can flow
smoothly to the others. Thus far you have practiced
this form changing from lion, to unicorn, to
snake, to swallow, to dragon flying, to bear, to
phoenix, to monkey. Now experiment and see
how you can fluidly and smoothly change from
lion to snake, from lion to swallow, from lion to
dragon flying, etc. Experiment with all 64 possible

Introduction
combinations of changes and see how you can
smoothly and fluidly execute these changes on
the circle and then on the T'ai Chi diagram
walking pattern.
7) Next, begin to practice the basic two and
three pole circle walking patterns, including the
spirals, the small circles, and the figure eights.
You can also begin to experiment with
incorporating the eight animal changes in with
the single palm change variations and the
various palms and elbows. Some hints on the
incorporation of the animals into the single palm
change variations are given in Chapter 4 of this
volume.
8) Next, try to incorporate the animal
changes and the palms, elbows, and kicks into
the one, two, and three pole footwork patterns.
Sometimes you can avoid the poles in the
execution of evasive maneuvers, and sometimes
you can strike the poles with one of the palms,
elbows, or kicks.
9) While transitioning through the steps
listed above, try to find which component of Pa
Kua Chang feels most natural and comfortable
to you. It might be the footwork, it might be the
palm executions, it might be the elbow strikes, if
might be the kicks, the locks, the throws, etc.
Once you have found your "niche," practice
those drills with a greater intensity and more
thought than the others. Park calls this
"developing a specialty."In executing all of the
exercises, forms, and drills outlined above,
always think about how these things might be
efficiently applied in combat. From all of the
combinations of exercises and movements listed
above, you can create an endless number of
effective applications. Chapter 2 of this book
will give you some ideas about the theory and
strategy of Pa Kua Chang application. Research
the utility of each of the motions you have
created. Think in terms of the "jab, bridge,
finish" sequence which is explained in Chapter 2.
Some of the eight animal movements make
great jab-bridge combinations. The bridge can
easily be followed by other animal combinations
in order to lock or throw the opponent, or the
bridge can be followed by various palm and
elbow combinations. Think about how all of
5 
 
these things might be combined in a continuous
and smooth manner, research the combinations
with a partner, and then try them in a free
sparring situation.
Throughout this book, we will emphasize
variation and change. Park says, "Pa Kua means
changing." It means changing in accordance with
the situation, changing in accordance with the
environment, changing in accordance with the
opponent, changing in accordance with your
individual character. Pa Kua Chang is about
being naturally efficient, in accordance with your
own individual nature, in any given situation.
In order to be able to learn how to adapt to any
situation, you have to learn how to create from
what you've been taught. Looking through the list
of recommendations above, you may have
questioned, "How do I link all of the animal
forms together to create 64 changes?" or "How
do I incorporate the forty eight month palms into
the single palm change variations?" That is for
you to find out. Practice the fundamentals until
they become natural to you and then explore the
combinations and variations. If you have
practiced the fundamentals sufficiently, you will
be surprised at what combinations start to
naturally arise. Pa Kua Chang is for you to
research and discover.
Park calls researching combinations and
exploring variations "doing your homework." He
does not give these answers to his students. He
requires all of his students to do a lot of
homework. They have to do the research and
then show him what they discovered. If the
changes and applications they created do not
conform to the Pa Kua Chang principles, Park
will lend suggestions and then tell the student to
go back and re-do his "homework." His favorite
line is, "I think you need to think about it some
more."
By going through the process of researching
the components of the art and how they are put
together, the student learns about creating,
adaptability, changing, and variability. This is the
skill of Pa Kua Chang. Pa Kua Chang is
something we teach to ourselves after being shown
the fundamentals. That is why there are so many
expressions of Pa Kua Chang in existence today,
even though the art is only 150 years old. The old
masters of Pa Kua Chang did not teach all of their

  The Fundamentals of Pa Kua Chang, Volume II
students the exact same way and the students did
not follow the exact movements of their
instructors. They all learned the fundamentals
and then learned how to express the art in a way
that worked for them. But it is all Pa Kua Chang
because it is based on the same principles.
Park does not like to say that there are different
"styles" of Pa Kua Chang. In his mind the Pa Kua
Chang that everyone practices is all the same if the
principles are there. Everyone is simply practicing
different expressions of the same "style." Today
everyone wants to categorize all of the different
expressions of Pa Kua Chang into "this style" and
"that style." In doing this, practitioners are limiting
themselves by not seeing that all "styles" of Pa Kua
include all of the same principles and thus they
can all include the same methods. Variation of
expression is part of the art.
When I was visiting the late T'ai Chi Ch'uan
master Fu Zhong Wen in Shanghai in 1991, he
said the exact same thing about T'ai Chi Ch'uan.
He said, "In the old days, no one who practiced
T'ai Chi said that they did Yang style or Chen style
or Wu style, T'ai Chi was just T'ai Chi." What he
was saying was that although individual
practitioners, or lineages of practitioners, expressed
6 
the art differently, it was all practiced according to
the same principles, so it was all just T'ai Chi
Ch'uan. Limiting your understanding to the
confines of a "style" will always limit your own
individual expression of the art.
My recommendation to anyone wanting to
learn Park Bok Nam's system of Pa Kua Chang is to
practice all of the fundamentals as outlined in
these two volumes and their companion videos
and then research how all of these components
can be combined in a variety of forms, movements,
and applications. Do not stop your training and
look for "new" exercises when you have completed
"learning" the exercises presented in these books.
Once you have learned the exercises, your Pa Kua
Chang training has just begun! Take the
foundation and build on it by exploring how
these movements in the exercises can be linked
together and employed in fighting. In order to
check your progress, periodically attend one of
Park's seminars or training camps and show him
what you have discovered. He will be glad to make
suggestions and corrections if he has seen you
have really put some hard work and effort into
your practice.
  

 
 
  Chapter 2
 
 
  Pa Kua Chang Fighting Strategy 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

7 

Chapter 2 
Pa Kua Chang 
Fighting Strategy 
In the last volume of this series we discussed the
"philosophical roots" of Pa Kua Chang by
explaining the basic theories of yin/yang ( ), the
pa kua ( ), and the five elements ( - wu
hsing). We also presented some examples of how
these theories might be directly related to the
practice of martial arts. Park Bok Nam refers to
these three concepts in Chinese philosophy as the
theoretical "trinity" upon which all Pa Kua Chang
strategy, training, tactics, and techniques are based.
Park believes that every aspect of Pa Kua Chang
must adhere to the principles of this trinity. If one
component is missing, the practice, technique, or
application will be unbalanced and incomplete. In
this regard, he makes an analogy to sustainable life
on earth. He says that the sun and the moon are
represented by the yin and yang, the five elements
represent the earth, and the constant rotational
movement of the sun and moon around the earth is
symbolized by the pa kua. Just as life could not
exist without all three of these components (sun and
moon, earth, and constant motion), Park says that a
Pa Kua technique which does not contain all three
principles of the trinity is "dead."
Philosophical Connection to Pa Kua Chang
Martial Application:
A few examples of the philosophical trinity
not being complete in an application of a
martial arts technique would be as follows:
1) If a practitioner executes a technique and
does not obtain the most efficient angle of
attack, the pa kua theory of utilizing angles and
positioning the body optimally has not been
8 
followed. The theory and rotational angles and linear
motion is expressed in the Fu Hsi, or “early heaven”
arrangement of the eight trigrams as presented in the
last volume of this book. The concept of utilizing
angles in fighting is presented in more detail in this
volume.
2) If in executing applications the practitioner
does not use the rotational, circling, and spiraling
principles to overcome his opponent with the least
amount of force, resistance, and invasiveness, the pa
kua theory of utilizing circular and rotational motions
is being ignored. The theory of circular and cyclical
patterns of motion is expressed in the King Wen. or
"later heaven." arrangement of the trigrams as
presented in the last volume of this book.
3) If in the execution of a technique, the
practitioner focuses too strongly on one direction and
gets hit from another, the pa kua theory of extending
awareness to all eight directions has been forgotten.
This theory is expressed in the balancing of eight
directions expressed in the early heaven arrangement
of the trigrams.
4) If the practitioner uses force which is not
appropriate for the technique, either in trying to
overpower the opponent, applying force at the wrong
time, or applying force at an incorrect angle, then the
five element theory has been violated because the
creative and destructive properties of the five
elements are not flowing naturally.
5) If the practitioner's movements are not stable
and balanced, if one movement or application
cannot connect to the next in a fluid, smooth,
and even manner, if the practitioner ignores

low while striking high, or forgets the left
while moving to the right, then the yin/yang
principle has not been followed.
Philosophical Connection to Pa Kua Chang
Training:
A few examples of a practitioner not following
the philosophical trinity in designing a training
program would be as follows:
1) Not considering every possible fighting
scenario in practicing the art would
violate the combinatorial aspects of the pa
kua. This not only applies to such combinations
as high/low, left/right, inside/outside,
attack/defense, and long range/short range as
we discussed in the first volume, but also
considerations of environment and terrain, such
as light/dark, rough/smooth, hilly/flat, or
open/confined should be considered when
practicing. Additionally, the practitioner
considers the type of opponent he or she might
be facing. Is the opponent tall/short, heavy/light,
left handed/right handed, fast/slow, a puncher
or kicker, an inside fighter or outside fighter, a
grappler-or-a-boxer,-etc.
In order to follow the combinatorial theories of
the pa kua, the practitioner considers all
combinations of these yin/yang pairs when
researching his or her art. For instance, the
practitioner may ask himself, "How would I
best handle a large, strong, slow grappler on
rocky terrain?" And of course the combinations
can become more complex. One may be
fighting a large, fast opponent who is skilled at
using all sixteen of his striking weapons and
the fight might take place in a dark, confined
environment (like a bar). If all of these
scenarios are not addressed in training, the
practitioner is violating the pa kua
combinatorial theory and thus the practice is
not-complete.
2) If the practitioner does not practice a
balanced program of ch'i kung which addresses
all of the five yin organs and their respective
energy states in a balanced manner, the five
element system of checks and balances is not
being addressed. If the practitioner is
concentrating too heavily on any one aspect of
training and ignoring others, the five element
theory of checks and balances is also being
violated. Practicing too much ch'i kung, too
9 
much fighting, too much footwork, too much
circle walking, too many palm exercises, too
much meditation, or too many breathing
exercises, at the expense of all of the other
aspects of training is not following the
principles of the five element theory.
3) If the practitioner does not balance his or her
overall training routine between yang exercise
(fighting, power exercises, etc.) and yin
exercise (energy building methods of ch'i kung
and meditation), then the overall program is not
balanced.
The philosophical correspondences which
are listed above are just a few of the many that
one should consider in practice and fighting.
Although most of these aspects of martial arts
training and application may seem like
common sense requirements, having the
philosophical model as a base will not only
ensure that the practitioner does not forget any
of these training or fighting principles, but will
also provide a theoretical base in researching
different aspects of the art. Without a
theoretical base and a solid foundation, it will
be difficult for the student to continually
discover deeper levels of training.
In evaluating a student's martial
applications or training program, Park will
always look for the presence of the principles
of the philosophical trinity. Park says that
following the principles of the philosophical
trinity means that the student is being natural
and the training is complete. Park says that
these theories are the theories of nature and all
things that are natural follow these theories. Pa
Kua Chang is an art which follows natural
principles belonging to the earth, the
environment, and the human. Because these
principles are natural, they can be used
universally and adapt to any given situation.
In the remainder of this chapter we will build
on the basic concepts outlined in the previous
book and we will discuss some strategy of Pa
Kua application so that the reader will have some
basic principles to use as guidelines when
training to use Pa Kua as a fighting art. However,
first we will discuss how some of the strategies of
Pa Kua Chang have evolved from the theories of
the philosophical trinity.
 

The Evolution of Pa Kua Strategy
As stated above, all Pa Kua Chang fighting
strategies and applications come from the theory
of yin/yang, five elements, and pa kua - the
principles of nature. As we discussed in detail in
the last volume of this book, yin and yang represent
the dynamic interaction of opposites, the five
elements represent a system of checks and balances
and interactive play between components of a
system, and the pa kua represents angular, linear,
rotational, and cyclical movement, variation,
change, and combinatorial theory. Throughout
history, almost all aspects of Chinese religion,
society, art, and culture have used these models
as a philosophical base for their theories, and
warfare is no exception.
All of the great military and martial minds in
China's vast history have drawn from the
philosophy of yin/yang, pa kua, and five elements
in constructing their theories and strategies of
warfare. The relationship between Chinese
philosophy and the strategies of war become
quite evident when one turns to the classic
transmissions of warfare (Sun Tzu's Art of War
being the most well known) which have guided
China's military development from the Warring
States Period through present time.
Throughout a large part of China's modern
history (T'ang Dynasty through the Ch'ing
Dynasty), all military leaders, in order to earn
their military appointment, were required to pass
the imperial examinations. These examinations
were based on the compilation of information
contained in seven classic military documents:
T'ai Kung's Secret Teachings, The Methods of Ssu-ma,
Sun-tzu's Art of War, Wu-tzu, Wei Liao-tzu, Three
Strategies of Huang Shih-kung, and Questions and
Replies Between T'ang T'ai-tsung and Li Wei-kung.
All of these classics emphasize similar strategies,
such as overcoming one's opponent through subtle
skill instead of brute force and outwitting one's
opponent through speed, stealth, evasiveness,
and flexibility. Even modern day military books
in China, like Mao Tse-tung on Guerrilla Warfare,
adhere to the same principles and theories that
were valid centuries ago. All of these strategies can
be traced back to the theoretical models of the yin/
yang, pa kua, and five elements.
Drawing from the teachings of the classics and
10 
the fundamental theories of Chinese philosophy,
each generation of military and martial leadership
has adapted to the situation at hand. In all
varieties of warfare in China, from hand-to-hand,
weapon-to-weapon, foot soldier-to-mounted
soldier, mounted soldier-to-mounted soldier,
combat with armor and shields, chariots, or
cavalry; all the way to present day conventional
weapons, the specific tactics and weapons of
fighting have changed, but the theories and
principles of warfare have remained the same.
Pa Kua Chang theory is no different than those
principle laid out in the military classics and in
fact, more than any other combative art form in
China, it adheres to the principles of Chinese
philosophy which formed the foundation for all
military thought in China. Tung Hai Ch'uan's
( ) genius was in taking fighting techniques he
knew from his Shaolin based training and
modifying what he knew in order to be consistent
with the theories of Chinese philosophy. The
originator of Pa Kua Chang went back to the roots
of theory and strategy in inventing his art and in
doing so left a true art form; one that is open to
variation and change from one practitioner to
another and one that is adaptable to an endless
variety of situations.
The Birth of Pa Kua Strategy
Pa Kua Chang is an art based on natural
principles, not on individual strengths, techniques,
environments, or situations, and therefore it can
be successfully applied in any situation and by
any practitioner. However, an examination of its
development shows that it was developed in a
specific time and place in Chinese history and
many of the techniques that have been passed
down to today's practitioners are reflective of that
moment in history. Pa Kua Chang was not
originated, nor was it nurtured through its infancy,
as an art for soldiers on the battlefield or for boxers
in a ring. The art "earned its stripes" in its use as
a guerrilla style tactic employed to fight multiple
opponents. Therefore, in order to understand
some of the primary fighting tactics the Pa Kua
Chang practitioner has historically employed
when applying his art, one must look back to the
circumstances of its origin.
During the time when this art was becoming
popular in China as a very effective combat 

method, the majority of the practitioners utilizing
this art were working professionally as body guards,
caravan escorts, and residence guards. The bandits
and thieves of the day, who were the primary
opponents of the Pa Kua practitioners, usually
carried light or concealed weapons and employed
"dog pack" like tactics in attacking their opponents.
Therefore, those who worked as bodyguards,
residence guards, and caravan escorts needed to
be able to handle simultaneous attacks from
multiple opponents who were armed with
weapons.
In order to successfully handle opponents
employing these tactics, one needed to be highly
mobile, very quick and thorough in application,
and very efficient in dealing with more than one
attacker at a time. Pa Kua Chang became famous
in this era because it's practitioners were able to
draw from its underlying theories and adapt
perfectly to this situation. The practitioners were
highly mobile, lightning fast, observant and aware
of all directions, and thus could deal with multiple
attackers.
Pa Kua's strategy of outflanking the opponent
was developed ideally for this situation because a
practitioner who was faced with two or more
attackers could get to the outside and behind one
attacker and put that attacker between him and
the other attackers. Pa Kua's use of turning and
twisting maneuvers in rapidly changing directions
was also ideal for being able to address multiple
attackers. Pa Kua's use of quick and efficient
percussive techniques which broke bones or
otherwise quickly damaged the opponent in short
order were also ideal for churning through one
opponent after another.
Pa Kua Chang is a very effective fighting art
because the practitioners who used the art when
it was still in its infancy were employing it in a
very difficult combat environment. In those days
you either learned from your mistakes or died.
Thus, those that were practicing the art in its early
days were developing strategies and tactics which
are highly effective in many situations. If an art
is effective in fighting multiple opponent's who
have weapons, it is certainly going to be effective
against one opponent who is unarmed. However,
because the principles of Pa Kua are adaptable to
any situation it is incorrect to assume that the
specific techniques that have been handed down
11 
in Pa Kua Chang forms and fighting sets are all
there is to Pa Kua Chang.
Pa Kua Chang Adaptability
While the tactics and techniques listed above
defined Pa Kua at the period of time when it was
being used most prevalently as a combat art in real
life or death situations, these tactics and techniques
do not strictly define Pa Kua Chang because there
is no way to strictly define an art which is based on
principle. The art changes as the situation dictates
and it changes to a certain degree with each
practitioner who practices the art. This is why
Tung Hai Ch'uan taught each of his students
differently and why every Pa Kua instructor has a
different interpretation of the art. It is not an art
which should be copied exactly from the teacher
to his or her students. Every student is unique and
thus every student should be taught to develop
his or her Pa Kua based on their own individual
strengths and weaknesses. Additionally, each
practitioner takes the principles of the art and
develops them in a way which is suited for a
number of various combat environments. If every
student was taught exactly the same and only
practiced the art in a well lit, smooth floor martial
arts school, the practice would not be following
the philosophical trinity, nor would it be natural.
Park Bok Nam's teacher, Lu Shui-T'ien, required
that he practice his Pa Kua Chang in many different
environments. Park was required to practice in
the martial arts studio, on the beach, in the
mountains, in rocky river beds, and in bamboo
forests. He was also required to develop fighting
"specialties" which best suited his aptitude, ability,
and character. He was also required to research
other styles of martial arts, both in studying those
arts himself from Lu Shui-T'ien and Lu's martial
arts friends, and in fighting opponent's who
specialized in those other arts. Sun Tzu
recommended:
"If you know the enemy and know
yourself; in a hundred battles you will never
be defeated. When you know yourself, but
are ignorant of the enemy, your chances or
winning or losing are equal. If you are
ignorant of both yourself and the enemy,
you will certainly be defeated."

In order to "know himself," Park was required
to develop his own individual specialties based on
his strengths and abilities. In order to "know the
enemy" Park studied the enemy's strengths. In
studying these other styles and fighting
practitioners who specialized in those styles, Park
was able to better research various Pa Kua Chang
applications as they would apply in different
environments and against different opponent's.
Adapting the Art to Fit the Situation
Although submissive joint locks which control
an opponent, rather than break their joints and
bones immediately, and grappling techniques
which are used to take the opponent to the ground,
wrestle with them, and choke them out, are
becoming popular today, they are not very effective
against multiple attackers or opponents who carry
concealed bladed weapons. When fighting
multiple attackers, if you take too long dealing
with one, or you go to the ground with one, the
others will quickly be on your back. Also, if you
try to wrestle with someone who has a concealed
knife, you will easily be cut or stabbed.
Because ground grappling and submissive
techniques do not work well in the combat
situations which the Pa Kua practitioners who
developed the art most often found themselves,
Pa Kua practitioners have historically not practiced
submissive techniques or ground fighting. But it
does not mean that Pa Kua Chang does not have
these things. Pa Kua is an art based on sound
theoretical principles and thus it can address any
combat scenario. Practitioners who are taught to
understand the principles of Pa Kua can learn to
research and apply those principles in any
situation.
Pa Kua Chang strategies in the late 1800's and
early 1900's were designed to fight multiple
attackers and deal with them quickly and
efficiently. The forms and techniques which have
been passed down in choreographed sets reflect
these strategies. However, we should not think
that Pa Kua Chang is limited to these specific
techniques or the multiple attack scenario. It is
wrong to think that because Pa Kua Chang was
not practiced as a ground fighting art, that it does
not have ground fighting, or because it emphasizes
the palm strike, it does not strike with the fist, or
because it primarily employs circular footwork, it
12 
does not have linear applications. Pa Kua has
ground fighting, punching, kicking, joint locking,
inside fighting, outside fighting, etc., because Pa
Kua principles can be effectively applied to all of
these situations. Pa Kua Chang is an art based on
principle, not technique or situation. Because it is
based on principle, it is universal. It can be
applied by any practitioner in any situation,
environment, or scenario.
The Individual Expression of the Art
Pa Kua follows natural principles. The principles
of nature dictate that all individuals are graced
with their own unique nature, their own character,
and their own personality. In order to follow the
principles of nature, each individual follows his or
her own individual nature. Taoist teachings invite
each individual to discover his or her own nature
and live life in accordance with their nature and
natural principles. Following the "Way" in Taoism
is discovering how one's own nature fits seamlessly
into the ever changing ebb and flow of the natural
world.
Since history indicates that Tung Hai Ch'uan
was a Taoist and developed his art while living at
a Taoist temple, it would seem natural that he
would teach his art to his students based on the
Taoist principles. An examination of what his
students learned from him and how it was in turn
passed on to their students reveals that he did
teach every student in accordance with that
student's unique qualities and characteristics.
In teaching his students, Tung Hai Ch'uan
took into account each student's martial arts
background, character, size, aptitude, ability,
personality, age, and physical condition. Because
he taught each student differently, based on that
student's unique qualities, every lineage of Pa Kua
Chang has its own flavor. Even fundamental
components of the art, such as the "eight mother
palms," are executed differently in every lineage.
Tung's students and grand students all approached
the transmission of their art as Tung did. They
taught each student in a way that was unique to
that student. Unfortunately, in recent years,
instructors have begun to "standardize" Pa Kua
forms and teach the same choreographed form
routines and fighting applications to all of their
students, regardless of the student's size, aptitude,
or character. This severely limits the art and the 

individual student's progress in the art.
The first and foremost principle of Pa Kua
Chang is adaptability and change, thus those
practitioners who try to define Pa Kua Chang
practice or application and rigidly structure its
practice and application are moving away from
the art. Art is something that is individually
expressed and is adaptable. Providing too rigid a
structure to an art and judging it based on that
structure is stifling the growth of the art and the
progress of those who practice it. In Park Bok
Nam's school, students are taught the principles
of the art before they are taught forms or
techniques, they are taught to identify their
individual strengths and weaknesses and are given
a prescription program which is designed to
improve their weaknesses and highlight their
strengths. They are taught how to adapt their art
to various opponent's, environments, and fighting
situations while remaining true to the fundamental
principles of Pa Kua Chang.
Principle vs. Technique
Pa Kua Chang is an art which is based on
principles, not on techniques. This does not
mean that Pa Kua does not have techniques. It
means that at the root of all techniques are the
underlying principles and thus all techniques can
be varied or changed in accordance to those
principles. In studying an art which is based on
principles instead of techniques, the practitioner
is able to take his or her art and make it their own.
If the principles are understood, the practitioner
can take that art into any situation or scenario and
learn how to apply it. This is why Park Bok Nam
is so adamant in his teaching that the student
learn and understand the principles as they apply
to their individual body type and character, not
learn choreographed forms or memorized
techniques the same way as everyone else in the
class or even the same way that the teacher executes
them.
Learning Pa Kua Chang could be compared to
learning to play music. And in this respect, Pa Kua
Chang is the improvisational Jazz of martial arts.
In learning music, a student will start out by
learning the theory of the music and the rudiments
of their instrument by practicing numerous drills
with chords and scales, progressing from simple
13 
to more complex. Here, all students are taught
pretty much the same concepts, theories, and
exercises. This is necessary in order to gain a
foundation. Next they move on to learning
simple compositions which were created by others.
Here they are learning how to put the theories and
exercises into practical usage. From there they
gradually move on to play more challenging pieces.
At this juncture they are playing music, but it is
not their own, it is still someone else's music.
Some people are comfortable spending their
lives playing the compositions of others, and that
is fine, but it is not Pa Kua. As the musician
progresses, he or she will first begin to add some
of their own phrases, ideas, and embellishments
to the melody line of those compositions that
they have learned from others. They begin to take
what someone else has created and add their own
individual style, flavor, and taste to that music.
They are creating their own expression based on
another individual's ideas. From here some
musicians will begin to compose their own pieces.
By doing so, they are expressing themselves
through their art. Now it becomes a real art
because it is that individual's expression of him or
herself through the music. But it is still not Pa Kua
unless the composition is improvisational.
I relate Pa Kua Chang to improvisational Jazz
because high level Pa Kua Chang is "in the
moment." It is a correct, natural, appropriate
individual response to each instant in time. This
is the concept of wu wei  ( )  which was
discussed in the previous volume of this book.
High level Pa Kua application is not
pre-calculated or preconceived, it is not
reproducing techniques that one has copied
from another; it is true improvisation. High level
Pa Kua is about creating in the moment, it is
about responding to an opponent's movement in
ways that you may have never expressed before
in practice. It is about being unpredictable,
yet still responding appropriately. A high
level Pa Kua practitioner can respond to any
situation, even if they have never faced it before
because he or she has worked long and hard to
make the principles of Pa Kua Chang a part of
their natural response to any situation. Park
calls this "fighting by feeling."
Many people ask questions like "Does Pa Kua
have ground fighting?", or "Do Pa Kua practitioners
use their fist?" The answer is, "Yes, because it is a

principle based art, Pa Kua can handle every kind of
fighting situation and utilizes every available
weapon." Although most Pa Kua practitioners do
not practice a lot of ground fighting, the principles of
Pa Kua fighting certainly apply as much to ground
fighting as they do to fighting on your feet, or with
weapons, or any other form of combat. If you watch
any good ground fighter, you will notice that they
adhere to all the principles of Pa Kua. The are
relaxed, they don't use force against force, they
utilize optimum angles of attack, etc. These are all
principles of Pa Kua Chang.
Any good fighter will vary his fighting strategy
based on his opponent and his environment. The
opponent could be large or small, tall or short, male
or female, fast or slow. The opponent's strengths and
weaknesses vs. your own strength and weaknesses
will also come into play. The opponent might be a
boxer who is good with his hands, a kicker who is
good with his feet, a wrestler who is good at
grappling, he or she might be carrying a weapon, etc.
Additionally, the environment plays a role; it might
be dark, it might be sunny, the terrain might be
rough or smooth, the area might be wooded or open,
it might be in a confined area with limited space to
move, etc. So how does one handle all these
different situations? Do you say, well I'll study Pa
Kua in case I'm attacked by multiple opponents, I'll
study wing chun in case I ever get attacked in close
quarters, I'll study jujitsu in case I ever have to fight
on the ground, I'll study ninjitsu in case I'm attacked
in the woods at night, etc. This sounds ridiculous,
but there are a lot of people who are out there doing
this type of thing.
I believe that individuals jump from one art to
the next trying to complete their martial arts
training because very few martial arts teachers are
teaching complete martial arts methods based on
principles which can be applied to any situation
and/or students are not pursuing these arts in great
depth. Any martial art which has been around for a
hundred years or more is bound to be a good,
complete martial art system, otherwise it would not
have lasted. However, today too many people do
not fully understand the art they practice or get
bored with it before they reach a depth of
understanding. Studying choreographed forms and
applications and mimicking these memorized
routines to get belt ranks falls far short of studying
a complete method and understanding how its
14 
principles are applied under varying circumstances.
When Park Bok Nam gives tests in his school,
he does not require the student being tested to
simply demonstrate a list of choreographed
routines and applications that he has been shown.
Park's only concern in testing a student is to see if
the student understands the principles of Pa Kua
and how they are applied. When Park tests a
student, the student will be told, "Based on all of
the drills, exercises, theories, principles, and forms
which you have learned so far, design eight
two-person application sets which adhere to
the principles of Pa Kua." The student will then
be given a few months to work with a partner
and design eight two person sets which each
consist of four or five offensive moves with
defensive counter moves. Each set begins with
the two partners walking the circle while facing
each other, partner "A" will attack, "B" defends
and counter attacks, "A" defends that attack and
initiates another attack, etc. This exchange lasts
for four or five moves and then ends with both
partners walking the circle facing each other, yet
walking the circle in the opposite direction. The
same sequence is then demonstrated on the
opposite side. The student must demonstrate
eight such original sets. In evaluating the
students who are being tested, Park looks to see
that all of the principles of Pa Kua are being
adhered to in the execution of the maneuvers
and critiques the students accordingly.
By requiring the student to invent his or her
own applications, Park is forcing the individual to
really think about what they are doing and how
the principles of Pa Kua are used. While other
systems of Pa Kua have such two-person drills as
part of their curriculum, they are usually handed
down from the teacher as choreographed routines.
Park would rather the student work to come up
with their own ideas based on the principles he or
she has learned rather than teach students
applications directly. When the student is required
to come up with their own ideas and then receive
feedback about how well those ideas adhere to the
principles of Pa Kua, it is easier for the student to
begin to understand the principles of Pa Kua and
apply them in various situations. At this point the
art begins to become their own, not something
they are mimicking from someone else.

Strategies of Pa Kua Chang Fighting   
In this section we will discuss some of the
important principles that a Pa Kua Chang
practitioner will adhere to in fighting. These
are ideas and strategies which are taught after
the practitioner already has an experiential
knowledge of proper mechanics of movement
and body alignments. Relaxation, body
mechanics, body alignments, internal and
external harmony and connections, use of
intention (the mind), ch'i awareness, and
fluidity and continuity in motion are all
principles that are first trained during solo
exercises, practice sets, and forms. After the
student has gained some knowledge of these
components of Pa Kua Chang training, and
learned how to control his or her own body in
the martial arts context, he or she is ready to
take these principles and learn how they relate
to a two person encounter.
In addition to the principles listed above, there
are other principles and theories which must
be studied and practiced when the art is taken
from the solo exercise to the two person, or
fighting, environment. We will discuss a few
of the principles which Park Bok Nam feels
are most important in the sections which
follow.
Distance and Degree
Whenever Park Bok Nam lectures about Pa
Kua Chang's use as a fighting art, he always
talks in great depth about what he calls
"distance and degree." In order to be efficient
and effective in fighting, you must always be
concerned about the distance between you and
your opponent and the body alignment, or
angle between your line of power and your
opponent's line of power. This applies to every
part of your body and throughout the entire
execution of a movement or application.
Additionally, the two concepts of "distance
and degree" can mean the difference between
a technique which is masterfully executed
with little apparent effort, and one that is
awkward, cumbersome and requires the use of
muscular strength in its application.
15 
While "distance and degree" are important
factors in every movement and thus each
application should be studied in detail in order
to appreciate the correct distances and angles
which make that technique work best, there
are a few guidelines to use when studying
these concepts. We will now discuss a few of
these concepts.
Know your Distance
When applying Pa Kua Chang as a fighting art,
the practitioner has an arsenal of weapons at
his or her disposal and a variety of ways to
apply each weapon. In researching how each
of these weapons can best be employed, it is
important that the student know what distance
the weapons and techniques are most
efficiently used and how to combine these
weapons and techniques as the distances
change during the encounter. In general, the
feet, heels, hands, wrists and palms are long
range weapons, the elbows and knees
mid-range weapons, and the shoulders, hips,
and head are short range weapons. These
weapons are most efficiently utilized at these
distances and are best combined together as
distances change. For example, it would be
inefficient to throw an elbow at an opponent
from a long range because the time spent
closing the gap in order to get close enough to
throw the elbow is wasted.
Another aspect of fighting which is related to
distance is the target of attack. Park states that
when most beginning students think about
fighting, they are overly concerned with
hitting the opponent's body or face. Park's idea
is that instead of blocking, joining, or slipping
the opponent's hand or an arm as you are
working your way in to strike the body, there
will be situations where it is best to hit or
break the hand, arm, foot, or leg of the
opponent as you are working your way in. His
theory is that if the opponent throws a
hand or foot at you in an effort to strike
you and you block without damaging it, he
is free to use that weapon again. In many
instances, Park likes to take the opponent's 

weapons away from him as he works his way in
to strike the opponent's body or head. He calls
this "taking the fang's out of the snake so it can't
bite you." In examining distance, one must
consider defending and attacking at various
distances with one's own weapons and targeting
the opponent's weapons and his vulnerable areas
at different distances.
In studying attack and defense weapons, we
always consider the joints. The joints are the
best weapons we can use and they are also the
ideal places to inflict damage on the opponent.
The distances one must consider in researching
the efficient and effective applications of the art
are outlined below. When describing each
distance we will give some examples of
applications that might be applied at these
distances. Keep in mind that all of these
applications are appropriately combined with
footwork and continuous combinations of
techniques. Usually the combinations will
follow a "continuously linked" pattern so there
will be no hesitation between consecutive strikes,
locks, or throws.
Regarding "blocks" versus "strikes," one must
remember that in Pa Kua Chang there is rarely
any real differentiation between an attack and a
block. Most blocks are meant as attacks. Either
the block itself damages the opponent, or the
block is seamlessly linked to the follow-up
attack. The practitioner's energy is always
flowing towards the opponent when executing a
"block." Consequently the rhythm of movement
is "one," not "one-two."
Distance One: We will refer to the first distance
as "being out of range." This is the "safe"
distance where neither opponent can touch the
other.Distance Two: Your long range weapons
meet the opponent's long range weapons. The
second distance is the zone where your hand can
touch the opponent's hand or foot. Obviously the
opponent's foot can extend out farther than his
hand and your foot can extend out farther than
your hand, but for the purpose of this discussion
we will count these distances as being in the
same relative "zone."
At this distance, good techniques to use include
striking the opponent's foot, ankle (if he kicks at
you), hand, or wrist, with a sharp, crisp,
powerful back fist using your knuckles as
16 
weapons. This kind of strike is aimed at certain
vital points on the back of the opponent's hand,
top of his foot, or around his ankle or wrist.
Utilizing whole body power and a whipping
wrist action, you can easily damage the
opponent's hand, wrist, foot, or ankle at this
distance. If an opponent has grabbed you by the
wrist, in some situations, a well aimed back fist
to the top of his hand will work well at this
distance. Of course, these kind of strikes in Pa
Kua Chang are also always combined with
footwork. From this distance you could also
grab the opponent's extended hand or foot.
Distance Three: Your long range weapons
meet the opponent's mid-range weapons and
your mid-range weapons reach the opponent's
long range weapons. At this distance, your hand
reaches the opponent's elbow, your foot reaches
his forward knee, and your elbow reaches his
hand or foot.
At this distance you can strike the opponent's
elbow with your fist or palm, kick the
opponent's forward knee, or strike his extended
hand or foot with your elbow. In some situations
where an opponent has grabbed Park's hand and
pulled it low, Park will execute a powerful
elbow strike to the top of the opponent's hand.
This strike is combined with footwork and
immediate and continuous follow-on
movements. At this range you can also apply
joint locks to the opponent's wrists and elbows.
At this range a nice follow-on to an elbow to the
opponent's hand is a back fist to the opponent's
elbow. The combination of an elbow strike
immediately followed by a back fist with the
same hand is often used in Park's Pa Kua
because the combination is very fast and
efficient. This combination will always follow
the progression of the opponent's joints. If
someone kicks and you elbow his ankle, the
elbow is immediately followed by a back fist to
the opponent's knee. If the elbow is applied as
an arm break to the opponent's elbow, then the
back fist is to the opponent's shoulder. If the
elbow is applied to the opponent's shoulder, then
the back fist is to the face or head.
Also, keep in mind that when we are talking
about the various distances here we are focusing
on attacking the opponent's joints because these
are generally areas where you can do the most 

damage as you work your way in to the
opponent's head and body. However, do not
forget there are also many strikes you can use to
the opponent's forearms, upper arms, lower legs,
and upper legs.
Distance Four: Your long range weapons meet
the opponent's short range weapons, your
mid-range weapons reach his mid-range weapons,
and your short range weapons meet his long
range weapons. Here your hands can reach the
opponent's hips, shoulders, body, and head.
Obviously there are many striking targets here.
Rules of thumb in Park's system is that the fist is
applied to joints while the palm is applied to soft
fleshy areas of the body. On big, muscular
opponent's it is best to strike the joints. Well
aimed strikes to vital points around the shoulders
or hip joints will damage an opponent even if
they have a lot of muscular cover on other areas
of their body. Near the joints there are many
nerves close to the surface of the skin that are not
usually protected by muscle. The attack angle is
always important when attacking the joints,
nerves, and vital points.
At this distance your elbows can reach the
opponent's elbows for applying both strikes and
joint locks. Grabbing the opponent's wrist with
either hand and then following up with an elbow
to the back of the opponent's elbow is the most
common lock at this distance. As always,
footwork is important in these applications. In
applying Pa Kua joint locking applications, the
palm strikes can either set up the lock or follow
the lock. Some of the best palm strike
opportunities come out of joint locks which offset
the opponent's balance, or break their joints.
Keep in mind that in Pa Kua Chang we seldom, if
ever, lock just one of the opponent's joints. If you
do not lock the chain of joints that lead all they
way to the spine, it will be easy for the opponent
to escape.
At this distance your kicks can reach the
opponent's rear leg and your knees can be used to
parry the opponent's kicks or lock his knees.
Your short range weapons (hips and shoulders)
can also be used at this distance to parry an
opponent's long range weapons. These parrying
techniques are always combined with footwork.
17 
Distance Five: Your mid-range weapons meet
the opponent's short range weapons and his
mid-range weapons reach your short range
weapons. Here your elbows and knees can strike
the opponent's body, hips, and shoulders. Of
course, as we get into these closer ranges, the
long range weapons can also be used. There are
times when you are in close enough to strike the
opponent's body with an elbow or knee and you
might chose to use a fist, palm, or foot. It all
depends on the angle, the setup, or the follow-on
technique.
Besides the obvious elbow and knee strikes that
can be used at this distance, one can also use the
hips and shoulders in locking the opponent's
elbows and knees. A nice application of the
"hiding flower under leaf" body movement,
which is presented in Chapter 4 of this volume, is
to grab the opponent's wrist with your hand to
deflect his strike and then step in and twist your
body into the opponent's elbow while pulling his
arm across your body.
There are many combinations of all of your
weapons that you can apply at this distance. This
is the distance where the Pa Kua Chang
practitioner is comfortable. This is where he likes
to get when a fight occurs in order to finish the
opponent quickly.
Distance Six: Your short range weapons reach
the opponent's short range weapons. Here you
can apply many different kinds of hip and
shoulder strikes, locks, and throws. This is the
best distance to be at when executing throws
because at this distance, and with the proper
angle, it is easy to offset your opponent's balance
(however, you have to be careful because you are
also vulnerable to being thrown if your body
alignments and angles are not right).
We have briefly run through these distances and
some examples of possible applications at these
distances so you can get the general idea of how
Park thinks about distance. If you apply a
sequence of combinations on an opponent and
you attack him at distance two and then your next
strike is at distance six, Park would say that you
wasted time. You wasted time because it will
take too long for you to get from distance two to
distance six and thus you have left a window of
opportunity for your opponent to counter.

Rooting as a Function of Angle
All practitioners of the internal styles of Chinese
martial arts talk a lot about "rooting." Students
are told to relax and align the body so that if
someone were to push on them, the force would
go into the ground. There are various exercises
and two person drills which people practice in
order to learn "how to root." However, what is
often times over looked, especially by those
who only practice static exercise in the process
of learning how to root, is that rooting is a
function of your body alignment in relation to
the opponent's force. There is no such thing as
"rooting" without the reference of an incoming
force and there is nothing static about rooting
unless the incoming force remains at a constant
force vector. In Pa Kua the practitioner roots by
constantly changing his or her line of stability
(root) in relation to the opponent's incoming
force. In Pa Kua, this is done primarily through
footwork.
Maintaining one's stability, or root, while
off balancing the opponent, or taking away their
root, is one of the most important aspects to
practice when learning how to set up an
opponent for a technique which will "finish him
off." In Park's Pa Kua, the stepping drills
outlined in the first volume, starting on page 107,
introduce the beginner to these concepts. Both
distance and degree (angle) are important
concepts when learning how to off-balance your
opponent while remaining stable (rooted)
yourself.
Angle Vs. Strength
The muscles of the human body are all
designed to work at certain optimum angles of
force. In applying internal martial arts
techniques, especially joint locking and
throwing techniques, one goal is to utilize your
optimum angles of natural strength while
controlling the opponent by taking his angles of
strength and optimum alignments away from
him. In applying all techniques, the practitioner
needs to study the angles. This includes the
angles which your body and lines of force are
utilizing in relation to the body alignments and
movements of the opponent. If the practitioner
learns to execute techniques through the
optimum series of angles, he or she can
manipulate and control the opponent without
18 
using much force. Pa Kua Chang's use of
circular and rotational motions was founded on
the principle of using appropriate angles of force
that take away the opponent's strength.
It is very easy for someone to resist a constant
linear force. However, it is difficult, even for a
strong person, to resist a force which is
constantly changing angle (i.e. a circular force).
It is even more difficult to resist multiple forces
which are constantly changing angle (more than
one circle). And it is the most difficult to resist
these multiple forces when they are applied at
optimum angles (taking advantage of the
opponent's weaknesses). When the Pa Kua
practitioner applies his art, the techniques should
all present the opponent with a multitude of
circular and rotational forces applied at the
optimum angles and areas of vulnerability.
Allow No Time or Space
When a Pa Kua practitioner attacks an
opponent, from the beginning of the attack to
the time the opponent is incapacitated, the
practitioner should never allow the opponent
time to react or space to maneuver. Pa Kua
attacks are continuous. Once they are initiated,
the attacks do not stop until the opponent is
finished. There is constant flow and constant
movement. The practitioner moves like water
flowing rapidly down stream. There should be
no gap in any series of attacks or attack/defense
combinations. Like Pa Kua Chang forms, Pa
Kua Chang application is seamless. An observer
should not be able to tell where one attack ends
and the next begins. Attack becomes defense
and defense becomes attack.
Too often we find beginners launch an attack, or
counter an opponent's attack and then wait
momentarily or back off a little bit to see what
happened. This is a waste of both time and
space. If you hesitate between movements or
give the opponent space to maneuver, you are
not using time or distance efficiently. Pa Kua
Chang fighting is about learning how to be
efficient, using both time and distance to your
advantage.
All of the above listed principles relate to the
concepts of distance and degree. Primarily all of
these concepts, if applied optimally, will serve to
increase the practitioners efficiency, speed and
targeting. When testing students on their fighting

applications, Park will always look to see that the  Park says that there is only one "idea" when
student continuously maintains the optimum
distance and angle on the opponent.
Jab, Bridge, Finish
Park Bok Nam defines the three stages of a Pa
Kua Chang attack as " jab, bridge, and finish."
The "jab" phase of the attack is simply the first
move which is executed in an attempt to gain a
reaction from the opponent or "set him up" for
what is to come next. This could be one of any
number of realistic moves or techniques which
offset or gain a response from the opponent. The
"jab" is usually a realistic technique which will
damage the opponent or offset his balance if he
does not appropriately respond to it. A skilled
opponent is not usually going to fall for a false
ploy, a faint, or a fake. You have to give them
something realistic which causes them to react.
The jab could be a strike to the opponent's hands,
wrists, or arms, shoulders, or head, a deflection
of their arms, a kick to their legs, a grabbing and
swift pulling of there wrist, a grabbing and
bending of their fingers, etc. There are many
possibilities.
Park Bok Nam's teacher, Lu Shui-T'ien, would
use his knuckles, fingers, or palms to strike vital
points on Park's hands, wrist, and arms when he
was "jabbing." Park said that his teacher was so
accurate at striking vital points and so powerful
in these subtle strikes that Park would cringe in
pain as his entire arm would go numb. Park's
teacher would say, "You don't worry. This
damage is a long way from your heart. You will
not die."
In executing the "jab" phase of the attack we
will always assume that the opponent is skilled
and will effectively counter the jab. Depending
on the opponent's reaction to the jab, the
practitioner will jab again, or enter the
"bridging" phase of the attack.
The "bridge" is the move which follows the jab
and is executed in order to "bridge the gap" or
otherwise close with the opponent in order to get
inside to the opponent's vital areas where you can
really do some serious damage. Although the
practitioner always approaches the jab-bridge
combination with an idea in mind, the exact type
of bridge which is used will always depend upon
the opponent's initial reaction to the first move.
19 
attacking. Everything that follows is an
appropriate response to the opponent, the
environment, and the energy flow. This typifies
the concept of wu wei which was discussed in
the previous volume of this book.
Park's ideas about bridging include techniques
and movements which are designed to
effectively create an opening of what Park calls
the opponent's "center door" ( - chung men)
or "side door" ( - ts'e men). Opening up the
center door includes any entry which opens up
the opponent's center (head and chest). Opening
up the side door includes any entry which
exposes the opponent's flanks, and sides.
Park's rule of thumb here is that it is always
better if you can open the opponent's door and/
or keep your own doors closed using one hand.
This means that in either attacking the opponent
or defending yourself, you rarely want to have
two of your hands (here the term "hands" can
include the whole arm) on one of his hands or
one of your hands on his hand while your other
hand is on his other hand. In other words, you
want to avoid tying up both of your arms at once.
You always want to try to have one hand free.
The way to do this is to employ the use of the
elbows and the footwork.
For example, if the opponent grabs one of your
wrists and then tries to strike you with his other
hand, do not block that strike with your free
hand. That strike can be "blocked" by using
your footwork, and/or the elbow of the arm he
has grabbed. This way you can gain a superior
position and be free to simultaneously strike him
with your free hand. Park frequently uses his
elbows and shoulders as second and third
"hands" when he is attacking and defending. He
can successfully do this because of his superior
knowledge of angles, precise footwork, and a
high degree of flexibility in his joints.
Once the Pa Kua Chang practitioner gets
inside on the opponent, he will continue to stay
inside until the job is finished. There is no
bouncing in, striking once, and then bouncing
back out as in sport fighting for points. Once
you are inside, you stay until the job is finished.
Again, it is your footwork and knowledge of
angles and distance that keeps you there.

If the bridge is successful, then we can follow up
with a finishing technique. If the opponent is
skilled, we may need to employ several quick,
repetitive bridging maneuvers before we can get
inside on him or out flank him. A skilled
opponent is not going to let you continue hitting
him from a vulnerable angle. He is going to move.
Utilizing your footwork, you stick on the
opponent like glue. Where he goes, you go and
you don't let up until the job is done. Park Bok
Nam calls getting inside on the opponent
"opening his door." He says that once the door is
open, you do not let the door close until you have
finished the job.
The "finish" is the strike, break, kick, or other
technique or series of techniques which literally
finishes the fight. While a worthy opponent will
not always allow one to get away with a quick
one, two, three attack, Park has students think
about initiating attacks with this philosophy in
mind.
When attacking an opponent, Park says that you
have in your mind a "one, two, three" idea which
consists of a jab, bridge, and finish, but at each
stage you are ready to change based on the
opponent's movements. In most instances, you
will execute "one" (a jab), and begin to initiate
"two" (the bridge) before you will be able to feel
if you can execute "three" (the finish).
When you initiate "one," you will be sensitive to
what the opponent's reaction to that jab will be
while you are beginning your execution of the
bridge. Because the bridge has been calculated to
be a technique that will work against the
opponent's most likely response to the jab (and
therefore the jab is also a set up) the bridge has a
good chance of working. If the bridge works, the
practitioner rolls right in to the finish (which is
usually a series of techniques combined together).
However, the opponent may move in a manner
which is unexpected, or execute a good counter
to the jab or bridge and therefore the practitioner
needs to know how to sense the opponent's
movement and change appropriately. He or she
may have to execute several bridging techniques
before the opponent is opened up for the finishing
techniques. All of these technique combinations
should be applied smoothly and continuously.
When Park's students are researching fighting
combinations, they will keep the jab, bridge,
finish theory in mind. A worthy opponent is not
20 
going to let you just walk up and hit him. In
studying the jab-bridge-finish sequence when
designing attacks, the practitioner is prepared to
first offset the opponent or otherwise gain a
reaction from them. Based on the opponent's
reaction the practitioner will immediately follow
with an appropriate bridge to get inside the
opponent's defense and bridge the gap to set up
for a finishing technique. This series of
movements must all flow smoothly from one to
the other with no hesitation or loss of
momentum, otherwise the opponent will be able
to easily counter all of the techniques. The
skilled Pa Kua practitioner relies on his
footwork, ability to rapidly change directions,
and a continuous flow of well placed, efficient
techniques to overcome the opponent.
Lien Huan
( - Continuously Linked)
There are many forms and styles of Pa Kua
Chang which identify themselves as being lien
huan (continuously linked). All good Pa Kua
instructors will emphasize the idea of being
continuous, or seamless, in the execution of
forms. Continuity, fluidity, and smoothness are
important aspects in the practice of Pa Kua
Chang. This idea is emphasized in forms
because it is vitally important to Pa Kua
fighting.
If executing any combination of techniques, the
practitioner always wants to apply the
combination in such a manner that each strike is
easily followed by another effective strike. You
never want to put all of your eggs in one basket
or reach a dead end in the chain of possible
combinations. If each execution can easily
connect with another, Park says that the
movement is " natural." If the student executes a
technique and then is situated such that there is
no easy, smooth, and continuous way to flow to
another technique, Park says the technique is
"dead."
When fighting, or in the practice of solo forms,
a Pa Kua practitioner looks as though he never
stops moving. There are no breaks, cuts, or
hesitations in his movements or energy. Every
move flows seamlessly into another. This ability
to continue adapting, moving, and changing

according to the situation is a prominent
characteristic of Pa Kua Chang fighting.
In linking form movements and applications
together, Park says that there has to be at least
a series of three in order for the movement or
application to be "linked." In order to practice
this principle, Park's students will be required
to take movements they have learned as single
practice sets or form movements and begin to
link them together in smoothly flowing
sequences. For instance, after learning the
eight animals form, the forty eight month
palms, and a number of single palms change
variations, the student would be required to do
"homework" and discover how these different
movements might be linked together. As an
example, a good linking sequence would be
"hiding flower under leaf" followed by
"swallow penetrating through the forest"
followed by "sliding the window shutter to
look at the moon."
In building these linking sequences in practice,
the student learns how to create, execute, and
apply his or her own form sequences. First the
sequences are linked together and the student
practices them in a slow, smooth, and
continuous manner. Once the student has
linked the movements together in this manner,
he or she will then learn how to develop a
"rhythm" which is appropriate for the
sequence. All movement sequences and forms
have a rhythm which is based on ch'i flow,
power generation, and application. If a student
executes a form and it does not have rhythm,
Park says that the form is "dead."
Pa Kua Chang form sequences are not
supposed to be performed all at the same pace
like T'ai Chi. Beginning level forms can be
executed this way in order for the student to
focus on fluidity and continuity in motion,
smoothness of energy flow, internal and
external harmony, and linking of body
alignments. However, once these components
have been sufficiently developed, the student
progresses and learns how to integrate a
rhythm into the form. If the student puts
movements together which do not flow
smoothly, or do not have proper rhythm, Park
will say, "This does not connect. You need to
try something else to make a good
connection."
21 
Sequence of Training
The beginning student in martial arts training is
a long way from utilizing the concepts of wu wei
and being improvisational in their execution of
techniques which are appropriate to any given
situation. In order to get from one place to the
other there should be a progressive sequence of
training. Pa Kua Chang, as well as the other
internal styles of Chinese martial arts, are
considered by many to be "graduate level"
martial arts. It makes sense that before you get
to the "graduate level" you have done your
undergraduate work.
The undergraduate work will consist of
exercises, drills, and forms which improve the
students overall strength, balance, coordination,
flexibility, and stability. Along with these basics
the student will also learn about alignment,
whole body connection, whole body power,
harmonization of mind, body, and breath, and
efficient body mechanics. These skills must be
practiced until they become second nature or, as
Park says, the student develops a "kungfu body."
Awareness also plays a big part of this basic
training, In training repetitive drills and
exercises the student not only conditions the
body, but he or she gains a keen awareness of
their own body, its energy, balance, center, and
connections. This is a vital step in the training
process because until the student gains a keen
awareness of the movements and energy of his
or her own body, it will be difficult to interact
with an opponent. In fighting with another
person the practitioner must develop an
awareness of the opponent's movements and
energies and know how to control the
opponent's body. If the practitioner cannot
already control his or her own body to a high
degree, it will be difficult to learn how to control
someone else's body and be aware of the
relationships between the two bodies.
Training to Fight
Once the student in Park's school gains a good
foundation as described above, he or she will
then begin to take the movements which have
already been taught and learn how to apply him
in a fighting situation. As discussed previously, Park
does not teach applications to his students. He 

teaches them principles and the students must
then discover how those principles can be
applied in combat.
In Park's school, this is a three step process. The
student will first engage in what Park calls
"imagination" sparring. In this stage the student
will try and put together what he or she thinks to
be effective sparring combinations. When
approaching any Pa Kua Chang application or
researching any Pa Kua fighting technique or
strategy, Park Bok Nam always has his students
keep one rule in mind. He says, "Always
imagine that your opponent is bigger, stronger,
and better than you are."
In researching Pa Kua applications, the student
will imagine an opponent in front of them and
then execute a fighting sequence either as an
attack or a reaction to an opponent's attack and
try to get a mental image of whether it would
work or not. Once the student comes up with an
attack or defense sequence he or she thinks is in
accordance with all of the principles of distance
and degree and continuously linked movement,
he or she will begin to imagine possible ways
the opponent might react to the execution of the
combination and then work out variations in
order to conduct further research.
After the student has researched a particular
combination sequence and the fighting scenario
and variations, he or she then begins to work
with a partner to see if the combinations will
work in reality. First the partner just plays the
dummy and the student executes the movements
to see if the movements adhere to the principles
as he or she "imagined" they would. If the
student is satisfied with the sequence, then the
partner begins to try and counter the sequence
and test the student's ability to vary the sequence
in accordance with the partner's movements and
counters.
In researching variations, the partners try to use
a methodology based on the principles of Pa
Kua Chang. They explore all possible footwork
angles the partner could employ to counter the
student's original move, they explore all of the
possible arm counters and leg counters that
might go along with the footwork angles. They
try out all of these possibilities and think about
the best solutions.
These two person drills begin with very short
22 
combinations and sequences. The students may
start researching simply two or three move
sequences. Once they are comfortable with these
short sequences, longer combinations and
sequences can be added. From here the students
will continue to escalate the length of the
sequences, the speed of the combinations, and
the power behind the movements until they have
reached a free sparring mode.
In the free sparing mode, the combinations and
sequences which were practiced in research
sparring are all going to change as the situation
dictates and this is precisely how these
combinations are tested. Combinations in Pa
Kua are not strictly defined as one-two-three
techniques where "I do this, then he does this,
then I do this." They are more like branches of a
tree. The student begins a sequence and from
that beginning learns about which branches are
strong and which will break. Learning
sequences and combinations becomes a process
of learning how to flow with and adapt to the
movements of the opponent.
In going through this process over and over with
different variations to given sequences, the
student is not trying to gain an arsenal of
techniques as much as he is gaining an innate
feeling for how to move and adapt. Memorizing
the sequence of techniques that work is not as
important as gaining a body knowledge of how
and why these things work. Once this
knowledge is gained, the student can learn how
to fight by "feeling" instead of "technique."
Once the student finds out what works on one
partner, he or she will then go and find out if the
strategies and sequences work on different
partners who are of various sizes, strengths,
ability levels, and martial arts backgrounds. The
student can also research the applications on
different surfaces such as a slick floor, a paved
street, a grassy lawn, a wooded area, a hill side,
or a sandy beach, to find out how the
applications might have to be varied in order for
them to work in all environments. Once he or
she feels comfortable that a certain sequence is
workable, then Park will take a look at it and
make suggestions. This is how students in Park's
school learn how to apply Pa Kua. 
 
 
  

   
   
  Chapter 3 
   
 
  Pa Kua Chang Footwork Training 
 
 
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
23 

Chapter 3 
Pa Kua Chang 
Footwork Training 
In the footwork training chapter of the last
volume of this book we primarily focused on the
"eight direction rooted step training." This training
provided a strong footwork foundation for many
types of Pa Kua Chang practical application.
Included in that chapter we also presented a
introductory section on Pa Kua Chang's circle
walk practice and the practice of the k'ou pu (
and pai pu ( ) maneuvers. Once the student
in Park's school has a basic understanding of
the "eight direction rooted stepping" footwork,
he or she will continue to practice those
techniques, but the focus of the footwork
training will then turn primarily to the circle
walk practice. This practice begins with the
basic circle walking that was presented in the last
volume of this book and gradually builds to
more advanced techniques and training. In this
chapter we will discuss Pa Kua Chang's circle
walking practice in more detail and then present
some of these more advanced circle walking
components.
Why Walk the Circle?
The circle walk forms the foundation of Pa Kua
Chang training for a number of important reasons,
each of them having to do with the development
of fundamental physical skills, internal cultivation
skills, and fighting skills. In this section we will
describe some of the physical benefits, internal
skills, and fundamental fighting skills the Pa Kua
Chang practitioner gains from the practice of
circle walking.
Physical Benefits
The physical benefits of the circle walking
practice include an increased overall physical
strength, improved balance, full body
coordination, and functional flexibility.
Additionally, cardiovascular health can be
improved with the walking conducted at a
) semi-rapid pace for a sustained period of time.
While the basic circle walking practice will give
the practitioner benefits in all of the above
mentioned areas of physical skill, there are also
circle walking variations and special methods
which will specifically focus on each of these
areas.
Legs: In terms of physical strength the circle
walk practice will benefit both the legs and the
upper body as well as torso and upper and lower
body coordinated strength. Obviously the legs
benefit from the walking itself. A practitioner
who wants to focus on strengthening the legs will
walk in a lower posture. Additionally, all circle
walk variations (as outlined in the next section of
this chapter) benefit the legs in different ways. In
other words, the stepping method can be modified
depending on what aspect of leg strength the
practitioner is trying to develop. For example,
sometimes practitioners practice a high "crane
step" whereby the foot of the stepping leg is lifted
to about knee height before stepping forward.
This trains the practitioner to be stable and
balanced on one leg and thus provides a foundation
for Pa Kua's leg trapping, kicking, and sweeping
techniques. Some practitioners take this idea a bit
farther and walk on top of bricks, poles that have
24 

been driven into the ground, or different sized
stones that have been arranged in a circular pattern.
These are all methods of improving balance and
stability while remaining in motion. Park Bok
Nam's teacher had him walk the circle in a river
bed full of different sized stones which were
placed various distances apart. He utilized the
crane step in this training.
In general, a Pa Kua practitioner who is walking
the circle with the focus on developing leg strength
will primarily be concerned with leg strength
which facilitates stable, balanced, and smooth
whole body movement in coordination with the
steps.
Upper Body: When training specifically for
upper body strength the Pa Kua practitioner will
walk the circle for long periods of time while
holding static upper body postures. This practice
facilitates the training and strengthening of
secondary muscle groups and tendons. When
holding the static upper body positions the
practitioner will try to relax the major muscle
groups and thus access the smaller secondary
muscles and tendons which are responsible for
body alignment and stability. These muscle groups
are not usually under conscious control because
they are not the muscles which actually perform
physical body movements. Their function is to
keep the body in place and stable while the bigger
muscles are actually performing the movement of
the torso and limbs.
By holding upper body postures until the major
muscles are fully fatigued, the secondary muscles
have to work harder and thus they are trained
more completely. Exercises such as weight-lifting
work to strengthen the major muscles, however,
they do not train the secondary muscles and
"stability" muscles, ligaments, and tendons as
fully. The result of static posture holding is a very
stable, connected, and integrated whole body
power. In Park's school the students train this
aspect of the circle walk practice while holding
the eight "animal" postures which were presented
on pages 189 to 198 of the first volume of this
book. Park recommends that students work up to
walking the circle for one hour while transitioning
through these eight postures. A one hour work
out of this nature will have the student holding
each of the eight postures continuously for about
25 
eight minutes each.
Torso: In Pa Kua it is extremely important that
the torso (which will include the areas of the
waist, hips, pelvis, and inner thighs) is strong and
flexible. The torso provides the connection
between the upper and lower extremities. In all
internal styles the principle of power "coming
from the legs, directed by the waist, and expressed
in the hands" is very important. The "waist" in this
case includes the inner thighs/groin area, the hips
and pelvic region, and the lower torso. If the
movement of the torso is not strong and
coordinated with the entire body, the power in
the legs will not be expressed in the hands.
During the circle walk practice the torso is
trained during the change of direction. While
practicing the basic circle walk practice most
schools will change directions by executing the
single palm change. The movements of the single
palm change are extremely important in training
the torso. When changing directions and
executing the twisting and turning movements of
the single palm change the practitioner focuses
on the movement being driven by the legs and
being directed by the inner thigh/pelvic region.
Numerous variations of the single palm change
are presented in Chapter 4 of this volume.
The primary movement utilized to change
direction during all circle walk practice is the
single palm change. The single palm change is the
most important move in Pa Kua in terms of
training the body and developing the power of Pa
Kua. The single palm change is also the most
important component of Pa Kua in its combat
application. If a practitioner can learn how to
execute and apply the single palm change properly,
he will be well on his way to developing a high
level of Pa Kua skill.
Like everything else in Pa Kua, there are many
variations of the single palm change. Each school
will execute the single palm change in a slightly
different manner and within each school there
are also many variations that are practiced. Pa Kua
is based on the principle of change, therefore,
nothing is fixed. In practicing any aspect of the
art, whether it be stepping method, the single
palm change, or any given technique, the Pa Kua
practitioner will execute a wide variety of
variations. I know of no complete system of Pa

Kua that only executes one variation of single
palm change. Most schools will have at least five
or six different ways of executing this movement.
Everything from the hand and arm positions, to
the direction the body twists, to the positioning of
the feet, to the positioning of the body are varied
in the practice of single palm change.
Whole body coordination relies on the proper
movement of the upper legs and lower torso and
thus the change of direction on the circle during
the circle walk practice also develops the
practitioner's ability to coordinate the upper and
lower body. Additionally, the turning and
twisting movements executed during the change
of direction on the circle serve to develop a
functional flexibility.
By functional flexibility we are referring to
training which works to stretch and loosen
muscles that will need to be supple and loose
during the execution of Pa Kua. It is great if
someone can perform the full splits, however,
performing the splits or being able to put your
foot behind your head is not nearly as functional
in Pa Kua as having a loose and supple twisting
and turning movement throughout the whole
body, especially in the pelvic region. There are
many individuals who have very limber leg
muscles, however, when asked to stand with their
feet and knees facing forward and twist their hips
as far as they can to one side or the other, they
discover that the muscles in their pelvic region
are not so loose. In Pa Kua, functional flexibility
involves twisting and rotating the muscles and
suppleness in the joints; twisting the legs,
twisting the hips, twisting the torso, twisting the
shoulders, and twisting the arms. Additionally,
the twisting is executed in a coordinated fashion
while maintaining whole body connection. These
elements are all trained in the single palm change
and the other exercises that were presented in the
"body training" chapters of both volumes of this
book.
In terms of learning how to apply Pa Kua in an
actual combat environment, the change of
direction is the most important component of the
basic circle walk practice. It is within the change
of direction that the techniques of Pa Kua are
usually applied. The change of direction in the
circle walk practice also trains the Pa Kua body
coordination, full body integration, functional
26 
flexibility, and whole body power. The torso is
trained so that the upper and lower body are in
harmony and Pa Kua's rotational power is
developed while executing the change.
Body Methods: Here we will use the term "body
methods" to describe the height of the body, the
alignment of the body, and the upper body
positions used when walking the circle. When
speaking of body height in reference to Pa Kua
Chang circle walking practice, practitioners often
refer to the "three basins" (san pan - ). The
three basins are the upper, middle, and lower, and
refers to the height of the body as determined by
the bend in the knees. In the upper basin posture
the knees are only bent slightly. In the middle
basin posture the knees are bent more and thus
the body is lowered, and in the lower basin
posture the knees are bent so that the thighs are
almost parallel to the ground while the
practitioner walks the circle.
Obviously, the lower one bends the knees
while walking the circle, the stronger the legs will
become. Lower basin posturing is primarily a leg
strengthening exercise. The normal circle
walking position is middle basin. One will walk
in the upper basin posture if they are a beginner
and have weak legs or if they are focusing the
practice on the development of the upper body
and do not want the legs to tire before the arms.
The alignment of the body when practicing the
circle walk primarily has to do with the position
of the torso, which includes the waist, hips, pelvic
region, and inner thighs/groin area, and the spine.
Some schools will teach the beginning students to
walk the circle with the hips, shoulders, and head
square to the path of the circle instead of looking
in towards the center of the circle. In this practice
the beginner is concentrating on the foot work
and the hands are either held down by the sides of
the body with the palms pressing downward or
are in front of the body (either at lower abdomen
or chest level) in an "embracing" posture. Some
schools also utilize this body posture while
holding arm positions where both hands are
extended out to the sides of the body in some
fashion (there are many variations on this theme).
Eventually all schools of Pa Kua teach the
students to walk the circle with the eyes looking in 

towards the center of the circle. The body is
twisted from the inner thigh area so that the hips
are facing at a 45 degree angle in towards the
center of the circle. The shoulders are aligned
with the hips. The different upper body postures
the practitioner will hold while walking the circle
in this manner are many. Each school will have
their own set of eight separate postures that they
use. The most common posture is the "guard
stance," which is also known as the "millstone"
posture, the "dragon" posture, or the "green
dragon thrusts its claws" posture. In Park's school
the other variations of upper body postures are
depicted in the "eight animal" postures.
Another variation which occurs in the circle walk
body posture is the position of the spine. While
most schools will maintain a straight spine, some
teachers will have their students hold the spine
perfectly vertical while others will have their
students tilt the spine forward slightly. The tilted
spine, characteristic of the Yin Fu style, brings
the body weight forward a bit so that it is
centered between the legs (or just slightly in back
of center). When the weight of the body is more
towards the center, between the legs, the change
of direction can be executed faster.
Internal Cultivation
Internal cultivation during the circle walk
practice involves the cultivation of a mind/body
connection, the development of what is referred
to in Chinese as "stillness in motion," a
connection between the "inside and the outside,"
and a keen awareness of one's "center." During
the circle walk practice the mind is calm and the
breathing smooth. The combination of a calm
mind and smooth breathing is the first step in
creating a strong mind/body connection and a
feeling of being "still while in motion" (the inside
is "still" while the outside is in motion). Beyond
that there are many different images and
visualizations that different schools of Pa Kua
will utilize during the circle walk practice in
order to create a stronger mind/body connection.
Some use something as simple as focusing on an
object such as a tree or pole which is placed in
the center of the circle while others have more
elaborate visualizations. Some imagine walking
through water, thick air, or waist deep mud,
others imagine that they are walking on thin ice
27 
or on a very slippery surface, while others
imagine energy moving in their body in various
ways. The images and visualizations that can be
used are endless. Personally, I have found the
KISS (Keep It Simple, Stupid) principle to be the
most effective. The more elaborate the
visualization, the farther removed from the
concept of "stillness in motion" one becomes. In
Park's school we primarily use a center pole or
tree to focus on and the visualization of walking
on thin ice.
Awareness of one's center and how that center
relates to the rest of the body while walking the
circle and changing directions is another
important concept. In Pa Kua Chang the
practitioner is very concerned with the
relationship between his center and the
opponent's center. He will want to "protect" his
center while trying to off-balance the opponent's
center. Additionally, most of the movements in
Pa Kua require that the practitioner become
skilled at moving from his center or moving
around his center. Thus, the keener the awareness
of the center and how it relates to the rest of the
body during movement, the more effective and
efficient the practitioner will become. The
practitioner works to become aware of his center
in the circle walk practice both during the walk
and during the directional change. At various
times, Park will have students focus on their tan
t'ien (■ ) during the circle walk practice to
improve the student's awareness of his or her
center.
Internal cultivation in the practice of circle
walking can be further divided into ch'i (. )
cultivation and mental cultivation as described
below.
Circle Walking as a Meditative Practice: The
circle walk exercise of Pa Kua Chang originated
as a Taoist ch'i cultivation and meditative
practice. In the world of Chinese martial arts, this
practice can be compared to the Chan Chuang
( ), or standing meditation practice which is
an integral part of the Shaolin and Hsing-I Ch'uan
training systems. However, there is one
important difference; in Pa Kua Chang circle
walking the practitioner is constantly moving.
The circle walk, or moving meditative practice
directly reflects the Taoist influence. The
Taoists were 

 
concerned with a unification of Man, Heaven,
and Earth and therefore believed that if the
meditative practice was conducted while in
constant motion, one could better blend with the
patterns of nature and absorb the ch'i of Heaven
and Earth. Nothing in nature stands perfectly still
and thus remaining in constant motion while
meditating is more natural. Whereas the Buddhist
meditation is static and the focus is inward, the
Taoist circle walking practice is a moving
meditation with the intention focused outward. In
this circle walking practice, the practitioner seeks
to blend with the natural world.
The practitioner who walks the circle with the
meditative aspect of the training as a focus will
walk at an even, fluid, steady pace. The speed of
the walk can be slow to moderate. The walking
step should be natural, comfortable, and
continuous. The knees should be bent and the
hips and waist sunk slightly so that the ch'i sinks
to the tan t’ien. Lowering the center of gravity
encourages the ch 'i to sink; maintaining a
smooth, fluid walking motion stabilizes the tan
t'ien so that the ch'i will settle. If the body bobs
up and down or wobbles back and forth while
walking, the tan t'ien will be disturbed. When the
ch'i sinks to the tan t'ien, the mind can more
easily maintain a meditative focus.
While walking, the practitioner will maintain
focused on an object such as a tree or pole which
is placed at the circle's center. The breathing is
smooth and relaxed and the practitioner may
choose to repeat a "mantra" while walking. This
mantra does not need to be of religious
significance, it can be as simple as repeating, in
your mind, the number of times you have walked
around the circle. It can be anything that will
keep the mind from wandering.
Typically the practitioner will walk in one
direction for a desired number of rotations and
then switch directions and walk the other direction
for the same number of rotations. Training
sessions last between 30 minutes and one hour
with the practitioner circumnavigating the circle's
perimeter, alternating between the clockwise and
counterclockwise walking directions. The method
utilized to change directions will vary from school
to school. When training the circle walk as a
meditative practice, the change of direction is
28 
always very simple and executed in a smooth and
fluid fashion so as not to disturb the practitioner's
mental focus and concentration. The upper body
posture the practitioner assumes while walking
will -also vary from one school to another. The
practitioner may choose to hold the same upper
body posture throughout the practice session, or
change the upper body postures with the change
of directions on the circle. Each of the different
upper body positions is designed to have a
specific influence on the body's energy.
Mind/Body integration is one of the most
important aspects of any internal martial art.
Therefore, the mind plays a very important part
in the circle walk practice. At the beginning
levels, when the student is trying to work on
becoming comfortable with the physical
movements of the circle walk, the mind remains
calm and relaxed, focused on the center of the
circle, while gently reminding the body of the
important points of practice. Basically the mind is
trying to become aware of the physical body and
thus takes a physical inventory. Are the elbows
sinking downward? Are the shoulders relaxed?
Are the steps light? Am I bobbing up and down
or wobbling back and forth? Am I allowing my
energy to sink to the tan t'ien? These kind of
gentle reminders serve to increase body
awareness and help the practitioner remember the
important points of the practice.
After the practitioner becomes comfortable and
familiar with the physical movements of the
practice the mind can become increasingly aware
of what is happening in the body. Some schools
of Pa Kua will teach certain mental visualizations
designed to move energy in the body. While
some of these visualizations can become quite
intricate, Park feels that the mind should begin to
become more quiet instead of more active. The
physical movements of the circle walk and the
changes of direction will move energy where it
needs to go in a naturally correct manner.
Therefore, the student should allow the energy to
move as it will and simply observe the movement
and become aware of how the energy is naturally
moving in the body.
Once there is an awareness of the energy
in the body, the student can then follow the
natural movement with the mind. Park simply 
 

recommends that the mind be relaxed, the energy
sink to the tan t'ien, and that the mind have a
keen awareness of the physical movement. If all
movements are executed smoothly and
continuously with focused intention then there
can be a full mind/body connection.
Circle Walking for Ch'i Cultivation: Walking
the circle with ch'i cultivation as the main priority
in practice will not differ greatly, in terms of
mental focus, from the meditative circle walking
practice discussed in the last section. In the
meditative practice the practitioner's goal is to
maintain a calm mind and focused concentration
while the ch'i collects in the tan t'ien. In walking
the circle for ch 'i cultivation, the mental focus
and breathing pattern will remain the same,
however, the walking step, body posturing, and
direction change will become a bit more
complex.
When walking as a meditative practice, the
practitioner's step is smooth and natural. A
natural heel-toe walking step executed in a
smooth, fluid natural walking manner is well
suited for meditative practice as it is the most
natural and comfortable. This step is sometimes
referred to as the "lion step" or the "tiger step" by
Pa Kua Chang practitioners and was presented in
detail in the last volume of this book. In walking
with ch'i cultivation as a priority, the practitioner
may want to change the walking step to the
"snake step" (also known as the "dragon step" or
the "mud walking step") or the "crane step" as
these stepping methods are designed to
encourage a strong flow of ch'i from head-to-toe.
In the "snake step" the heel is only brought up off
the ground slightly when stepping, and as the foot
is brought forward, the bottom of the foot
remains parallel to the floor and hovers just
slightly above the floor. When the foot has come
forward and is ready to step down, it is placed on
the ground such that the entire foot lands flatly on
the ground at the same instant. There is no
heel-toe rolling motion as in the "lion step." The
"snake step" is a bit more difficult to perform
than the natural heel-toe walk of the "lion step,"
however its advantage is that it helps bring ch'i
down to the legs and feet and thus it is a good
method to employ in ch'i kung circle walking
practice.
29 
The "crane step" is similar to the "snake step," in
that the stepping foot slides out above the ground
and is placed down flat, however, in the "crane
step" when the back foot is picked up off of the
ground it is brought up to the level of the knee of
the other leg before it slides out to take the
advancing step. Lifting the leg helps "pump" the
ch'i down to the stepping leg and also helps the
practitioner develop balance and stability.
While the "snake step" or "crane step" footwork
encourages a balanced flow of ch 'i to the legs
while walking, the practitioner's static
upper-body posture and focused intention will
influence ch'i movement in the upper body. Each
school of Pa Kua Chang will typically have eight
different walking postures which the practitioner
will transition through during the course of the
ch'i kung circle walking practice. Each posture is
designed to have a different influence on the
body physiologically and energetically.
Typically the practitioner will walk in one
direction holding a certain upper body posture for
a desired length of time and then change
directions and walk in the opposite direction
holding the same posture. Upon the next change
of direction the practitioner will then change to a
different upper body posture and perform circle
revolutions in both the clockwise and
counterclockwise directions holding that posture
before changing to another posture.
By the end of the practice the practitioner has
spent time walking in both clockwise and
counterclockwise directions holding all eight of
the static upper-body postures. Each posture is
usually held for the same number of circle
revolutions. However, since each posture
influences the ch'i circulation to the body's vital
organs in a different manner, a student who is
experiencing a particular health problem may be
advised to hold one or two postures longer than
the others in order to help his or her body seek a
balance.
Holding a static upper-body position while
walking the circle with focused intention and
calm mind helps to balance the ch'i in the body
and gather ch'i in specific areas as influenced by
the unique posturing. The movement sequence
executed while changing directions on the circle
is designed to take the ch'i that has been gathered 

and direct it to new locations. The movement of
ch'i will differ with each different changing
maneuver. Some changes will promote a
spiraling movement of the ch 'i. Some changes
will influence its movement upward or
downward, while other changes will encourage
the ch'i to collect or disperse. Each change effects
the movement of ch 'i in the body in a different
way. In Park's school students begin with simple
changes of direction and gradually move on to
more complex changes which promote the
energy flow in the body in different ways.
Through the process of continually gathering
ch'i during the static-posture walking phase of the
practice and then moving it through the body
during the various changing maneuvers executed
when changing directions on the circle, the aware
practitioner will gain valuable experiential
knowledge concerning the ebb and flow of ch'i in
the body. However, if the student begins to
practice complex changes too soon, he or she will
not be able to maintain ch'i awareness throughout
the changes.
In the first volume of this book Park Bok Nam
recommended that the student practicing the ch'i
kung circle walking method walk in one static
posture until a "ch'i feeling" is developed
throughout the body. After the practitioner has
cultivated the "feeling," he or she should then
execute the directional change in a smooth, fluid,
and connected manner so that the ch'i feeling
remains constant during the change. The focus
while walking in the static posture is to feel the
body fill with the energy of that posture. When
executing the change, the awareness is placed on
maintaining the full body ch'i feeling while the
body's energy shifts and adjusts with the physical
movement of the change.
When talking about how long a student should
practice the circle walk, Park says that in order to
gain the most benefit from the practice and
cultivate the most energy, the student needs to
learn how to use the will to overcome a lazy
mind and body. Park says that when the body
begins to tire, the body's natural protection
mechanism will start to send signals to indicate it
is time to stop the exercise before the body
becomes overfatigued. At this point, Park says that it
is the "lazy mind" that will succumb to these signals
30 
and stop practice. Park recommends that at this
stage in the practice session the student walk
faster and lower. The mind and body will then
realize that this exercise is not going to stop, so
more energy is sent throughout the body to give it
extra stamina and endurance. In effect, you get a
" second wind." This energy surge is very evident
when it occurs. Muscles that were beginning to
become fatigued do not seem to be so
bothersome and the whole body feels the new
burst of energy.
After the practice has continued a little longer,
the body will once again try to protect itself by
sending signals for the exercise to stop. When
this second wave of signals come, Park
recommends that you use your will once again to
overcome the fatigue, walk lower and faster, and
gain a new burst of energy. Park says that if the
student does not learn how to use the will to
overcome the mind and body, he or she will
never progress to the higher levels of experience.
After the you have practiced a little bit longer,
the body will again begin to send signals of
fatigue. Park says that this third wave of distress
signals from the body must be taken seriously
because they are "true." If the practitioner
continues to use strong will to overcome this
third wave of signals, the body can be damaged.
Upon ending the circle walk practice, Park Bok
Nam recommends that the practitioner remain
standing in a comfortable posture with the hands
resting down by the sides of the body for several
minutes. Attention is focused on the palms and
the ch'i that has gathered there. The student
allows the hands to hang loosely by the sides,
relaxes all of the body's joints, and places the
concentration on the "ch'i feeling." Typically this
"ch'i feeling" will first manifest itself in the hands
as fullness, heat, and/or tingling.
When the practitioner has obtained this ch'i feeling
during the execution of any exercise, he or she will
want to relax for several minutes and concentrate on
this feeling after the exercise has been completed. By
concentrating on the feeling, a mind/body/nervous
system connection associated with this feeling will
develop. The more developed this connection
becomes, the easier it will be for the practitioner to
bring ch'i to the palms or other parts of the body.
With continued practice, the student will be able to 

produce this effect just by thinking about it.
Later, increased amounts of ch'i will flow to
the palms naturally, when it is needed, without
conscious thought.
One goal in practicing Pa Kua Chang as a
self-defense art is to be able to move ch'i very
rapidly to the palms (or any other part of the
body) when striking. When the
mind/body/nervous system connection has
been fully developed, as soon as the body
moves the ch'i will be there and the movement
of ch'i to the palm will be rapid and
spontaneous. Forging the mind/body/nervous
system connection during and after the circle
walk practice will help the practitioner reach
this goal.  in motion" not only refers to stillness on the inside,
 
Fighting Skills
In Pa Kua Chang fighting, footwork is primary.
The footwork must be executed such that the
upper body is always stable so that no movements
are "telegraphed" and so that the body is always
rooted into the legs and ground. Additionally, this
stability must be maintained even when the
practitioner is moving quickly. All of the skills
mentioned above (strength, flexibility,
coordination, balance, awareness of one's center,
etc.), are important fighting skills which are
Circle Walking Variations   
As discussed in the last section, there are many
benefits the Pa Kua Chang practitioner can gain
from the circle walk practice. The circle walking
method employed will depend upon the result
desired. Below we will discuss the three stepping
methods employed in Park Bok Nam's system of
Pa Kua Chang.
The Foot Placement
While there are literally dozens of different
stepping methods Pa Kua practitioners will employ
while walking the circle, there are three main
methods which are practiced by most schools.
Each school may have its own special names for
these steps. However, these three methods are
most commonly known as the "mud walking"
31 
trained, at their most basic level, during the
circle walk practice.
In a combat situation, the most important skill
for the Pa Kua practitioner is the ability to
change directions rapidly and smoothly while
maintaining balance and stability (rootedness
in motion). Bending the knees slightly and
sinking the ch'i to the tan t'ien when walking
the circle in a smooth, continuous manner
stabilizes the body and places the center of
body mass and center of gravity in a position
which optimizes the ability to maintain
balance and rootedness while in motion.
The walking practice trains stability in motion and
stillness in motion. Here the concept of "stillness
but also refers to stillness of the upper body while
the legs are in motion. If the upper body is
bobbing, swaying, weaving, or otherwise moving
with each step, you will be telegraphing your
motion. The change of direction during the circle
walk practice also trains the ability to move
rapidly and efficiently around one's center. This
skill is also extremely important to the Pa Kua
fighter. For more information about circle walking
as it applies to fighting skill see the section
"Advanced Circle Walking: Training to Fight" on
page 36 of this volume.
step (or snake step), rolling step (or lion step),
and the crane step. Below we will outline the
characteristics of these steps as practiced in Park
Bok Nam's school.
The Snake Step: The snake step, also commonly
known as the "dragon step," the "gliding step," or
the "mud walking step," is one of the most
common Pa Kua stepping techniques. Park refers
to this as the "snake step" and thus that is what we
will call it in the remainder of this book. In Park's
school, this step is not a method that is used very
often in combat, however, it is an excellent training
step. This step trains balance and stability in motion,
thrusting or shoveling power in the legs and
encourages an increased energy flow to the legs 
  

   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  1
 2 3 
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  4  5 6 
   
   
  The Snake  Step 
 
and feet. move forward, as in normal walking. The heel
Although there are numerous variations of this lifts slightly and then as the foot is brought
step being practiced by the various schools of forward it flattens out parallel to the ground.
Pa Kua, the basic step consists of the stepping There should be no hesitation in the transition
foot sliding out along the ground, or hovering of the foot to the flattened orientation. The
just over the ground, as the foot steps forward. steps are very smooth and continuous.
As it is one of the most commonly practiced
stepping methods in Pa Kua, a wide variety of 2) Stepping forward: Here the foot glides off
variations have subsequently developed. In the ground slightly and hovers just over the
order to explore the snake step that is surface of the ground when stepping.
practiced in Park's school, I will divide the
mechanics of the step into three sections: 3) Placing the stepping foot down: In the
picking up the rear foot, the actual step snake step, when the stepping foot moves
forward, and placing the stepping foot down. forward and is placed in position on the
ground the foot is placed down flat so that the
1) Picking up the rear foot: While executing the entire surface of the foot contacts the ground
snake step, Park allows the heel of the rear foot to at the exact same time. 
come off the ground when the rear foot begins to   
   
   
   
32 
  

Other variations and combinations of the of this step here.

snake step exist and each instructor will have
his own methods of teaching and points of
emphasis. Above we have described Park Bok
Nam's execution of this step. However, no one
technique or one school is more "correct" than
the other; they all have merit.
The Lion Step: The "lion step," also
commonly referred to as the "rolling step," the
"continuous step," and the "small fast step," is
executed in a comfortable heel-toe walking
fashion. Since it is the quickest most natural
step and is easily and efficiently combined with
the k'ou pu and pai pu steps, it is often used in
combat when speed and agility in motion
are required. This is the step that was
described in the last volume of this book. For
completeness we will briefly revisit the principles  In order for the walking to be smooth and the
The lion step is very similar to natural
walking, however, the knees are bent lower
and the practitioner keeps the upper body
stable without allowing it to bob up and down,
wobble forward to back, or sway side to side.
The hips, shoulders, eyes, and top of the head
are all held level and the only movement
occurs below the hips. The entire upper body
remains relaxed, comfortable, and motionless.
If someone were watching a practitioner walk
the circle in this manner from the other side of
a wall that was about hip height, the
practitioner's upper body should be so smooth
that it would appear as though the practitioner
is sitting on an object which is moving around
in circles. The upper body should give no
indication of what the feet are doing.
 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 

The Lion Step 

33 
  

   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  1 2  3 
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  4 5  6 
   
   
  The Crane  Step
   
upper body motionless the legs must act as hard time with the smooth even flow and quiet
shock absorbers and the heel-toe rolling stepping of this technique, he tells them to
motion of the feet must be very smooth. When imagine that they are trying to sneak into
the practitioner's heel is set down there is no someone's room without that person knowing it.
thud, it is set down very light and soft. The
transition from heel to toe is very smooth, as if The Crane Step: The "crane step," which is
the practitioner had small rocking-chair type also sometimes called the "chicken step," is
rockers on the bottoms of the feet. The executed with the stepping foot being lifted
transition of weight across the stepping foot is to about calf or knee height before it steps
very smooth and continuous. At the tail end of out. This step is primarily practiced to
the rocking motion across the bottom of the improve balance and rootedness on one leg
foot, the practitioner will "grab" the ground for use when kicking, trapping, and sweeping
with his toes and slightly push off so that there with the legs. Yin Fu ( ) was said to have
is always a smooth forward momentum. been fond of utilizing the crane step. Yin Fu
Park explains that the smooth gradual transition of was also said to be so skilled at leg trapping
weight across the bottom of the foot in the and sweeping that his feet and legs were as
execution of the lion step serves to stimulate the sensitive as a skilled push-hands
reflexology points on the bottom of the practitioner's hands and arms. Walking with
practitioner's foot and thus aids in the overall the crane step will help to develop the balance
health of the body. When students are having a  and stability necessary for these leg skills. Park's 
   
   
   
34 

teacher had him practice this step while
walking on top of river stones.
The Foot Placement: When practicing the
various circle walk steps described in this
section, all foot placement, in terms of the
angle at which the foot is placed in relation to
the line of the circle, is the same. The outside
foot (foot furthest from the center of the circle)
cuts in at approximately 45 degrees to an
imaginary line which is tangent to the circle.
The inside foot steps relatively straight ahead
(parallel to the line which is tangent to the
circle). Angling the outside foot helps the
practitioner circumnavigate the arc of the
circle. The exact angle of the outside or inside
foot will depend on the size of the circle.
However, as stated above, this foot will
usually angle in approximately 45 degrees
when walking in an average sized circle (see
illustration on page 45 of the first volume of
this book). For instance, in the photographs
shown in this chapter, Park is walking a fairly
small circle and thus his inside foot is angled
inward. In the next section of this chapter, we
will discuss circle walking variations in which
the angles of the feet are much greater in order
for the practitioner to navigate very small
circles and spiraling arcs.
While the above mentioned stepping
methods each have their own unique purpose
in terms of foundational skill development,
they also have purpose in fighting. Each of the
stepping methods has an optimum time it can
be employed in a fighting situation. Some
steps are ideally suited to different kinds of
techniques and different kinds of terrains. The
stepping method employed (both linear and
circular) in combat will constantly change
depending on the situation, the opponent, and
the environment. In all complete systems of
Pa Kua Chang there are complete methods of
training and this means the usage of a wide
variety of stepping methods in both practice
and application.
No matter what circle walking technique is
utilized, if the practitioner is relaxed, the body
is aligned properly and the intention is focused,
positive results in the physical, mental, and
spiritual realm will follow. The practitioner's
35 
primary goal in practice will determine the
walking technique employed and the technique
employed will result in a more pronounced level
of growth in one or more of the components
which make up our physical, mental, and spiritual
existence. In the first section of this chapter we
briefly described some of the direct benefits a
practitioner might experience if the focus of the
practice is in one of three areas: meditative
practice, ch'i development practice, and/or
physical development practice. The Pa Kua
Chang purist will be concerned with
development in all three of these areas in training
the complete art.
Conclusion
Pa Kua Chang circle walking is not one exercise
practiced for one specific purpose, it is many
exercises practiced to achieve a variety of
physical, mental, and spiritual benefits.
Variations on the theme are numerous. What we
have presented thus far in this chapter are only
some of the most common circle walk methods.
There are many other methods that we have not
mentioned. Anything is possible as long as the
practitioner adheres to the basic principles.
Aside from the fact that the circle walk practice
will help improve concentration and focus,
develop strong legs, aid in ch'i development, and
improve physical and respiratory stamina, this
practice helps the practitioner develop the ability
to remain relaxed, integrated, stable, and rooted
while in constant motion and teaches the
practitioner how to execute the highly evasive
footwork required in tactical application. This
ability is vital when applying Pa Kua Chang as a
fighting art.
Holding static upper-body postures while walking
enables the practitioner to develop his or her body
and forge strong structural connections and
alignments. Maintaining structural integrity and
root while constantly walking is the first stage of
learning how to apply powerful strikes to an
opponent while remaining in constant motion. As
discussed previously, this ability is characteristic of
Pa Kua Chang. In the next section of this chapter
we will discuss some advanced circle walking
techniques and describe some uses of the circle
walking footwork in fighting. 

Advanced Circle Walking: Training to Fight   
Everyone who has ever practiced Pa Kua Chang
has been given the lecture about the importance
of the circle walk practice. Stories abound about
the old masters having been allowed to practice
only basic circle walking methods for the first
several years of their Pa Kua training. While the
previous section of this chapter discussed some
of the great benefits of the circle walk practice,
many readers may still be wondering exactly how
this footwork is employed in a combat situation.
The basic circle walk practice is primarily a
training exercise that the beginning and
intermediate level student practices to build a
strong Pa Kua Chang foundation. The advanced
Pa Kua practitioner will also continue to practice
the basic circle walk to continually reach deeper
levels of internal awareness. No matter how long
an individual practices the basic circle walk, there
are always deeper levels to discover.
When Park Bok Nam was training with his
teacher, Lu Shui-T'ien ( ), in Korea, his
teacher required that Park practice the basic circle
walk exercise every morning for one hour. At the
end of one year of practice Park came to his
teacher one morning and very proudly reported,
"After practicing for one hour everyday for the
past year, I now understand this circle walk
practice." Lu only shook his head and laughed.
He said, "Just keep practicing."
After another year of practice Park came to his
teacher again and said, "I now know why you
laughed at me last year when I told you that I
understood the circle walk practice. After
practicing another year my knowledge is much
deeper and I can say that I now really understand
this practice." Again, Lu laughed, shook his head
and told Park to keep practicing. Park has now
practiced the basic circle walk exercise every
morning for nearly 35 years and he says that he
has discovered that there is always something
more to learn.
Although there are always deeper levels of
experience one will gain from the basic circle
36 
walk practice, a skilled Pa Kua practitioner
engaged in a fight is not going to walk in
complete circles around his opponent. This is just
not practical in a realistic situation against a
seasoned fighter. If you are fighting a skilled
opponent and take more than two or three steps in
one direction, you have set up a pattern that he
will immediately use against you. It is ridiculous
to think that you will be able to stalk your
opponent by walking in circles around him
waiting for an "opening." If this is your idea
about how Pa Kua circle walking is used in a real
fight you are going to be in for a rude awakening
when you meet a skilled opponent.
The key element in Pa Kua's employment of
footwork is not to try and move in circles around
the opponent at arm's length, but it is to either try
to out flank the opponent or open up his center. In
either case, as soon as you move, you are closing
with the opponent, not running around him. Your
goal is to gain an advantageous angle of attack.
Simply running around someone at arms length is
a big waste of time in a real fight. A skilled
opponent will eat you alive before you take your
third step if you try such a thing. The only time
this tactic might be used is if you are trying to
bait the guy to set him up.
We can look at Pa Kua's employment of
circle walking footwork from two
perspectives; one is when the opponent
initiates the attack and the other is if you
want to initiate the attack yourself. Preferably
you will initiate the attack yourself or bait the
opponent into attacking you where you want
him to attack you so that you can set him up.
The idea that some practitioners have of Pa Kua
being a "passive" and "defensive" martial art is a
pile of "new age" nonsense. If you are going to
fight with someone, you do not sit and wait for
him to attack or walk in circles around him
waiting for him to attack. Once you have made the
decision to fight, you move in without hesitation
and you flatten the guy in the most efficient

and effective way possible.
During a Pa Kua Chang fighting
demonstration Park gave in California, a
spectator asked Park how he prepared his
mind when he was waiting for the opponent to
attack. Park said, "Why wait? If you are going
to fight, you attack, if you are not going to
fight, you go home. There is no waiting."
The Opponent Attacks First
If the opponent initiates the attack and you
chose to employ the circle walking footwork
(circular footwork is not the only stepping
method used in Pa Kua), the initial idea is to
move out of the way of the opponent's attack.
However, we do not want to simply run away.
We want to move in such a manner that we
avoid the opponent's attack while
simultaneously setting ourselves in a position
for immediate counterattack.
Evasiveness in Pa Kua is not about running
away from the opponent. It is about closing
with and destroying the opponent as quickly
as possible without meeting force against
force. We do not want to engage directly. We
want to be a bit sneaky about how we close
with the opponent. We want to use optimum
angles of attack and use the opponent's force
against him, but we will do so very efficiently
with no wasted movement and we will allow
no gaps for him to move. This means moving
around his attack, but at the same time moving
towards him and inside his defenses. A skilled
opponent will immediately take advantage of
any gap in either time or distance you give
him to work with. Your footwork, body
movements, and hand techniques should be
executed such that the opponent has no time to
react or space to move.
While evading an opponent's attack and
instantly delivering a magnificent, fight-stopping
counterattack is a dream come true, more times
than not, it is not reality. If the opponent is skilled,
he will not let you get away with it. We can also
never forget about Murphy and his laws. If
something can go wrong, it will go wrong. This is
where having the ability to change direction very
quickly while remaining stable becomes vitally
important.
37 
When you launch your counterattack against
your opponent's initial attack you are already
"thinking" about what comes next and you are
prepared for anything. (This "thinking" is
more a body knowledge than an actual thought
process. In other words, your body is prepared
to continually attack, adapt, and move.) You
never assume that your first technique is going
to work. You never want to think like a "one
shot wonder" who imagines his first attack, or
first counterattack, will devastate his
opponent.
There are many martial artists who feel that
they can hit so hard that one shot is all it will
take to defeat the opponent. There are others
who think that they have some special
techniques that no one can counter. "Welcome
to fantasy island." If your opponent is skilled
it will be very difficult for you to ever land
your first shot and it will be even more
difficult to land a direct hit with full force.
You must be prepared to continuously attack
while changing and adapting to the situation.
This ability is expressed in the lien huan
(continuously linking) skill which was
discussed in Chapter 2 of this volume.
When training to fight, you always imagine
that your opponent is much bigger, much
stronger, and at a much higher skill level than
you are. You also must respect Murphy and
consider that what can go wrong, will go
wrong. Your mind must stay one step ahead of
your body at all times, you use your listening
skill and as soon as you feel how the opponent
is reacting to your initial attack, you
immediately change appropriately and
continue attacking. The art of Pa Kua Chang is
philosophically rooted in the concept of
change and physically rooted in the footwork
and single palm change. Being able to change
directions rapidly with balance, stability, and
power is the important part of Pa Kua's use of
the circle walk practice in fighting. Therefore,
advanced circle walk training is focused on
training these components.
You Initiate the Attack
In the second instance mentioned above,
that of you yourself initiating an attack, the

same principles apply- As we discussed in
Chapter 2 of this volume, initiating an attack
is a three step process: gain a reaction, bridge
the gap, finish him off. The first step is to gain
a reaction from the opponent. This can be
accomplished in any number of ways. This
can also be viewed as a "set up" or a "jab." but
it is not simply a false ploy. Most of the time
it is a realistic movement which will hurt the
opponent if he does not respond to it. But we
will always assume that he is a good fighter
and will be able to successfully counter our
initial movement.
The next step is the "bridge." The bridge is
used to open up the opponent and get inside
Park
Park Bok Nampractices
Bok Nam practicesthe
the
PaPa Kua
Kua
Chang pole training
Chang pole training
38 
where we can really do some damage. The type
of bridge which is used will depend upon the
opponent's initial reaction to the first move. If the
bridge is successful, then we can follow up with a
finishing technique. If the opponent is skilled, we
may need to employ several quick, repetitive
bridging maneuvers before we can get inside on
him or out flank him. Also, once inside we may
need to apply a series of fast, powerful finishing
techniques before the opponent is thoroughly
defeated. Once the Pa Kua Chang practitioner
gets inside on the opponent, he will continue to
stay inside until the job is finished. There is no
bouncing in, striking once, and then bouncing
back out as in sport lighting for points. Once you
are inside, you stay until the job is finished.
Again, it is your footwork that keeps you there.
A skilled opponent is not going to let you
continue hitting him from a vulnerable angle. He
is going to move. Utilizing your footwork, you
stick on the opponent like glue. Were he goes,
you go and you don't let up until the job is done.
Park Bok Nam calls getting inside on the
opponent "opening his door." He says that once
the door is open, you do not let the door close
until you have finished the job.
Advanced Circle Walking
Skillfully executed rapid changes of direction, in
conjunction with changing the palms and whole
body power, provide excellent opportunities to
bridge the gap and open up the opponent. If you
can execute rapid change of direction in
combination with stable steps and flanking
movements it will be difficult for the opponent to
keep up with the changes. This is why the change
of direction is so important in Pa Kua Chang. In
advance circle walking practice the circles
become smaller and the change of direction more
frequent.
In advanced circle walk training the practitioner learns
to change directions rapidly while changing the palms
and maintaining balance, stability, and full body
coordination. While these concepts are also trained in
the basic circle walk practice the difference here is
  

that instead of continually walking around the diagram is executed as follows:

center of the circle, in the advanced practice, the 1) Park begins walking the circle in the
practitioner walks around the center while also clockwise direction. See photo 1.
moving towards the center. The circles become 2) Park begins to change directions by cutting a
very small and the walking patterns turn into small curve and then heading towards the center
"figure eights," small circles or spirals (see the of the circle. He does not cut straight into the
diagrams on page 98 of the first volume of this center. His footwork follows that of the T'ai Chi
book). Because of the difficulty of walking in diagram. As he begins to head towards the center
tight circles and changing directions rapidly pole he starts to execute a straight fan chang
while maintaining balance, speed, and ( ) maneuver. See photos 2 through 4.
coordination, all of the important concepts that 3) As Park approaches the center pole, the
are trained during the basic circle walk practice centerline of his body turns around its center
must be in place before the practitioner moves twisting in towards the pole as the fan chang
on to the advanced circle walk training. maneuver is completed. The footwork continues
to follow the pattern of the T'ai Chi diagram. See
T'ai Chi Diagram Circle Walk Pole Training photos 5 through 8.
While each school of Pa Kua Chang will have 4) Park continues to walk the circle in the other
its own methods for developing the advanced direction having executed the change of
circle walk practice, in this chapter we will directions. See photos 9 and 10.
explain the advanced practice as it is taught by Park will now walk around the whole circle until
Park Bok Nam. In Park's system the first he feels like changing directions again. When he
practice a student will graduate to after the basic changes he will then execute the same sequence
circle walk is the yin-yang circle walking pattern walking the opposite T'ai Chi diagram.
as shown in the diagram below (the arrows When practicing this exercise, you can walk
indicate the walking pattern) and the the entire practice at the same pace, or you can
photographs on the next page. The changing of vary your walking pace. After students gain a bit
the palms in this pattern is executed as the of experience with this practice, Park will usually
practitioner transitions through the middle of the
circle. A pole or tree is placed in the center of
the circle and the changing of the palms and the
directional change of the body is coordinated
with the movement towards and around the pole
as if the pole was an opponent.
The important component of this practice is the
timing of the palm change, the smoothness of
the steps and the ability to keep your center
facing the opponent. In order to accomplish this,
the turning of the body around its center as the
palms are changed while you move around the
pole becomes very important. You maintain a
consistent optimum angle in relation to your
opponent by turning your hips and shoulders at
the appropriate time during the transition. The
timing of the palms changing position and the
rotational movements of the arms in conjunction
with the rotating torso are also important points
in this practice. T'ai Chi Diagram Circle Walking Pattern
The yin-yang pattern walking of the T'ai Chi

39 
  

 
1                                                                                 2 
 

 
                3                    4 
 

 
                5                    6 
 

The T'ai Chi Diagram Change Around One Pole

 

40 
  

 
7                                                                                8 
 

 
                9                    10 

The T'ai Chi Diagram Change Around One Pole (con’t)

have his students walk the outside of the circle
at a smooth steady pace, and then speed up the
walk when they move through the middle.
Varying the pace is good for practicing
combat oriented footwork while maintaining
the same smooth, steady pace is good for ch'i
kung and meditative practice.
Usually, when the students transition to the
yin-yang changing practice they notice a
difference in the way the ch'i moves in the body
as opposed to the previously practiced changing
of direction. In executing this change the energy
movement is very smooth and continuous
because the feet never stop moving and arm
transitions are very smooth and continuous.
After the student has gained experience walking the
yin-yang circle utilizing the dragon posture and the
fan cluing maneuver, he or she will then begin
practicing all of the eight animal postures and learn
how to smoothly transition the upper body postures
from one animal posture to the next. At first the
student will practice the animal transitions in the
order which was presented in the first volume of
this book (i.e., lion, unicorn, snake, swallow,
dragon flying, bear, phoenix, and monkey).
Later the student will learn how to transition
between any given animal. He or she will
practice changing from lion to unicorn, from
lion to snake, from lion to swallow, etc. Because
there are eight animals, there are sixty-four possible

41 

changing combinations.
In learning and studying the sixty-four possible
changing combinations, the student will discover
a multitude of martial applications and become
aware of numerous patterns of energy movement
in the body. Each change presents a number of
possible martial applications. Most of the smooth
continuous changing postures in the eight animal
combinations work very well in throwing and
locking applications. However, they also offer the
student jabbing, bridging and striking
possibilities, especially when combined with the
forty-eight month and supplemental palm strikes
which are presented in Chapter 5 of this volume.
As a variation to the yin-yang pole training, the
student can combine the yin-yang change with all
of the other changes he or she has learned on the
circle. In other words, the student will change
directions one time by using the yin-yang pattern
change, and then the next time they can perform
a standard single palm change on the circle. The
practitioner can vary or alternate these changes as
he or she wishes.
Spiraling Pattern Pole Training
After the student has become proficient in the
execution of the yin-yang footwork pattern, he or
she can also begin to practice the "spiraling"
pattern around one central pole. This change
employs the use of the t'ien Jan chang maneuver
which was presented in the first volume of this
book. In executing this change, the practitioner
will utilize the footwork of the "outside" single
palm change as shown on page 78 of Chapter 4
of this volume. Therefore, Park will always teach
this variation of the single palm change on the
circle before the student learns how to employ the
change utilizing the spiraling footwork pattern.
The spiraling footwork pattern is executed as
follows:
1) In this example, Park begins by walking the
circle in the counter-clockwise direction. See
photo 1.
2) Park begins to execute the change as if he
were going to perform the yin-yang pattern. See
photos 2 through 4.
3) As Park approaches the pole, he begins to
42 
perform the t'ien fan chang maneuver as he
begins to walk around the pole. At this point the
footwork looks exactly like the yin-yang pattern
footwork. See photos 5 through 7.
4) Instead of continuing to walk around the
pole, Park now plants a k'ou pu step with his right
foot and begins to execute another t'ien fan chang
( ) back in the other direction with his
back to the pole. See photos 8 and 9.
5) As the t'ien fan chang maneuver continues,
Park takes a pronounced pai pu step with the left
foot and begins to turn back to face the same
direction he originally approached the pole from.
See photos 10 through 12.
6) Park now steps around with the right foot
and begins walking the spiral back to the outer
circle. He smoothly follows the spiral with his
steps until his path joins back with the path of the
circle. See photos 13 through 17.
You will notice that Park is now, once again,
walking the circle in the counter-clockwise
direction. This is because he has executed two
palm changes during this sequence, one as he
approached the pole and another as he changed
directions to go back the way he came. From here
Park could execute a single change on the circle
or a yin-yang change through the center to begin
walking in the other direction.
The spiraling pattern practiced here can vary
from a large gradual inward spiraling pattern to a
very sharp spiral. The student can work with
numerous variations. Also, the t'ien fan chang is
not the only move that can be practiced during
the change. Any of the eight animal changes that
were practiced in the yin-yang pattern training
can be used here as well. Park usually teaches the
t'ien fan chang change first because it is a
difficult move and challenges the student's
coordination, stability, and flexibility.
The yin-yang pattern and the spiraling
pattern are the first of the many patterns that
are practiced as part of Park's "pole training."
After the student has practiced the yin-yang
pattern and the spiraling pattern around one
central pole and becomes proficient in the
mechanics and timing of these movements,
he or she will then begin to practice walking a
  

 
                        1                                                2                                                3 
 

 
      4                                                5                                                  6 
 

 
      7                                                8                                                  9 

The Spiraling Pattern Change Around One Pole 

43 
  

 
                        10                                              11                                              12 
 

 
      13                                              14                                                15 
 

 
                                16                                                17 

The Spiraling Pattern Change Around One Pole (con’t) 

44 

"figure-eight" pattern around two poles. From
there the student will progress to walking a
double figure-eight around three poles.
Two Or Three Pole Practice
When the student begins to work with the two
and three pole arrangements, he or she will
practice the yin-yang and spiraling patterns as
practiced during the one pole training. However,
with two or three poles the patterns become
smaller, the footwork tighter, and the movements
more complex.
When working with either the two or three pole
configuration, the distances between the poles are
varied so that the student will become
accustomed to navigating smaller figure-eights
and larger figure-eights. When working with
three poles, the distance between each of the
poles will be varied so that the first figure-eight
around pole # 1 and pole #2 might be small and
the subsequent pattern around pole #2 and pole
#3 might be larger. In addition to the figure-eight
patterns, the student will also practice small
circles around the various poles in conjunction
with the figure-eight patterns. In other words, the
practitioner might execute two consecutive
figure-eight patterns around the three poles, then
execute a full circle or two around pole #1 before
continuing the figure-eight pattern. Then the
student might execute a large circle around all of
the poles, execute a standard single change on the
large circle and then go back to the figure eight
pattern. The change which was executed during
the spiraling pattern footwork is also employed to
change directions when the student is practicing
the figure eight pattern. Some of these
possibilities are depicted in the diagrams which
were shown on page 98 of the first volume of this
book.
In addition to varying the size of the circles and
the walking patterns in, between, and around the
poles, the student will also vary the rhythm of the
practice by changing the speed of his walk. Usually
the larger outside circle is walked at a slow smooth
pace and then the practitioner will speed up when
entering the circle and navigating the poles. Varying
the patterns and the rhythm gives the student
experience in varying the timing of the palm
45 
changes, varying the footwork patterns, and
varying the coordination of the body's turning and
twisting movements.
Walking in smaller, tighter circles, and changing
directions frequently facilitates the development of
the k'ou pu and pai pu steps as quick directional
changes. The ability to apply k'ou pu and pai pu
quickly and efficiently not only teaches the
practitioner how to change directions rapidly while
remaining stable, it also develops flexibility and
adroitness in the pelvic region. Additionally, the
student begins to develop the ability to utilize the
k'ou and pai steps in quickly hooking and trapping
the opponent's legs (these techniques are discussed
in more detail in Chapter 4 of this volume).
The three pole figure eight circle walking pattern
is shown on the next page. The practice is as
follows:
1) In this sequence we catch Park having just
rounded the left outside post and he has entered
the circle going towards the center pole just as in
the yin-yang pole pattern footwork. He has just
completed a change of palms by executing a fan
chang maneuver. See photo 1.
2) As Park rounds the center pole, he executes a
tight turn around the pole and begins to execute a
fan chang maneuver to change palms once again
as he heads for the right outside pole. See photos 2
and 3.
3) Park has now finished the palm change as he
navigates around the right outside pole. He
continues walking a small circle around the right
outside pole, keeping the right hand forward. See
photos 4 through 6.
4) Once Park has completed the circle around
the outside pole, he will then begin to execute
another fan chang maneuver and head for the
opposite side of the center pole. See photos 7 and
8.
5) Once around the center pole, Park will again
execute a fan chang and head for the far side of the
left outside pole and walk the circle around that
pole to complete one full lap. See photos 9
through 12.
Once Park reaches the position in photo 12, he is
ready to start the circuit again.
As you might imagine, the combinations
  

 
                                  1                                                                                2 
 

 
                                  3                                                                                4 
 

 
                                  5                                                                                6 

The Figure Eight Pattern Change Around Three Poles 

46 
  

 
                                  7                                                                                8 
 

 
                                  9                                                                                10 
 

 
                                  11                                                                              12 

The Figure Eight Pattern Change Around Three Poles (con’t) 

47 

here become endless. Utilizing the
standard circle walk around one pole, the
practitioner now has six different circles to
walk around (one large circle around all
poles, one small circle around each of the
three poles, and one medium size circle
around each pair of two poles). In addition
to the standard circle around each of the
circle sizes listed above, the student can
practice various combinations of the
yin-yang pattern around any pole or
combination of poles and also incorporate
the spiraling pattern around any pole.
In addition to utilizing the Jan chang, or
overturning palm movement when navigating
amongst the poles, the student will also practice
48 
changing amongst the "eight animal palms"
that were also practiced during the basic
circle walk exercise. By executing these
movements the student not only becomes
familiar with the rapid twisting and turning
movements of the body, but he also
becomes familiar with various basic arm
movements. When the arms, body, and legs
can all be coordinated while the practitioner
is navigating the tight twists and turns
amongst the poles, he will discover many
new applications of these basic movements.
Once the student becomes adept at changing
amongst the poles utilizing the basic arm
movements of the "eight animal palms" he
will then begin adding striking and kicking
maneuvers to the pole training
practice. The poles are made
from bamboo, rattan. PVC pipe,
or some other flexible material
that is buried into the ground.
The practitioner can kick or
strike the pole and the pole will
have some give to it so that it
absorbs some of the energy of
the strike and bounces back. In
this practice the practitioner will
never stop moving amongst the
poles while simultaneously
kicking, striking, and rapidly
changing directions. Some
poles are kicked, some are hit.
and others are not touched but
evaded as the student
continually moves around the
poles. In this practice, the
student learns to strike while
remaining highly mobile and
learns how to quickly change
and move after a strike has been
applied.
Adding More Poles
After the three pole practice,
the student will move to four poles in a square
pattern and then to five poles (one in the
center and one on each side). Again, the
distances between the poles are not always the
same; they are all varied. After the five pole
practice, the student will continue adding
poles, one at a time as his practice improves,

until there are nine poles, one in the center
and then eight out to each direction. This is Pa
Kua's famous "nine palace" pole training
practice.
Many of the schools of Pa Kua practice the
nine palace pole method. However, Park
believes that it is important that the practitioner
develop the pole training in gradual steps by
first starting with one pole, then two poles, then
three, etc. The training should be developed
step by step. If the practitioner cannot utilize
the proper movements when walking around
two poles, he will only become confused if more
poles are added. As each successive pole is
added the student adds a new dimension to
his practice.
There are many different "games" one can
play while working the pole training method in
order to develop different Pa Kua skills. Some
poles are kicked, some hit, some avoided and
the circular pattern is always varied.
Sometimes small circles are executed;
sometimes the circles are bigger; sometimes the
figure-eight pattern is utilized; sometimes a
spiraling pattern is employed; sometimes the
speed of the footwork is varied; sometimes the
practitioner walks smoothly and steadily to
build ch'i; the height of the stance is also varied.
All possible variations are explored.
When Park was practicing the nine pole
method with his teacher, Lu Shui-T'ien, Lu had
tied a small rope to the top of each of the
bamboo poles. As Park was circling, moving,
and navigating amongst the poles Lu would pull
on one of the ropes and one of the poles would
shake. When Park noticed a pole shake he
would immediately have to move in and attack
the pole that was shaking. There are many
such variations that can be practiced with the
nine palace pole training.
The Tee-Pee Pole Arrangement
The pole training practice in Park's system
does not end with the nine palace pole
arrangement. After the student has become
familiar with working the nine poles, he will
then remove the center pole and slant the four
side poles in towards the center, thus forming
a tee-pee shape with these poles. Utilizing this
49 
configuration the practitioner is not only
required to navigate among the poles, but a
height variable is added due to the slanting
poles. While walking, circling, and turning the
student must also adjust the body height to go
under and around the slanting poles. The angle
at which these poles are slanted can also be
varied.
Changing the Poles
After the student has gained experience
working with the nine pole arrangement and
the tee-pee pole arrangement and all of their
respective variations, he or she is ready to begin
a multitude of new nine pole variations. Park
calls each of these pole variations a "course."
In the practice of the complete method there
are eight different courses each having the nine
pole arrangement. One course, which Park calls
the "power course" has thick bamboo that is
struck with the palms, elbows, shoulders, hips,
feet, and knees as the practitioner continually
employs the footwork patterns maneuvering
around the poles. All of the movements on this
course are very expressive and powerful.
After transitioning through this course, the
student will move on to another course which
will have the standard nine pole arrangement.
Here the student practices all of the walking
and changing in a very smooth, continuous
manner to build ch'i. The character and
attitude of this course is balancing the powerful
expressions of the previous course.
Another course will have thin bamboo with
both vertical and slanting poles that are never
to be touched as the practitioner moves around
the nine poles utilizing various footwork and
palm changes. Movements such as "swallow
penetrates through the forest" are emphasized
in this course. Other pole arrangements are
placed in areas of rough terrain with various
sized stones placed randomly around the
course. Here the practitioner must navigate
the poles while walking on the stones.
In practicing each of the eight courses, the
student can experiment with all of the variations
we have discussed thus far in terms of the form
movements and walking patterns. The theme
of each course is such that after practicing all
  

eight of the courses, the student has practiced

all of the footwork patterns, palm, elbow,
shoulder, hip, knee and foot strikes, all of the
eight animal movements, all of the stepping
variations, the power training, the ch'i kung
work and all other components of the major
system. Park says that when he was practicing
the eight courses in Korea, it would take him
from three to four hours of non-stop practice
to finish all eight of the courses.

Conclusion
In the application of Pa Kua as a fighting
art the practitioner must learn how to be highly
mobile and evasive while at the same time
moving in and continuously attacking the
opponent. Evasion in Pa Kua does not mean
running away or escaping an attack. It means
avoiding the opponent's force and strength
while simultaneously counterattacking at the
most efficient angle and then continually
changing so as to maintain those efficient
attacking angles until the fight is over. The
advanced circle walking practice as described
above helps the practitioner begin to develop
this ability.

50 
  

Chapter 4
Pa Kua Chang Body Training 

51 

Chapter 4 
Pa Kua Chang   
Body Training 
In the last volume of this book, we presented a
number of body training exercises which were
designed to begin to develop the student's body in
terms of basic flexibility, balance, stability, and
coordination. These exercises are a necessary part
of Park's Pa Kua Chang system for several
reasons. The first is because the exercises begin
to help the student open up the body in the area of
the spine, hips, rib cage, and shoulders. It is
critical to health maintenance, Pa Kua Chang
application, and power development that these
areas of the body be supple, relaxed, and flexible
beyond "average" ranges of motion.
Gaining an increased degree of suppleness and
flexibility in the areas of the spine, hips, and
shoulders also aids in the balanced, smooth flow
of energy in the body. Practicing exercises which
challenge the flexibility and range of motion of
the joints while breathing naturally and smoothly
and maintaining a focus on the movement of the
palms, greatly increases the energy movement in
the body and also develops the practitioner's
awareness of this energy. By practicing exercises
such as the three fan chang exercises, and the
"scooping moon from sea bottom" exercises, in a
slow, smooth, repetitious manner with the mind,
body, and breath coordinated, the practitioner
gains great physical and mental benefits and lays
a strong foundation for future development in the
art.
Another reason why these exercises are
important in Park's system of Pa Kua is that after
these exercises are practiced as static drills, as
52 
outlined in the last volume of this book, all of
these exercises will serve as component parts of
the various single palm change maneuvers of
Park's system performed while both executing
straight line footwork maneuvers and while
walking the circle. If the student has not spent
time practicing these exercises hundreds of times
in repetitive body training drills, his or her
execution of these movements in the circle
walking forms will be stiff, uncoordinated,
unnatural, disconnected, and lacking in proper
energy flow and intention.
In this chapter, we will first present one more
important static exercise, which is a companion
to the fan chang exercises that were presented in
the last book. After this exercise, which is called
the "hiding flower under leaf" exercise, is
presented, we will combine this exercise with the
"white snake coiling its body" posture, which
was demonstrated in the last volume, with a k'ou
pu and pai pu footwork drill that was also
presented in the last volume of this book. Once
the student has experience with all of these body
training and footwork drills, he or she is ready to
start to put these components together in the
execution of the single palm change. In this
chapter we will also take a look at the single palm
change and some of its numerous variations.
Those readers who have spent time with the
body training exercises, the k'ou pu and pai pu
exercises which were presented in the last book,
and the "hiding flower under leaf" exercises which
are presented in this book, will have a very easy

time with the half dozen single palm change
variations which are presented in this chapter. In
addition to the single palm change variations
presented in this chapter in photograph form, we
will also discuss numerous other variations of the
single palm change that can be built from the
basic body training exercises. To the student who
has not spent numerous hours with the body
training exercises, all of these single palm change
variations will seem awkward and hard to learn.
For the student who has put in his or her time
with the basic prerequisite body training drills, all
of these changes will seem very natural.
After gaining a foundation with the body
training exercises and seeing how they can be
combined as component parts of the single palm
change variations, the student will then have an
arsenal of at least one dozen different single palm
change maneuvers to practice. This is how Park's
Pa Kua Chang system is built. Basic exercises are
practiced until the student develops an
understanding of the movements and energy of
the exercise, and then the movements of the
exercise are combined with circle walking, k'ou
pu and pai pu footwork, and the body
movements of other exercises, footwork drills,
elbow and palm striking combinations, and kick
sets to produce an abundance of form movements
and variations.
In my school, after the students have trained the
basic body training exercises and have been
presented one or two versions of the single palm
change and their component parts, (the "turn
around," "winding, and "unwinding" as presented
in this chapter) I give the students a homework
problem. I tell them to research the single palm
change and, based on the exercises they have
learned thus far in their training, come up with
six different variations of the single palm change.
After they have an understanding of the
principles of the single palm change, most
students can easily come up with six or more
variations which adhere to all the principles. In
having to put the pieces together on their own
and create their own expressions of the single
palm change principles, each student gains a
better understanding of Pa Kua Chang.
After the students have created their own
single palm change variations, they are then
required to come up with their own ideas about
how these
53 
movements might be applied in combat. They
first have time to think about it on their own and
then they get together with a partner to research
their ideas and see if they work in partner practice.
After they have what they think are workable
applications, they perform them for the class and
everyone critiques their application looking for
adherence to Pa Kua Chang principles. Was the
distance and angle optimal? Could the timing
have been better? Was the power expression
applied at the right angle and at the right time and
from the right body alignment relative to the
opponent? We examine all of these principles as
a group and the student then learns how he or she
can improve the application.
In going through the learning process
described above, the students begin to learn how
to apply the principles they have been taught. If a
student creates his or her own expression of the
art and can invent workable applications without
being spoon fed answers by the teacher to "what
would you do if" or "how is this applied" type of
questions, the student will be able to continue to
grow in the art even when the teacher is not
around.
People always ask me if Park has "a Pa Kua
Chang form" that he teaches. When I respond
that Park really has an unlimited number of forms,
the person asking the question becomes confused.
Hopefully our presentation of the single palm
change variations in this chapter will clear up
some of that confusion. Park's Pa Kua Chang is
designed from fundamental exercises which act
as interchangeable building blocks in the
execution of numerous "forms."
Park wants his students to get away from the
mind set that there is just one Pa Kua form and start
to think about how the principles of Pa Kua can be
applied to an endless number of movement
sequences and variations. Park would much rather
the student invent his or her own form, which is
built from component parts of his Pa Kua system
and expresses the principles of Pa Kua Chang, than
have to teach a given set of form movements to a
student and call that "the" form. Instead of a student
asking Park if he or she could learn a new Pa Kua
Chang form, Park would much rather have
the student say, "I've invented this Pa Kua
form based on what you have taught me, could
you take a look and see if it adheres to all of the

principles?" This student is now learning the art
of Pa Kua Chang.
There is a famous saying in China which both
Park and his teacher have used frequently. It says
that "if the teacher says 'one,' the low level
student will repeat 'one,' the intermediate student
will figure out 'two,' but the advanced student
will know how to count to ten." Park is very
happy if he can give a student one component
part of the system and the student can take that
part and figure out numerous useful ways to
employ that part without having to be told. If the
student never understands how to research and
discover things on his or her own, Park's
comment about that student is, " Every time, I say
'one,' he says 'one.' He can never figure out 'two.'"
In Park's mind, Pa Kua Chang is based on
principles of movement, not "forms." Once the
practitioner understands the principles and has
experienced a sets of basic movements which are
based on those principles, the number of forms
one can invent on the spot are endless. Asking a
Pa Kua Chang practitioner in Park's school to
"show you their Pa Kua form" would be like
asking a jazz band to "play you their one song."
The jazz musicians feel their music and can jam
on an endless number of "songs." Park wants his
Pa Kua students to be able to do the same with
their Pa Kua. Park wants his students to
understand the art of Pa Kua Chang, not the
choreography of Pa Kua Chang.
Park does teach several different ch'i kung and
combat circle walking forms to beginning and
intermediate level students. There are forms
which are based on the "eight animal" postures;
there are forms based entirely on the single palm
change; there are forms which combine the single
and double palms changes; there are forms which
combine all eight of the "forty eight" month
palms; there is a circle walking form which
focuses on elbow work; there are forms which
add the elbow sets in combination with other
things. There are many forms. However, Park will
usually only teach each student four or five of
these forms. This is just to give them an idea of
how Pa Kua Chang components might be put
together. All of the forms that he teaches are built
from component parts of exercises and drills the
student has already practiced. Later, Park wants all
54 
his students to be able to express Pa Kua Chang
in a free style manner and improvise the "forms"
based on all of the component parts of circle
walking, body training, elbow training, kick
training, and palm training that they have been
taught. This free style practice is mostly executed
during the "pole training" phase of development,
which is discussed briefly in the circle walking
chapter of this book.
Park's approach to teaching Pa Kua Chang is
different than most because he demands that the
students understand the principles of Pa Kua and
create their own expression of those principles.
When a student asks Park about an application to
a movement, Park is most likely to say, "You
think about it and show me." He wants his
students to think, not just mimic. He wants the
student to understand what he or she is doing, not
just copy and repeat. Park's adage is that "The
teacher is only a guide, you have to teach
yourself through hard practice and research if you
really want to learn." Park believes that if the
student always relies on the teacher, he will
always be practicing the teacher's art. If the
student creates his own expressions of the
principles the teacher has taught him, then the art
is his own to keep and he will always progress. It
is much more difficult to learn this way. However,
in the long run the students come out way ahead
because they learn to think for themselves and
they learn how to be creative.
Of course, Park is not nearly as severe as his own
teacher was in his approach to teaching this method.
When Park would ask his teacher a question which
his teacher thought Park should be able to figure out
for himself, his teacher would strike him with his
cane and say, "What do you have in your head?
Only water! Shake your head back and forth, let me
listen to the water in your head." Park would shake
his head and his teacher would say, "Doesn't sound
like water. I think it is rock. You have nothing but
rock in your head!" Park would get the unsubtle hint
and go back to the practice area to try to figure out
the answer to his question on his own. Later, Park
would show his teacher what he was able to figure
out. If he had not quite got it correct, his teacher
would say that he still had rocks in his head and
Park would go back to the drawing board. If Park was
able to figure out a viable solution, his teacher would

nod.
During the seventeen years Park studied with Lu
Shui-T'ien, Lu challenged Park with many
"homework" problems. These problems mostly
consisted of different fighting scenarios or
combat applications in which Park would be
required to come up with the most effective and
efficient solution. Park said that sometimes it
would take him months to figure out the best
solution to the problems he was given.
Sometimes he practiced all day thinking about
the problem and then he would stay awake all
night with the problem still in his head. He would
come up with many solutions he thought would
be adequate. However, most times the response
he received from his teacher was, "You need to
think about it some more."
On one occasion Park was required to figure out
an efficient and effective application to a palm
strike similar to the "sliding the window shutter
to look at the moon." Park had figured out what
he thought to be an efficient entry, bridge, and
application of the move. The final execution of the
technique was a palm strike to the opponent's ear.
Park knew that with a properly executed palm
strike to the opponent's ear, it was easy to pop the
opponent's ear drum and the effect was quite
damaging. Every time Park showed the application
to his teacher, Lu would say, "You are missing
something. You go think about it some more.”
Hiding the Flower Under the Leaf Exercises   
The "hiding flower under leaf" exercise is
performed in the same manner as the three fan
chang exercises which were presented in the last
volume of this book. In fact, it is usually practiced
as a forth exercise in the fan chang series. The
student practicing this series will transition directly
from the t'ien fan chang exercise to the "hiding
flower under leaf" exercises.
If you recall from the body training chapter of the
last volume, we said that the straight fan chang
exercise primarily worked to stretch the low back,
the circle fan chang exercise worked the mid-back,
and the t'ien fan chang exercise worked the upper
55 
What Park finally figured out was that after he
applied the palm strike to the ear, his teacher
wanted him to grab the ear and rip it off. If the ear
is grabbed and pulled at the correct angle, it does
not take a lot of force to rip the ear. At first Park
was thinking that popping the ear drum was a
technique that would "finish" the opponent. His
teacher thought he ended the attack too early. Lu's
way of thinking about Pa Kua applications was
that the practitioner should inflict the most amount
of damage in the shortest amount of time. If you
strike someone in the ear, your hand is already
there, so you should continue by ripping the ear.
You never assume that any given technique will
devastate the opponent. In Pa Kua you always
continue until you have inflicted the most damage
possible in the shortest amount of time. To Lu,
stopping at popping the ear drum was a waste of a
good ear ripping technique.
Of course, in this day and age, there are always
moral restraints that one should put on oneself.
You would not want to maim someone if you did
not absolutely have to. Lu Shui-T'ien used his art
as a guerrilla fighter in war time and so he did not
have such restraints. In today's world you need to
think before you act. However, in some cases, this
kind of vicious action might be required and so in
researching the art, you never leave out
possibilities.
back and neck. The "hiding flower under leaf"
exercise is a nice follow-up to these exercises because
it works the twisting action of the entire spine from the
bottom of the spine all the way up to the neck.
Because of the arm positioning, this exercise also
provides a very good stretch across the upper back
and mid back regions and the outer shoulder.
The exercise is executed as follows:
1) The feet and knees are held together as in the
fan chang exercises. The knees do not press
together, they are just held together in a natural
manner. The right hand is held out in front of
the face and the left hand is held under the right
  

                  1                                  2                                      3                                      4 
 

 
                5                            6‐front view                        6‐rear view 
 
                                                Hiding Flower Under Leaf Exercise 
 

 
                    A                                    B                                  C 
To change from Tʹien Fan Chang, add these three postures in front of Photo 1 above 

56 

elbow. The hand position is the standard "dragon
posture" arm position that was explained in the
last volume of this book. See photo 1.
2) Begin to turn the lower palm to face
upward and the upper palm to face downward as
you twist your body to the right. The eyes follow
the lower palm. As in the fan chang exercises,
you will exhale when you are turning to the rear
and inhale as you are changing sides across the
front. See photo 2.
3) Continue turning as far as you can to the
right. Look over the right shoulder at the palm of
the left hand. The left palm extends out from the
armpit toward the rear as far as possible. The
right palm remains about shoulder height and
slightly out away from the body. Relax the right
shoulder. See photo 3 and the rear view of photo
6.
4) Execute a fan chang maneuver as in the
straight fan chang exercise .Both palms turn to
face upwards as the body begins to twist back to
the front. See photo 4.
5) As the left hand begins to come around to
face the original forward direction, it begins to
turn to face downward and the right palm begins
to insert under the left elbow as the body begins
to twist to the left. See photo 5.
6) Twist the body as far as possible to the left
with the eyes following the right palm as it
extends to the rear. You are now executing the
exercise on the opposite side to complete the first
full repetition. See photo 6 (front and rear).
You are now ready to turn the body back to the
right and execute the next repetition of this
exercise.
The sequence described above is the exercise
performed as a set by itself. If you would like to
tack this exercise on to the end of the t'ien fan
chang exercise and thus perform this exercise in
series with the three fan chang exercises, the
photos at the bottom of the previous page indicate
how this is done. From the last t'ien fan chang
movement (see photo A), execute a straight fan
chang back to the front (see photo B), and you
will now be in a position similar to that of photo
1 (see photo C). From here begin to execute the
"hiding flower under leaf" exercise as described
above.
57 
The Moving "Hiding Flower
Under Leaf" Exercise
After you have gained some experience with the
static "hiding flower under leaf" exercise as
described above, you are now ready to combine
this exercise with the k'ou pu and pai pu footwork,
the "white snake coils its body" k'ou pu posture,
and the "giraffe" pai pu posture which were
presented in the first volume of this book. The k
'ou pu and pai pu footwork you will execute in this
exercise was presented on page 104 of the first
volume and was called the "intermediate k'ou pu
and pai pu stepping pattern."
Execution of this exercise serves several purposes.
First is upper and lower body coordination. In
executing the turning and twisting motions of the
body in conjunction with the k'ou pu and pai pu
footwork, the practitioner will gain experience in
coordinating the upper and lower parts of the body
in the execution of complex motions.
The second purpose of this exercise is an increased
flexibility. As discussed previously, the "hiding
flower under leaf" motion is ideal for stretching
the spine, hips, and shoulders. When this twisting
of the upper body is combined with the k'ou pu
and pai pu footwork, all the joints of the body are
twisted through a full range of rotational motion.
This flexibility helps to build the foundation for
the turning and rotating power which is associated
with Pa Kua Chang application. The third purpose
of this exercise is to train the student to develop a
strong sense of balance and stability around the
center of the body. In Pa Kua Chang, if the student
cannot twist and turn rapidly around his or her
body's central axis, he or she will be off balance in
executing many of Pa Kua Chang's characteristic
applications. As the student becomes familiar with
the exercise and begins to execute it faster and
more fluidly, he or she will begin to develop a
keen sense of the central axis of the body and how
the hips, shoulders, and limbs can be rotated
around that center in the application of power
moves.
Finally, this exercise prepares the student for
learning the single palm change movement
which is the fundamental building block of all Pa
Kua Chang circle walking combat forms. As we
have
  

stated previously in the first volume of this under leaf" posture (hereafter referred to as
book, it is always good for the student to the "hiding flower" posture). The left foot
practice exercises which challenge the body in steps around into k'ou pu.
terms of coordination, balance, flexibility, and The body continues to wind as far as possible
stability in an overemphasized nature before as in the previous "hiding flower" exercise.
they learn the more subtle movements of the Although the k'ou pu is facing outside the
art. If they can execute the overemphasized circle, the body turns such the Park's upper
movements, they will certainly have no body faces the center of the circle. See photos
trouble, in terms of flexibility, balance, and 4 through 6.
coordination, with the movements which 4) From the "hiding flower" posture, Park
follow. After executing hundreds of begins to unwind his body and transition into
repetitions of the fan chang exercises, the k'ou the giraffe posture as his left foot executes a
pu and pai pu footwork drills, basic circle 135 degree pai pu step. See photos 8 through
walking, and the "hiding flower under leaf" 10.
exercises, the student will have no problem 5) From the giraffe posture, Park keeps the
executing a smooth, fluid, balanced, and left foot stationery and steps into a k'ou pu
powerful single palm change. We find that with the right foot. At the same time he
students who try to execute the single palm transitions into the "white snake" posture with
change without a background in these other his body facing the center of the circle. The
drills, struggle with the practice, looking very eyes follow the upper hand in this posture. See
awkward and uncoordinated. photos 11 through 14. From here he continues
The next exercise, which we will call "the stepping in this manner continuing around the
moving hiding flower under leaf" exercise, is circle.
executed as follows:
The opening to this exercise is exactly like the
opening for the single palm change exercise
which was presented on page 91 of the first
volume of this book. Instead of turning to
walk the circle after photo 12, the practitioner
will pai pu and step into the giraffe posture.
From that point, the practitioner steps into the
"white snake coils its body" posture (here after
referred to as the "white snake" posture) as
shown in photo 1 on the next page.
1) Park starts in the "white snake" posture.
See photo 1. His feet are in the k'ou pu
position as shown in the footwork illustration
on page 104 of the last volume of this book.
From here his footwork pattern during the
remainder of this exercise will follow that of
the illustration shown on page 104 and the
explanation on page 103 of the previous
volume.
2) Park begins to take a pronounced pai pu
step (approximately 135 degrees). At the same
time he unwinds from the "white snake"
posture and transitions to the giraffe posture.
See photos 2 and 3 on the next page.
3) With the right foot remaining in place,
Park begins to wind into the "hiding flower
58 
  

 
                        1                                                2                                                3 
 

 
      4                                                5                                                  6 
 

 
      7                                                8                                                  9 

The Moving Hiding Flower Under Leaf Exercise 
 

59 
  

 
                        10                                            11                                              12 
 

 
                                13                                            14 
 
 

The Moving Hiding Flower Under Leaf Exercise (con’t) 
 

60 

The Single Palm Change   
Every complete Pa Kua Chang method
embraces a systematic approach to practice. The
practitioner who engages in the repetitive practice
of fundamental skills for hundreds of hours
before attempting more complex, intricate, or
subtle skills, will always find that the solid
foundation enables continued growth and
development in the art. At the root of almost
every Pa Kua system there are several key
elements of training which should be thoroughly
practiced and experientially understood prior to
progressing to more advanced training. These
components are: circle walking, some variation
of the eight "mother" palms (Park's "eight
animal" palms), the single palm change, and the
double palm change. These could be considered
the "four pillars of Pa Kua Chang."
The Four Pillars of Pa Kua Training
Thus far in these two volumes most of the
exercises and drills that have been presented in
the footwork and body training chapters have
been building blocks which lead the student to
the execution of the single palm change, one of
the four main components of every Pa Kua
Chang system. Below we will briefly describe the
"four pillars" of Pa Kua Chang.
Circle Walking: Circle walking provides
numerous physical and mental benefits for the
practitioner in terms of health, longevity, body
strength, stamina, coordination, balance, ch'i
cultivation, calming of the mind, mental
concentration, mobility in combat, body/mind
unity, and acquiring the skill of "stillness in
motion." The basic circle walk practice of Pa Kua
was presented in the first volume of this book and
was then covered in more detail in Chapter 3 of
this volume and so we will not discuss it further
here. Each system of Pa Kua will have its own
requirements for basic circle walk practice and,
like anything in Pa Kua, there exist a multitude of
variations on the theme.
The Mother Palms: The eight animal palms, also
61 
called the "mother palms" the "nei kung" palms
or the "ch'i kung" palms, are the foundational
static upper body postures which are held while
the practitioner is practicing the circle walk.
These postures are designed to train certain
structural alignments while the practitioner is
walking the circle. The upper body is held static
while the lower body is continuously moving. In
the practice of holding these eight palms the
practitioner trains structural strengths, internal
body connections, internal/external body
integration and harmony, development and
awareness of muscle groups not usually under
conscious control, tendon strength and
conditioning, and joint opening and suppleness in
each of the eight postures that are held. Again,
the exact postures will vary from one Pa Kua
system to the next. Each system of Pa Kua will
have its own version of these palms. Park's
expression of these palms was covered in the
previous volume of this book.
In Park's system of Pa Kua, after the student has
gained a basic foundation in the practice of the
eight animal circle walking as presented in the
last volume, he or she will gradually execute
more advanced change of direction maneuvers
when switching form one animal to the next.
Later this practice will be combined with the pole
training which is described in the circle walk
chapter of this volume. In this training, the
practitioner will first learn how to execute the yin/
yang circle walking around one central pole
while changing from one animal to the next in the
same sequence presented in the first volume of
this book. That is, they will change from lion, to
unicorn, to snake, to swallow, to dragon flying, to
bear, to phoenix, to monkey. Later they will learn
how to change from one animal to all of the
others while executing the yin/yang circle
walking around one pole. After the student has
learned these 64 combinations of changes, he or
she will then expand the practice to two poles,
three poles, four poles, etc.
In learning how to change from any animal

posture to another in a smooth and fluid manner,
the student is ingraining a multitude of possible
Pa Kua applications. Most of the applications
which come directly from the eight animal
movements are either bridges which are used to
open up the opponent, chin na locking techniques,
or throwing techniques. However, there are also
striking techniques which combine the eight
animal movements with the mechanics and
power of the forty eight month palms.
The Single Palm Change: The purpose of
training the single palm change is primarily to
learn how to change power, strength, energy,
awareness and mental focus from one side of the
body to the other while remaining centered,
stable, and balanced. In fighting, the basic single
palm change is primarily used to change direction
quickly, accurately, and appropriately in response
to an opponent's movement. The single change
can be used to change from any posture to
another, or from any situation to another.
There are literally hundreds of ways to execute
the single palm change. Its execution in practice
aids the practitioner in learning how to change
strength, power, and awareness from one side of
the body to the other, develops central
equilibrium, coordinates the upper and lower
body, trains whole body "twisting power," and
teaches execution of coordinated rotational
motion for use in both offensive and defensive
action. Additionally, it develops the ability to
maintain consistent mental focus when shifting
the awareness from left to right or vice-versa. In
Park's system the single palm change is present in
a multitude of variations by combining its basic
components with the movements of the eight
animals, the forty eight month palms, the elbow
sets, and the speed combinations. All of the
aspects of the single palm change will be
discussed in detail in this chapter.
The Double Palm Change: The double palm
change movements will develop many of the
same components as the single change, but it
serves to add a bit more complexity to the
changing of direction and it involves a division of
body power, strength, awareness, and mental
focus to both sides of the body at once. In most
systems of Pa Kua, the double palm change
movement sequence is a bit more complex than
62 
the single palm change. The added complexity
helps the practitioner take the lessons learned from
the practice of the single change and carry them a
step farther. Additionally, whereas the single palm
change taught the practitioner to change the body
energy, power, and focus from one side to the
other, the double palm change teaches the
practitioner how to divide the strength and power
to both sides at the same time. The mechanics of
developing power, energy, and awareness in a
balanced manner to both sides of the body at the
same time also takes the training to a new level.
The practitioner begins to learn the principle of
extending power to have it arrive at the four tips
simultaneously. This is a important concept in
developing internal power. The classic writings of
both Hsing-I and Pa Kua advise the student to
learn how to extend power to the four tips (hands
and feet) simultaneously in order to develop whole
body, coordinated strength.
In most systems of Pa Kua Chang the single palm
change and the double palm change are practiced
separately from the other form sequences. In other
words, they are not a part of any one of the
system's eight sectional forms, but form the
foundation for those forms and are practiced
separately before the other form sequences are
learned. In fact, many systems of Pa Kua have
developmental eight section forms which are
made up entirely of variations of the single and/or
double palm change movements. The first few
combat forms students in Park's system will learn
are made up entirely of single and double palm
change variations.
In other Pa Kua systems the single palm change
and the double palm change will be the first two
sections of their first eight section circle walking
form. In all systems of Pa Kua Chang the single
palm change and the double palm change
(although they may be called different names) are
the basic building blocks upon which all other Pa
Kua movements are placed.
If the Pa Kua Chang student spends a
considerable amount of time studying Pa Kua's
circle walk practice, eight mother palms, single
palm change, and double palm change and gains
a solid experiential understanding of these
movements and their underlying principles, he or
she will have developed a very solid foundation

in Pa Kua and will be able to easily assimilate all
aspects of Pa Kua training.
Before we begin to present some of the
variations of the single palm change which are
practiced in Park Bok Nam's system of Pa Kua
Chang, we will first discuss some ideas about
how all Pa Kua Chang movements and
techniques might be approached.
The Study of Pa Kua Chang
Movement
As we have pointed out previously in this book,
Pa Kua Chang is an art of principle. It is not an
art of choreography, it is not an art of technique,
it is not an art of "form." This does not mean it
does not have choreographed sequences,
techniques, or forms. This means that all of these
things are rooted in theory and principle and thus
there is an almost unlimited potential for
variation in technique or form as long as the
technique or form adheres to the underlying
principles or energies of the movement being
studied. Therefore, in examining, researching, or
training the moves of Pa Kua Chang, one should
try to capture the principles of body motion, the
internal harmony associated with the motion, and
the energy movement inherent in the motion, not
simply memorize a sequence of physical motions.
While components of body alignment and
mechanics are always important concepts to
grasp in any motion, the underlying principles
become far more important once the body
alignments, connections and mechanics are
understood.
In the study of any Pa Kua Chang motion, some
of the components the practitioner wants to try to
grasp are: the rudiments of the physical
movement, the energy or principles conveyed in
the movement, and the adaptations or variations
of those principles, this allows for an unlimited
expression of the art form.
Physical Movement: In the study of the
physical movement, the student will be first
interested in simply learning the "form" of the
movement. This study would include
components such as the proper sequence of
63 
movement; the body alignments associated with
all of the sequences, gestures, and posturing of
the movements; the mechanics of the motion
which will provide efficient execution, natural
strength, and subtle power; the internal and
external body connections, the structure, and
harmony of the movements; the timing of the
movements and the rhythm of the movement
sequence; the energetic flow, smoothness in
transitions and fluidity of the movements; the
mental intention and focus of each movement
and the overall sequence; the harmonious use of
breath in the movements; and examples of
possible combat applications of the movements.
Principles of Movement: After the study and
practice of the physical movement or sequence of
movements has been thoroughly researched as
outlined above, the practitioner should then turn
his or her attention to a study of the overall
principles associated with the sequence. One
should ask, "What is this sequence of movements
trying to teach me in terms of body mechanics,
power generation, and martial application?"
Taking the single palm change as an example,
after the student has spent time practicing the
proper execution of the sequence, he or she
should step back and say, "What am I really
doing here?" Brainstorm and make a mental list:
"I'm changing direction, I'm changing my power,
strength and awareness from one side of my body
to the other, I'm exchanging my lead and rear
hands, I'm developing rotational power around
my body's center, I'm developing the ability to
maintain constant strength, power, awareness and
concentration while changing direction, the
rotational movement of my body around its
center extends into a rotational movement of my
arms around their center axis and circular paths
of movement of the hands, etc."
After thinking about what the specific
movements are and how the power is being
developed and how the balance and stability is
being maintained, the student can then start to
think about how these movements might be
applied in a fighting situation. He or she thinks
about the relationships of these movements and
the movements of an opponent. Ask yourself,
"How can I execute these movements in a martial

environment?" "Where is the power being
expressed and to what part of the opponent's
body could it be optimally expressed?" "What is
the timing of this expression of power in relation
to the movements of my opponent?" "How can I
position myself to execute these movements and
maintain stability and balance while at the same
time disrupting my opponent's stability and
balance?" "How can I execute this motion
without meeting my opponent with resistance or
struggle?"
In asking these questions about movement
principles and efficient martial applications, and
researching the answers to them, the student not
only learns more about his or her art, he or she
will know where to focus the mental intention
when practicing the motions. In all Pa Kua
Chang practice, the movement and energy
follows the intention. If the student does not
know what the particular movement sequence is
training and/or how it is applied, they will not
know where to focus the intention. Researching
each movement, the practitioner gains the
awareness and mental focus necessary to unify
the mind and body in the execution of Pa Kua
Chang.
By learning how to look at the overall principles,
patterns, and energy flow associated with
movement sequences, the student will be able to
develop the ability to vary and change the
movements, but continue to maintain the
principles and patterns associated with those
movements and sequences.
Variation and Change: Variation and change
are the most important concepts a student can
grasp in the study of Pa Kua Chang. Learning
how to take fundamental principles of body
motion and adapt them to any given situation is
what the art of Pa Kua Chang is all about. Once
the student has learned a movement sequence
such as the single palm change and becomes
aware of its inherent principles, he or she can
then begin to vary the motion. Instead of turning
inside the circle, execute an outside change (as
shown by Park on page 80); instead of
maintaining a high posture during the execution,
scoop down low when executing the change (as
shown by Park on page 77); instead of executing
64 
big movements, tighten everything up and make
the motions small, quick, and subtle, etc.
The student may also think about how the move
may be changed to fit various combat scenarios
and self-defense situations, but still maintain the
same underlying principles. This variation does
not only apply to combat or a response to the
movements of an opponent, it also applies to the
practice environment and terrain, the individual's
physical condition, age, body size, personality
characteristics, physical abilities, physical and
mental aptitudes, and specific training focus.
As we discussed when we examined the circle
walk practice, the circle walk practice can be
varied many different ways depending on what
aspect of training the practitioner wants to
practice. The student can adjust the training for
purposes of upper body strength and connection,
for leg strength training, for endurance, for
cardiovascular training, for meditation training,
for ch'i kung training, for training agility,
mobility, and evasiveness, etc. Additionally, the
student should learn how to vary the stepping
techniques of the circle walk dependent on the
combat application of particular moves. The
smart student will also learn how to vary the
steps depending on the terrain. What is the best
way to step when on a flat surface?, a rocky
terrain?, sandy terrain?, slippery surfaces?, etc. In
each different environment the execution of the
movements may change in order to best suit that
environment. Every aspect of Pa Kua training
should be studied in accordance with a
consideration for all possible variables.
The idea in practicing Pa Kua Chang is not to
learn a choreographed form sequence, but to
capture the principles and essentials of Pa Kua
Chang and then apply them to physical motion in
the martial art and/or health maintenance context.
Each individual should have a unique flavor to his
or her Pa Kua based on their individual strengths
and weaknesses as determined by their instructor.
Therefore, there are almost as many interpretations
of Pa Kua form as there are instructors of Pa Kua.
However, the underlying principles are always the
same. Practitioners who grasp the principles of the
practice can easily learn how to modify the
practice to suit different situations, environments,

and personal training agendas. As Sun Lu Tang
said in his book Pa Kua Ch'uan Hsueh, "There is
a central idea. Merely practicing is not
understanding. Seek to understand the human
ability. Study diligently for deep ideas. The result
after a long time is that one is able to know."
Those who do not learn how to research the
principles and vary the motions according to
circumstance will always be simply following
choreographed form routines without any real
understanding of what Pa Kua Chang is about.
They will always need an instructor to tell them
how to think, how to practice, and how to apply
the art. Their art will never belong to them and
they will always be on the fringe of
understanding. A Pa Kua stylist is a master of
varying and changing appropriately to fit any
circumstance, not someone who is good at
mimicking choreography or mindlessly repeating
standardized competition routines.
The Definition of Single Palm Change
By definition, "Single Palm Change" simply
means that in executing a maneuver, the palm
that was originally the active palm, or yang palm,
changes and becomes the inactive or yin palm.
Additionally, in executing the palm change, the
practitioner will change the direction of forward
motion (at times this change may be very slight).
With the change of the yang palm also comes a
shift in the practitioner's energy, power, focus,
awareness, and intention from one side of the
body to the other, from one palm to the other,
and/or from one direction to another.
The variations on the single palm change
theme are endless. The change can be simple,
complex, high, low, inside, outside, left, right,
fast, slow, big, or small. The change can occur
from any given posture or position to any
other given posture or position. Each complete
school of Pa Kua will have many various
ways of executing the single palm change and
the execution of the single palm change will
also vary from school to school. Practitioners
who believe that there is only "one way" to
execute the single palm change are severely
limiting their practice and their understanding
of Pa Kua Chang.
65 
Although there are a large variety of single
palm change movements (many of which will be
discussed later in this chapter), there are some
consistencies in the execution of this maneuver
which serve to define it. In examining a variety of
single palm change motions we can recognize four
main characteristics which appear to be common
among all varieties of the single palm change
movement. They are as follows: the yang palm
changes to become the yin palm and vice-versa,
the practitioner's path of motion changes direction,
the general mechanics and power of the motion
involve a rotational movement around the center
line of the practitioner's body (this includes center
line of the torso, center line of the arms, and center
line of the legs), and the k'ou pu and pai pu foot
maneuvers are employed in some manner. These
characteristics define the single palm change and
give the practitioner a basis for variation of this
method.
Similarly, in seeking to define the "Double Palm
Change" movement we notice that in the
execution of this maneuver the palms are changed
and then both palms are applied in unison. They
could both be applied in the forward direction, in
the downward direction, one up and one down,
one back and the other forward, both to the
backward direction, etc. As long as the body's
energy and movement is split between right and
left simultaneously and equally in the execution of
a maneuver, this maneuver can be called "double
palm change."
Practitioners and instructors who understand
that Pa Kua Chang is an art of principle and not
one of choreographed form routines will be able to
execute dozens of variations of the single and
double palm changes because their idea of the
single or double palm changes is that which is
defined by principle, not form.
On one occasion I attended a seminar given by
Park Bok Nam in Maryland. One of the seminar
participants asked if Park could execute "his
style's version of the single palm change." Park
was confused because to him the single palm
change is a principle, not a sequence of
choreography. Park's reply was that there were
many ways to practice the single palm change.
He was very hesitant to go out and demonstrate
any given one of them because he did not want

the seminar participants to think that the single
palm change was this one sequence of moves.
Park said, "This single palm change, this is a
principle, not a form."
The "Form" of Single Palm Change
In defining the general motions of the single palm
change in the last section, we gave an idea about
how this move might be executed. In this section
we will discuss numerous examples of how the
single palm change sequence might be executed
in an attempt to give the reader an idea of the
variety which is present in the execution of this
maneuver. Most of these examples will stem
from the exercises which were presented in the
"Pa Kua Chang Body Training" chapter of the
first volume and from the "hiding flower under
leaf" exercises shown in the beginning of this
chapter.
A very simple single palm change movement
is demonstrated below by Park Bok Nam. This
single palm change was also shown as the
simple change of direction in the circle
walking chapter of the last volume of this
book. As you can see from the photographs,
all of the single palm change characteristics
are present. The palms change, the body
rotates around its central axis, the direction
of forward motion changes, and the k'ou pu
and pai pu footwork methods are employed.
This execution of the single palm change is
very simple and direct and is used as a
basic method of changing directions in the
A Simple Execution of the Single Palm Change
66 
beginning level circle walk practice in Park Bok
Nam's school.
Park believes that the beginning student should
practice a very simple change of direction like
this one before more complex single palm change
maneuvers are practiced. Park's entire training
method is based on first learning and becoming
proficient at simple methods before moving onto
more complex sequences. As a practitioner
develops in Park's system, the single palm change
maneuvers move gradually from the simple
method shown below to much more complex
methods which challenge the students flexibility,
agility, maneuverability, balance and
coordination.
Simple changes such as the one shown below are
somewhat characteristic of the Yin Fu styles of
Pa Kua as Yin Fu style fighting tactics tend to be
quick and very direct. Of course this does not
mean that all of their variations of the single palm
change were simple, many of the training sets
have more complex variations. However, Yin
style tends to be very direct in applications and
thus the simple changes were preferred.
The next execution of the single palm change
which we will discuss is demonstrated by Park
on the page 68. As a reference, we will present
this as a "standard" change with which the others
will be compared. Following the discussion on
this next change, we will present six other single
palm change variations in photograph sequences
and talk about many others.
 

The Movements of the "Standard"
Single Palm Change
Although we are referring to this single palm
change as the "standard" it is not any more
important than any of the others. We are simply
allowing this to be our reference sequences
because all of the component parts of the single
palm change are clearly recognizable in this
expression of the single palm change movement.
The execution of this single palm change is as
follows:
1) In the photos shown on the next page, photo
1 shows Park walking the circle in the clockwise
direction. When the practitioner is ready to
change directions on the circle, the single palm
change is executed.
2) In our example, this maneuver begins in
photo 2 with the execution of a k'ou (hooking)
step. In this photo Park's foot is still in transition
to this step. As this step is taken, the body
begins to rotate around its center line. The lead
arm begins to come across the front of the body
while maintaining a rounded shape. As Park steps
into the complete k'ou pu (see photo 3), the lower
arm comes up under the upper arm. There can
be many possible variations in the arm
movements associated with this first k'ou step.
In photo 3, Park is using what he calls the
"panther" posture. In this posture, the lower arm
crosses the upper arm, however, the upper arm
extends out farther. A slight variation of the
"panther" posture is the shih tzu ( ), or
"character ten" posture. In this posture the lower
arm is held up higher and crossed equally with
the upper arm. In other words, the arms form
an "X" in front of the body. It is called the
"character ten" posture because the Chinese
character ten looks like a cross. A third
variation of the arm position held during this
phase of the change is the "white snake coils its
body" posture shown on page 74.
3) From this position, the practitioner continues
to turn the body smoothly around its center line
and executes the pai (swinging) step as shown in
photograph number 4. As the swinging step is
executed, Park turns the lead palm over (thumb
67 
pointing outward) and swings the arm outward
with the step. He executes this maneuver with the
"giraffe" movement which was discussed in the
first volume of this book and was practiced in the
"moving hiding flower under leaf" exercise.
When discussing variations of the single palm
change later in this chapter we will refer to this
segment of the single palm change (as depicted in
photos 2 through 4) as "the turn around."
The arm movements which can be executed
during the "turn around" phase of the single palm
change are numerous. For instance, other
common movements to execute with the arms in
during this phase of the single palm change are
the "sliding the window shutter to gaze at the
moon" movement which is described in the
"forty eight month" palms section of the palm
training chapter or the "embracing the moon at
chest" move that is discussed in the supplemental
palm training section of the palm training chapter.
Other variations are discussed later in this
chapter.
4) Next the practitioner will begin to step up
into a k'ou step with the right leg as depicted in
photo 5. The body continues to turn around its
center as the lower hand comes underneath the
upper elbow as in the "hiding flower under leaf"
exercise shown earlier in this chapter. The upper
hand is held at about shoulder height with the
palm facing down and the lower hand is held
under the upper elbow with the palm facing up.
When discussing variations of the single palm
change later in this chapter we will refer to this
segment of the single palm change (as depicted in
photo 5) as the "winding."
5) Next the practitioner begins to unwind the
body, change the palms, and execute a pai step
(as shown in photos 6 through 9). The upper
palm turns to face upward and leads the motion
as the body begins to turn. Then the bottom palm
moves up along the upper arm (palm up) and
both arms lift upward as the body turns. As the
body begins to reach the full extent of its turn,
both palms begin to rotate and then the arms fall
down into the original circle walking posture on
the other side. When discussing variations of the
single palm change later in this chapter we will
refer to this segment of the single palm change
  

 
                1                                    2                                    3                                      4 
 

 
                5                                    6                                      7                                  8   
 

 
                                                        9                                                   

The "Standard" Single Palm Change 

 

68 

(as depicted in photos 6 through 9) as "the
unwinding."
When performing the "unwinding" segment of
the single palm change, there are also numerous
variations one might use. One which is used
frequently in Park's system is to execute a t'ien
fan chang maneuver here instead of the circle fan
chang which is depicted in the photos.
The Principles
In this section we will briefly describe some of
the principles that are being trained during the
execution of the "standard" version of the single
palm change in its three phases: the "turn
around," the "winding," and the "unwinding." We
will then address several of the possible single
palm change variations which are based on those
principles.
The Turn Around: The turn around, and its
associated footwork, is perhaps the most
important aspect of the single palm change in
terms of training for fighting mobility. The
practitioner who is interested in training Pa Kua
as a fighting art should learn to execute this turn
around movement (the k'ou step) swiftly and
fluidly while maintaining stability and balance.
The first k'ou step, and the associated
coordination of the upper body motion rotating
around the body's center axis with this step, are
the key principles in this maneuver. The key
element in this move is the swift, fluid, efficient
change of direction while maintaining stability
and a continuous, connected strength. If there is a
break in the fluidity of motion or the whole body
connection and strength, the movement will be
awkward, clumsy and inefficient.
As one variation, the simple change of
direction and change of palms can be executed
directly after the k'ou step. If you look at photo 3,
you can see that Park is in a good position to
execute a direct change of palms and change of
direction if he were to take a straight step with
his left leg cutting through the center of the
circle while executing a piercing palm maneuver
to change palms (the piercing palm is discussed
in Chapter 5). This technique, which would be
69 
similar to the change demonstrated by Park on
page 66, is a very useful move when evading an
opponent's attack and maneuvering to outflank
him.
The pai step and turning of the upper arm which
is executed in photo 4 develops the practitioner's
ability to coordinate the upper and lower body and
develop a horizontal power which is manifest from
the rotation of the body. In this motion, the upper
and lower body should move in a unified manner
rotating around the practitioner's center. The
hip/shoulder, elbow/ knee, and hand/foot
alignments (referred to in the classics as the "three
external harmonies") should always be maintained.
Additionally, this movement trains the practitioner's
ability to generate power from the body out to the
hand utilizing the alignment of the body and the
power of the rotational movement. This being the
case, the importance of coordinating the timing,
alignment, and unity of the upper and lower body in
this motion cannot be overemphasized.
This first "turn around" motion, as depicted in
the "standard" change, is usually used as a
deflection of an opponent's attack. However, as we
have stated previously, in application the
movements are far more compact. As the
opponent punches, the overturning of the palm is
used to deflect and "stick" to and slide up the
opponent's attacking arm. The overturning of the
palm and the sliding motion act to form a wedge
which deflects the punch. Used as a strike, this
motion is discussed in Chapter 5 during the
discussion of the "white cloud chasing the stars"
palm. As mentioned previously, the "sliding the
window shutter to gaze at the moon" palm or the
"embracing moon at chest" palm could also be
used in striking applications during the "turn
around" phase of the single palm change.
The Winding: The winding up of the body is
demonstrated by Park in photo 5. The principle in
this portion of the change is in learning how to
once again rotate the body around it's center
while maintaining balance and stability. In doing
this the practitioner is also learning how to
generate horizontal power. The degree of the
body turning, or winding, can vary depending on
the experience level of the practitioner or the focus

of the practice.
The maximum twist of the body, which Park
is demonstrating in photo 5, helps develop
suppleness and flexibility in the spine as the
spine is twisted from the base all the way up
to the top of the neck. This large twisting
motion can also be utilized in application
when the practitioner is executing an arm
break, shoulder strike, and/ or as a set up for a
throw. In order to condition the appropriate
muscles, ligaments and tendons of the legs
and torso to be able to train the body to
generate this kind of power, the beginning
student will maximize this twist. The "hiding
flower under leaf" exercise shown in the
beginning of this chapter aids in developing
the body for this motion. When practicing the
maximum twisting motion the practitioner
should always maintain the proper body
alignments so the knees are not twisted to an
unnatural angle.
In all applications, this motion is usually
executed close into the opponent's body in
order to employ a joint lock, arm break, set up
for a throw, and/or flanking maneuver. The
practitioner will apply crisp power at the end
of the winding motion when utilizing this
move for an arm break or shoulder strike.
Thus when practicing with this type of
execution in mind, the practitioner will usually
perform the more pronounce rotation and tight
k'ou step in order to insure stability. A
discussion of the usage of the k'ou and pai
steps is presented at the end of this chapter.
The footwork of the single palm change will
also vary with the intent of the application.
Whereas the k'ou pu footwork in the "turn
around" segment of this maneuver was
utilized to change direction rapidly, the k'ou
pu in the "winding" section can be used to
hook and lock the opponent's foot and leg or
to set up for a leg sweep. Practitioners who are
executing the single palm change with this
strategy in mind will have a pronounced k'ou
pu. Others, who may use this movement for a
fast throwing application, may use a very
small, quick k'ou pu. The practice of the single
palm change can always vary depending on
the intent of the practitioner's fighting
application.
In addition to variations relating to different
70 
fighting strategies, variations of this winding
motion can also be tailored for training
flexibility and suppleness in the spine, back,
shoulders, and hips. Various arm positions are
utilized to facilitate different varieties of
stretching motions. You will notice that Park's
lower hand is tucked in under the armpit and
close to the body. This facilitates a stretching
motion in the back which aids in the
development of flexibility and suppleness in the
back and shoulder areas.
The Unwinding: Part of the purpose of the
winding motion discussed in the last section is
to prepare for the unwinding motion which is to
follow. It is during the execution of the
unwinding that the actual changing of the palms
occurs.
Like the winding, the unwinding is training the
practitioner how to develop rotational power
around the center axis of the body, legs, and
arms. However, whereas the winding primarily
trained horizontal power, there are also
components of vertical and oblique power
exhibited in the motion of the unwinding. You
will notice that as the body unwinds and the
palms change, the hands are brought up high
before they reach their final position. This is
shown in photos 7 through 9. The upward lifting
and subsequent falling and rotating of the arms
and palms as the body turns back in this
unwinding phase is the key principle here. This
is the "rise, drill, fall, and overturn" sequence
that is discussed in both the Hsing-I and Pa Kua
classics. These four different kinds of energy are
trained in this motion. In Park's school, this
component is practiced to varying degrees. In
other words, in the execution of the unwinding
students practice all variations from a very flat
change as in the straight fan chang maneuver, to
a very high arcing change as in the t'ien fan
chang maneuver. All variations in-between
these two extremes are also practiced.
In application, the unwinding motion of the
body and "rise, drill, fall, and overturn" motions
of the hands and arms are usually utilized in the
execution of a deflection, redirection, or throw.
In some instances it can be also used as a strike
to the side of the head or the back of the head
or neck. In the abbreviated version of the single
palm change from the Yin Fu style of Pa Kua,

which incorporates the piercing palm motion, the
pierce can either be use as an entry, deflection, or
a strike.
The unwinding of the body and the uplifting,
rotating, and falling of the arms and hands also
aids the practitioner in developing functional
flexibility in the legs torso, spine, shoulders, and
arms. By functional flexibility I am referring to
training which works to stretch and loosen
muscles that will need to be supple and loose
during the execution of Pa Kua. It is great if
someone can perform the full splits, however,
performing the splits is not nearly as functional in
Pa Kua as having a loose and supple twisting and
turning movement throughout the whole body,
especially in the pelvic region. There are many
individuals who have very limber leg muscles,
however, when asked to stand with their feet and
knees facing forward and twist their hips as far as
they can to one side or the other, they discover
that the muscles in their pelvic region are not so
loose. In Pa Kua functional flexibility involves
twisting and rotating the muscles and suppleness
in the joints - twisting the legs, twisting the hips,
twisting the torso, twisting the shoulders, and
twisting the arms. This is why the series of fan
chang exercises and the "hiding flower under
leaf" exercise are so important. Additionally,
these twisting are executed in the single palm
change in a coordinated fashion while
maintaining whole body connection. These
elements are all trained in the single palm change.
Variations
Now that we have presented and discussed one
possible single palm change expression, we will
use that as a model in discussing variations on the
theme. In all cases we will discuss the variations
in terms of the "change of direction," the
"winding," and the "unwinding" components.
The first variations we will explore are those
involving the "change of direction" phase of the
single palm change. For simplicity, we have
included photo sequences of these variations
which do not include the pronounced "winding"
71 
and "unwinding" sections of the change as
practiced during the execution of the "hiding flower
under leaf" posture. The winding and unwinding
phase of the following examples will appear to
have been left out because the pronounced k'ou pu
and pai pu movements and the "hiding flower
under leaf" winding of the body that were presented
in our last example have been shortened
considerably. However, the winding and unwinding
principles are there in the execution of the fan
chang maneuver, they are just very subtle. Of
course, as variations to these examples, the
pronounced winding and unwinding of the last
example could be added to any of them.
Variation #1
In the first variation example, we will
demonstrate what we mean by the subtle winding
and unwinding. The photographs on the next page
depict a single palm change sequence where the
winding and unwinding phases of the exercise have
been omitted except for the subtle rotation of the
body around its center during the fan chang
maneuver. The example is as follows:
1) Park is walking the circle in the clockwise
direction. See photo 1.
2) Park now executes the first k'ou pu maneuver
and changes directions using the " panther" and
"giraffe" postures as in the last example. See
photos 2 through 4.
3) Now, instead of moving in to the "hiding
flower under leaf" posture, Park executes a straight
fan chang maneuver and begins to walk the circle
in the other direction. See photos 5 and 6. In
photo 5, Park is executing a very subtle "winding"
of the body. The hips and shoulders are slightly
rotating to the right as in the previous change,
however, the body does not turn near as far and the
inside foot does not step into k'ou pu. In photo 6,
Park is executing a subtle "unwinding" in that the
body has rotated around its center and is facing
back towards the center of the circle.
One thing to notice here is that Park has lifted
his inside leg high during the change. This is
another variation. Instead of stepping straight
out with the inside foot close to the ground, this
high lifting action of the leg during the change is

1 2
5 6
Single Palm Change Variation #1
practiced for an application the practitioner
might use in sweeping the opponent's leg in a
throw. In this instance (photo 5), Park could
have stepped low to the ground or lifted the leg
in a crisp motion which is coordinated with the
turning of the body and changing of the palms.
The low footwork is executed in application
when the practitioner is using the fan chang
phase of the single palm change to open up the
opponent's defenses and get inside. The twisting
of the body, overturning of the hands, and crisp
lifting of the leg is executed in close to the
opponent's body in the execution of a throwing
technique.
Another thing to notice here is that this change
is very similar to the change shown on page 66.
72 
3 4 
7 
 
However, that change does not include the
"giraffe" posture during the change. The
example on page 66 is a more direct
expression of the change. This more direct
expression could include numerous variations.
For example, from the position shown in
photo 3 above, instead of executing the
straight fan chang and changing into the
standard "dragon" posture (photos 5 through
7), Park could have transitioned into an one of
the eight "animal" postures as presented in the
last volume on pages 189 through 198.
Other variations can also occur from the
position shown in photo 3. One change students
in Park's school will learn is to step into the k'ou
pu shown in photo 3 and then execute three

piercing palms from this position. After the third
piercing palm, the left hand is forward and so the
student simply turns the body to the right, steps
off with the left foot and walks the circle. In
executing the three piercing palms, the changing
of the forward palm occurs without having to
perform the fan chang maneuver. The piercing
palm maneuver is presented in this volume in the
"supplemental palms" section of Chapter 5.
Other possible variations to this change which
Park's students practice involve combining the
movements of single palm change variation #1
with the "full step with a jump" footwork and
palm striking which was presented on page 136
of the first volume of this book. This sequence
would fit in-between photos 5 and 6 of the single
palm change variation #1. In other words, as the
palms change and the left leg steps forward (see
photo 5), instead of lifting the leg and turning the
body to the center as shown in photo 6, the
practitioner executes a full step with a jump
straight along a line tangent to the circle in
combination with a powerful shaking palm strike.
After the shaking palm is executed, the
practitioner then executes the movements shown
in photos 6 and 7 on the previous page to walk
the circle.
One last variation to this single palm execution
can occur from the posture in photo number 6.
From this position, instead of continuing a
smooth turn to the center of the circle and a circle
walking step, the practitioner can execute a jump
step and double "slapping palm" application.
After the double slapping palm is executed, the
practitioner can turn the body towards the center
and continue walking the circle (photo 7). The
slapping palm is described in the "forty eight
month palm" section of Chapter 5 of this volume.
As you can see from the few single palm change
examples presented thus far, the variations to the
single palm change that the student in Park's
school will practice can employ all of the
previous training, including: the eight direction
rooted stepping, the body training exercises, the
forty eight month palms, and the supplemental
palms. There is not one part of Park's system that
exists in isolation from the others. Eventually it is
all brought together in the characteristic Pa Kua
Chang circle walking format.
73 
Variation #2
Now that we have defined one simple change
where the "hiding flower under leaf" posture has
been shortened to a straight fan chang, we will
present a variation to the "turn around" which
involves the "white snake coiling its body" k'ou
pu posture you practiced in the "moving hiding
flower under leaf" exercise. This change is
executed as follows:
1) Park is walking the circle in the clockwise
direction. See photo 1.
2) Park steps into k'ou pu and the arms begin to
form the "white snake coils its body" posture. See
photos 2 and 3.
3) Park now turns his body to the right by
opening up his right foot and executes a fan
chang maneuver at the same time. He then
steps off and walks the circle in the other
direction. See photos 4 through 6.
As variations to this theme, Park could have
executed the "hiding flower under leaf"
maneuver directly from the position in photo 3.
Or he could have executed the "giraffe" posture
from the position in photo 3 and then executed
the "hiding flower under leaf" posture as you
practiced in the "moving hiding flower under
leaf" exercise. Again, as he stepped off to walk
the circle in the other direction he could have
stepped off directly as he did in the photos, or he
could have lifted the leg in a sweeping motion as
he did in the last example. Additionally, he could
have executed any of the other variations
discussed in the last section after he executed the
"white snake coils its body" posture. The number
of different combinations the practitioner can
invent become endless.
A nice application of this "white snake coiling
its body" move is to slightly side step an
opponent's attack, blocking it with the upper arm
and catching the opponent's forearm with the
upper hand as you step into the "white snake
coils its body" posture. As you step in, the lower
elbow clips the opponent in the ribs. This forward
moving elbow (forearm leading) is immediately
followed by another strike with the same elbow
in the reverse direction (upper arm leading). At
the same time the second elbow is connecting to
the opponent's ribs in the front of his body, the

1 2
5 6
Single Palm Change Variation #2
upper hand releases the opponent's forearm and
rides up his arm to jab him in the throat with the
fingers of the upper hand. In this position (photo 3)
the practitioner's body is very close to the
opponent's body, the practitioner's foot has hooked
around the opponent's lead foot, and the
opponent's head is moving back after he has been
jabbed in the throat. At this point, the
practitioner's upper arm grabs the opponent's arm
at the crook of the elbow as the lower arm comes
across the opponent's chest (giraffe movement)
and the foot sweeps out the opponent's leg in the
execution of a throw. This application can be
executed very fast and in a matter of seconds
the opponent has received two elbow strikes to
the ribs, fingers jabbed into his throat, and he is
74 
3 4 
7 
 
thrown on the ground.
Variation #3
The next two variations of the "turn around"
are based on the "scooping moon from sea
bottom" exercises which were presented in the
first volume of this book. The first is executed
as follows:
1) Park begins by walking the circle in the
clockwise direction. See photo 1.
2) Park steps into the k'ou pu of the turn
around and then brings the upper hand to
block across the face. See photos 2 and 3.
3) The upper elbow comes down to block in
front of the right ribs. See photos 4 and 5.
  

 
                1                                    2                                    3                                      4 
 

 
                  5                                  6                                    7                                    8   
 

 
9 10 11 
                         
Single Palm Change Variation #3 
 

75 

4) The fingers of the right hand turn under to
face away from the body and spear through. See
photo 6.
5) As the hand spears in the direction of the
change, the body follows by turning. See photo
7.
6) The body makes a quick turning motion
which comes from the back foot, up the leg, the
hips, the shoulders, and out to the hand in the
execution of the palm turning over. This is a
whole body motion and a very important
coordination to comprehend in the execution of
this phase of the movement. See photo 8.
7) Begin to execute the fan chang maneuver
to change palms. See photo 9.
8) Execute the fan chang and continue
walking in the counterclockwise direction. See
photos 10 and 11.
As always, the practitioner has the option of
executing the "hiding flower under leaf"
maneuver after reaching the position shown in
photograph 8. This motion has numerous useful
applications, most of which block an opponent's
strike and then use a wrapping motion to
"snake" inside of the opponent's defenses.
Variation #4
This next variation is the same as the last except
that the low "scooping moon from sea bottom"
is executed. This is known as a "lower single
palm change." This variation is executed as
follows:
1) Park begins by walking the circle in the
clockwise direction. See photo 1.
2) Park steps into the k'ou pu of the turn
around and then brings the upper hand to block
across the face. See photos 2 and 3.
3) From here the fingers of the upper hand
turn in and the hand begins to shoot down by the
side. See photos 4 and 5.
4) The right hand continues to extend down the
right leg, traveling along the leg with the palm
facing upward as Park shifts his weight down on
the left leg. The left hand is placed by the left
ribs with the palm facing upward. A variation of
this posture would be to have the left hand extend
out to the back with the palm facing upwards or
76 
pushing to the rear. See photo 6.
5) From the low position shown in photograph
number 6, Park will push off of the back leg and
turn the palm over as the body comes up. Notice
that there is a straight line from Park's back foot, up
his leg and spine. A common problem beginners
run into in this motion is to allow the upper body to
bend forward as the body comes up. This breaks the
body's alignment and energy flow. See photos 7
and 8. The entire sequence from photo 3 to photo
8 is performed very fluidly in a swift "swooping"
type of motion. There should be a very smooth
and swift transition across the body in the low
posture. The practitioner swoops down with the
weight all coming down on the left leg, then the
weight is immediately transferred across to the right,
by a pushing motion from the left leg, as the body
begins to raise up and turn and the palm rotates.
This movement is sometimes referred to as
"swallow skims the water."
6) Park begins to execute the fan chang
maneuver to change palms. At this point, the
practitioner could transition into a k'ou pu and
perform the "hiding flower under leaf" posture.
Executing the "hiding flower under leaf" posture
at this juncture is very good on the legs because it
is difficult to transition smoothly form the low
scooping, extended body position of "swallow
skims the water" directly to the "hiding flower
under leaf" posture. See photo 9.
7) Park executes the fan chang maneuver and
begins walking the circle on the other side. See
photos 10 through 12.
This expression of the single palm change is very
useful in opening up the hips and groin areas as
well as stretching the legs. In applications, this
palm is useful in throwing larger, taller opponents
by cutting away their legs. Park says that one rule
of thumb to follow in fighting a tall opponent it to
take away his legs.
Variation #5
In the next variation of the single palm change,
the "turn around" phase of the motion is, in a
sense, combined with the "winding" phase of
the "hiding flower under leaf" posture. Instead
of executing the first k'ou pu movement and
an obvious "turn around," the practitioner will
  

 
                1                                    2                                    3                                      4 
 

 
                  5                                  6                                    7                                    8   
 

 
                    9                                    10                                  11                              12   
                         
Single Palm Change Variation #4 
 

77 

transition directly from walking the circle in the
clockwise direction to the "hiding flower under
leaf" posture.
Executing the single palm change in this manner
is a way of overemphasizing the "winding"
motion of the "hiding flower under leaf"
movement. In doing this, the student learns how
to better balance his or her turning motions
around the body's center line. If the student can
learn to execute this variation of the single palm
change smoothly and fluidly while maintaining
stability, he or she will find that the standard
"hiding flower under leaf" change becomes much
simpler. In Pa Kua Chang application there are
many instances where the practitioner will use
this "winding" energy. The more stable, smooth,
and fluid the practitioner is in the execution of
this movement, the more useful it will be in
application. Through practice of this version of
the single palm change, the student will learn
how to rotate the body around its center axis in a
smooth, continuous, crisp, and fluid manner. The
change is executed as follows:
1) Park begins by walking the circle in the
clockwise direction. See photo 1.
2) As he takes a step with the outside foot, Park
executes a 180 k'ou pu turn while the hands
immediately begin to transition into the "hiding
flower under leaf" posture (for an explanation of
the 180 k'ou pu, see the first volume of this book,
page 102). See photo 2.
3) Park executes the full "hiding flower under
leaf" posture. See photo 3.
4) Park begins to unwind and then executes a
fan chang maneuver. See photos 4 and 5.
5) Park completes the fan chang and steps off
to walk the circle in the other direction. See
photos 6.
A variation of this change which will further
challenge the practitioner's balance and stability
around the body's center line is to execute a t'ien
fan chang maneuver from the "hiding flower
under leaf" posture of photo 3. In practicing this
variation, the winding into the "hiding flower
under leaf" posture and the unwinding using the
t'ien fan chang movement are executed swiftly
and fluidly. This change of direction is very fast.
78 
Another variation is to execute the "swallow
penetrating through the forest" movement from
the "hiding flower under leaf" posture during the
"unwind" portion of this movement. This change
also challenges the practitioner's balance and
stability during the unwinding phase of the single
palm change. Additionally, there are several nice
applications of the "hiding flower under leaf"
changing to "swallow penetrating through the
forest."
Variation #6
The next variation of the single palm change is
called the "outside single palm change" because \
the change of direction occurs while the I
practitioner is facing outside of the circle instead
of inside the circle. This is a smooth and
continuous change of direction which employs a
continuous tornado-like energy instead of the
typical winding and unwinding. This variation is
performed as follows:
1) Park begins by walking the circle in the ,
clockwise direction. See photo 1.
2) Park executes the first k'ou pu movement
and immediately begins to perform a fan chang
with the left hand coming under the right elbow.
See photo 2.
3) Park turns to the outside of the circle,
rotating to his left as he executes the fan chang
maneuver. Notice that he first executes a 180
degree pai pu movement with the left foot as the
arms begin to change (the 180 degree pai pu is
shown on page 103 of the first volume of this
book). Then as the arms continue to change he
swings the right foot around into a k'ou pu. See
photos 3 through 5.
After the first k'ou pu as shown in photo 2, Park
only needs to execute a 180 degree pai pu
followed by a k'ou pu and he is now in position to
step off and walk the circle in the other direction.
4) Park now completes the fan chang
maneuver and walks the circle in the other
direction. See photos 6 through 8.
As a quicker variation of this movement, Park
could have immediately stepped into a. pai pu
with the outside (left) leg from photo 1 and thus
skipped the first k'ou pu movement altogether.
This type of change is very fast and tornado-like.
  

 
1 2 3 4 

 
5 6  

Single Palm Change Variation #5 

This type of change can also be used when
executing the "sliding the window shutter to look
at the moon" hand movements which are shown in
the palm training chapter of this volume.
In application, this footwork maneuver is not
used in turning the back to the opponent. Park's
rule of thumb is that you should never turn your
back to your opponent's front. So, in this
maneuver, although you turn your back to the
tenter of the circle as you change, you should
not think of this as turning your back to your
opponent. Usually this pronounced pai pu,
followed by a k'ou pu in the same direction is used
to move in behind an opponent who has tried to
outflank you. For instance, if Park was facing an
opponent in any kind of posture just before photo
4 was taken and the opponent tried to use his
footwork to get to Park's left side or back, Park
could execute the footwork shown in photos 4 and
5 to outmaneuver the opponent and get around to
the opponent's left side or back. This kind of
footwork is also employed in walking a very tight
circle or walking a spiraling pattern (see the
spiraling change shown on page 63).

79 
  

 
                1                                    2                                    3                                      4 
 

 
                  5                                  6                                    7                                    8   
                       
Single Palm Change Variation #6 
 

80 

K'ou Pu and Pai Pu in Application   
The k'ou pu and pai pu footwork which is used
in the single palm change movement to quickly
maneuver and change directions also has various
leg locking, tripping, trapping, and sweeping
applications. Whenever a Pa Kua Chang
practitioner moves in close to an opponent, he or
she is always thinking about trapping, sweeping,
or locking the opponent's lower body while
applying upper body techniques. Any employment
of an upper body strike, lock, grab, or throw must
have a lower body component in order to be
complete.
The key idea in trapping or locking the legs is to
cut off the opponent's route of escape from the
upper body strike, lock, or throw. When you get
into position to apply a technique on an opponent,
you do not want them to be able to use their
footwork to maneuver out of it. By trapping or
locking the opponent's legs, he will not be able to
easily escape your attack. Additionally, lower
body techniques are used in tandem with upper
body techniques in order to divert the opponent's
attention high and low. Many times, in order to
apply an upper body technique you might distract
the opponent with a kick or leg lock. Alternatively,
you can also employ an upper body technique as a
distraction for a kick or leg lock.
In practicing partner drills and researching Pa
Kua Chang applications, you will always want to
consider the movement of the opponent's legs.
Whenever you move in to attack an opponent you
want to position yourself so that the opponent
cannot kick you, knee you, or otherwise use his
legs in attack or retreat. You always want to try
and "take away" the opponent's legs. His legs are
his base of power, strength, stability, and balance.
If you can take away his legs, you can easily finish
him off.
Most martial artists spend a lot of time
practicing arm trapping, sticking, redirecting,
"listening, "blocking, locking, seizing, and
pushing drills. However, when it comes to the
legs, few consider the use of the legs beyond
basic kicking, sweeping, and trapping. Pa Kua
Chang
81 
practitioners will work to obtain the same degree
of sensitivity in the use of the legs that T'ai Chi
Ch'uan practitioners obtain in pushing hands drills.
A good Pa Kua Chang practitioner will always
position his legs relative to the opponent's legs in a
way that he can easily feel the opponent's leg
movements and redirect that movement or force
by using his own legs. It is said that Tung
Hai-Ch'uan's famous student Yin Fu was so good
with his legs that he could trap, lock, trip, or sweep
the opponent's every move. Yin Fu stylists are
know for their high degree of leg sensitivity.
In Park Bok Nam's system of Pa Kua, the "leg
locking" skill is one of the highest expressions of
the circle walking, eight direction rooted stepping,
and k'ou pu and pai pu footwork training. When
Park is demonstrating these techniques, his partner
can seldom move or take a step without being
tripped, swept or locked. When Park is
demonstrating these techniques on me, I feel as if I
cannot move anywhere. Every time I try to
maneuver, he will cut off my steps with his legs
and I am either tripped, locked, or trapped.
In this section we will discuss a few of the
various applications and follow-up leg techniques
that might be used in the execution of the k'ou pu
and pai pu leg movements. After learning how to
employ the eight direction rooted stepping, the
circle walking, and the k'ou pu and pai pu
footwork to gain superior body angle and position,
learning how to employ these leg maneuvers in
either locking or trapping the opponent's legs, or in
setting up for kicks, will be the next step in
learning the leg techniques of Pa Kua Chang.
K'ou Pu Usage
Aside from being used as a stepping technique to
quickly change directions and execute tight
circular stepping movements to gain superior
body position, the k'ou pu footwork is an
excellent leg trapping technique. In the examples
given below we will show how one might use the
k'ou pu step to trap the opponent's leg and then,
based on the opponent's reaction, follow-up with an

appropriate technique.
The two photos shown below (k'ou pu
photos 1 and 2) show how one might step in to
trap the opponent's lead leg from the outside.
Several key points apply to this maneuver.
First, no worthy opponent is going to let you
simply step in and place your foot behind his.
This leg maneuver will always be used
following, or in conjunction with, an upper
body technique that distracts the opponent's
attention. It could be a distraction you created,
or it could be a distraction the opponent
created himself in attacking you. Either way,
there must be a "setup."
Secondly, the angle of the k'ou pu step will
depend on the upper body technique being
applied. In the photo shown below, Park has
executed a very pronounced k'ou pu because he
is getting ready to lock the opponent's leg. If he
was applying an upper body attack and simply
wanted
Kʹou pu application photo 1 
 
Kʹou pu application photo 2  root as it is quickly and crisply pulled forward. This
82 
to insure the opponent could not step back and
retreat, the angle of the k 'on pu would not have to
be so great.
Thirdly, you want this step to come in tight to the
opponent's leg. You do not want to leave him room
to maneuver. You want your foot behind the
opponent's foot and your shin along the opponent's
calf. If you are going to execute a leg lock, as
shown in photo 2, you want the foot turned in tight
against the inside of the opponent's inner foot. You
want to begin to add pressure with your shin as you
bend your knee down. As you begin to add pressure,
you are sensitive to the opponent's response.
From the position shown in photo 2 below,
there are several follow-ups that one might apply.
The follow-up you apply will always depend on the
opponent's response to the initial leg trap (photo 2).
You cannot just step in and assume that you are
going to be able to lock the opponent's leg just
because that is what you want to do. You have to
gain the positioning and then execute whatever
move is appropriate based on the opponent's
response. You have to "feel" what the opponent is
doing as you apply the pressure and "follow" his
motion to create an opportunity. You do not want
to fight against the opponent's will. You have to
adhere, or stick, to the opponent's movement,
redirect, and finish.
In order to give you an idea of what we mean
by "following" the opponent, we will now present
several possible follow-ups to the move executed
in photo 2.
Follow-up #1
The first follow-up, which is shown in photo 3
on the next page, can occur if the opponent does
not respond to the leg placement of photo 2. This
technique is to simply continue the motion of the
leg lock by bending the knee and breaking the
opponent's ankle. Once the opponent's knee starts
to buckle inward, as shown in photo 3, you can also
sweep that leg, by executing a jump step forward,
and cause the opponent to fall. In the last volume of
this book we explained that in the execution of the
jump step, the rear foot remained on the ground for
foot sweeping technique is an excellent use of that
stepping power.
  

Follow-up #2 want to "stick" to his legas he tries to lift it up.

The next example will also utilize a foot You then help to lift it up by providing
sweeping motion to trip the opponent and take pressure under his leg as shown in photo 5.
away his balance. This technique is best After his forward leg is off the ground, you
employed if the opponent tries to "root" down can then follow-up with a side kick to the
into the front leg in order to forcibly resist your opponent's opposite knee as shown in
knee locking I on pu move of photo 2. If you try photo 6.
to execute the k'ou pu leg lock and you feel the
opponent resisting, you quickly change the In the follow-up examples described above
direction of your force and pull the opponent's we have presented possible responses to an
forward leg out from under him by stepping opponent's reaction to a k'ou pu leg lock.
away from him and pulling his foot. These responses were based on three of the
As in all applications, the direction of force most probable reactions an opponent might
which you apply has to be at the correct angle in have to a k'ou pu leg lock. Of course, there
order for it to work. If the opponent is much are other responses an opponent might have.
bigger than you and he roots onto his front leg, it A very good response the opponent might
will be difficult to sweep that leg if you do not have used is to employ a pivot step as soon
apply the sweeping force at the right angle. The
illustration at right shows the correct angle to
sweep the leg. The principle applied here is one
of applying your force where the opponent's
ability to resist is weakest. The opponent's
strongest force is along the black solid line as
shown in the illustration. You want to apply your
force at a 45 degree angle to that line. (See the
dotted line in the illustration). Once you get the
opponent's legs spread out, you can then lift your
foot and sweep his leg out from under him as
shown in photo 4.

Follow-up #3
The last alternative we will show here is
executed if the opponent tries to step out of your
lock. If he tries to pick up the foot and step, you K'ou pu sweep angle illustration
 

 
            K'ou pu application photo 3 K'ou pu application photo 4
 

83 

            K'ou pu application photo 5
as he felt the leg lock occurring (just prior to
photo 2). This pivot is shown in the illustration
below. By using the pivot step, the opponent
has gotten totally clear of the lock.
Another possible counter to a k'ou pu lock is a
pai pu counter-lock. If you feel the opponent's leg
locking in behind your leg on the outside, you
can quickly execute a pai pu maneuver into the
opponent's leg as shown in the photo below. Of
course the upper body techniques will always
play a part in dictating what kind of lower body
maneuvers and counter-maneuvers you might
employ in any given situation. All possibilities
must be researched and practiced in order for one
to be prepared for all situations. Here we simply
presented a few possibilities for you to think about
          Pivot counter to k'ou pu leg lock
84 
K'ou pu application photo 6
in hopes that you will then create alternatives
of your own. For instance, in this section we
have only presented the k'ou pu lock to the
outside of the opponent's forward leg and the
pai pu lock to the inside of the opponent's
forward leg. The k'ou pu lock can also be
applied to the inside of the opponent's
forward leg and the pai pu lock to the outside
of the opponent's forward leg. These
executions are not quite as common, but they
can be effectively employed. It is up to you to
explore the possibilities.
              Pivot counter to k'ou pu leg lock
  

they would kick.

K'ou Pu and Pai Pu Kicks This kick is also best applied to the opponent's
joints. Below we have shown applications to the
The k'ou pu and pai pu style foot placements knee. One is to the inside and one is to the
can also be used as low kicking techniques in Pa outside of the opponent's knee.
Kua Chang. In Parks system of Pa Kua Chang
there are three types of kicks which employ the
"toe-in" and "toe-out" foot postures.

The "Toe-In" Kicks

The first "toe-in" kick is called "foot kick,"
because it is used to sweep the opponent's foot.
This kick is executed as if stepping into a k'ou pu
step, however, the weight is kept back on the rear
leg. The kick hooks in to sweep across the
opponent's ankle or calf. This kick is executed as
shown in photo 1 on page 82. The force of this
kick is a low sweeping motion which hooks
across from outside to inside.
The next toe-in kick is simply a low side kick. Side Kick to Opponent's Inner Knee
The direction of force can be straight in or it can
sheer at a cutting angle. The photos on the right
depict some nice places on the knee to apply this
type of kick. It is nice to apply this kick to the
inside or outside of any of the opponent's lower
joints: ankles, hips, or knees. The kick can be a
sharp crisp kick, or it can be a pushing or
sheering force used to lock and/or break the joint.
The foot can kick out and pull back, or push
through as it makes contact with the target. Park
likes to employ this kick to the opponent's knee
when the opponent is taking a step. As soon as
the opponent steps forward and the weight starts
to shift, he kicks the knee at a side angle. "Toe-Out" to Opponent's Outer Knee
This side kick can also be applied to the rear
leg in combination with the "foot kick." This
kind of application is similar to the sequence
shown in photos 5 and 6 at the top of the
previous page. A swift upward sweeping kick to
the area of the opponent's leg just under the calf
and over the ankle will usually cause the
opponent to lift that leg. When the forward leg is
lifted, the practitioner can then kick out the back
leg with a side kick as shown in photo 6 on the
previous page.

The "Toe-Out" Kick

In Park's school the "toe-out" low kick is called
"women's kick." Park's teacher called this the "Toe-Out" Kick to Opponent's Inner Knee
"women's kick" because when women he knew
got angry and kicked someone, this is the way

85 
  

The Single Palm Change : Conclusion   

In terms of learning how to apply Pa Kua Chang practice, you should then practice executing the
in an actual combat environment, the change of single palm change in all its variations as described
direction is the most important component of the in this book. After you have a good feel for these
basic circle walk practice. It is within the change variations, it is time to create new variations on
of direction that the techniques of Pa Kua Chang your own. In Park's school we will utilize the eight
are usually applied. The change of direction in the animal postures and the movements of the forty
circle walk practice also trains the Pa Kua eight month palms and the supplemental palms,
practitioner's body coordination, full body as presented in Chapter 5 of this volume, and
integration, functional flexibility, and whole body create new variations and research how they might
power. The torso is trained so that the upper and be applied in combat. If you have already studied
lower body are in harmony and Pa Kua's rotational another style of Pa Kua Chang, you can take what
power is developed while executing the change. we have presented here along with the Pa Kua
The primary movement utilized to change movements you already know and try to create
direction during the basic circle walk practice is some new single palm changes of your own.
the single palm change.
The single palm change is the most important
move in Pa Kua in terms of training the body and
developing the inherent power of Pa Kua. The
single palm change is also the most important
component of Pa Kua in its combat application. If
a practitioner can learn how to execute and apply
the single palm change properly, he will be well
on his way to developing a high level of Pa Kua
skill.
Like everything else in Pa Kua, there are many
variations of the single palm change. Each school
will execute the single palm change in a slightly
different manner and within each school there
are also many variations that are practiced. Pa Kua
is based on the principle of change, therefore,
nothing is fixed. In practicing any aspect of the
art, whether it be stepping method, the single
palm change, or any given technique, the Pa Kua
practitioner will execute a wide variety of
variations. I know of no complete system of Pa
Kua that only executes one variation of single
palm change. Most schools will have at least five
or six different ways of executing this movement.
Everything from the hand and arm positions, to
the direction the body twists, to the positioning of
the feet, to the positioning of the body are varied
in the practice of single palm change.
After you have practiced all of the exercises
that are preliminary to the single palm change

86 
  

Chapter 5
Pa Kua Chang Palm Training 

87 

Chapter 5 
Pa Kua Chang   
Palm Training 
In the first volume of this book we discussed a few
of the basic palm training exercises of Park Bok
Nam's system. These basic exercises are designed
to introduce the beginning student to the
fundamental body mechanics relevant to
developing Pa Kua whole body striking power,
including the details of correct body alignments,
use of mental intention, and the breathing
methods utilized when striking with the palm.
The movements and exercises discussed in the
first volume are somewhat crude in relationship
to the refined mechanics of an experienced
practitioner, but experience with large body
motions is necessary to develop the muscles,
tendons, and ligaments properly before the student
is ready for more refined movements and more
precise timing.
The primary purpose of the beginning level
exercises is to develop the body in the area of the
hips, spine, and shoulders. These exercises not
only work to train correct body mechanics, but
also serve to condition the muscles involved in
these motions and give the practitioner a good
sense of body alignment and timing while learning
how to relax the body, loosen the body, and move
fluidly. Once these basic exercises have been
practiced for a sufficient amount of time, the
student is then ready to develop the entire torso in
a more complete fashion, further develop
suppleness and flexibility, and experience details
and subtlties that the rank beginner's body would
not be able to understand or experience.
In Park Bok Nam's system, this intermediate
88 
level palm training is accomplished through the
practice of what Park calls the "Forty Eight Month
Palms." As we explained in the first book, Park
calls these exercises the "forty eight month palm"
set because it took him that long to learn all of
them. His teacher required that he practice each
of the eight exercises for six months before he was
taught another. Practicing in this manner it took
Park forty eight months to learn all of these palms.
The palm training exercises in the forty eight
month palm set are not the only palm training
exercises Park learned from his teacher. There are
many more "supplemental" palm exercises that
Park was taught in the course of his training. With
so many palm training exercises in this system,
one might ask why this group of eight was set
apart from the others and taught as a specific
training set and in a specific sequence. The
answer lies in an investigation of the mechanics
involved in training each of these specific exercises.
In Pa Kua Chang, the power for striking with
the palm is initiated from the legs, directed by the
hips and waist, and then expressed in the hands.
In order to have complete training, the student
must learn how to strike efficiently and effectively
in six directions (left, right, front, back, up, down)
with each hand.* In striking to the front, to the
sides, to the back, and in striking with both hands
simultaneously in one or a combination of these
* Note: There are really a total of eight directions. The other
two directions, inside (close to the body) and outside (at
arms length from the body) can be trained as variations of
each of the exercises.

directions, the mechanics of motion and power
generation in the legs and torso are slightly
different. Each of the eight exercises of the forty
eight month palm set teaches the student how to
strike to each of the six directions and therefore
also develops a different part of the
practitioner's leg-torso connection, alignment,
and power. After training with the complete set
of palm exercises for several months, the
practitioner will find that the entire body has not
only been developed such that power can be
delivered in every direction, but additionally,
the complete development of the entire torso
aids the overall ability to generate internal
power in general. However, simply looking at
the exercises will not give one as clear a picture
of this process as actually spending time
training the exercises. After practicing about
500 repetitions of any one of these exercises in
one practice session, the practitioner need only
recognize which part of the body is sore the next
day to know what part of the body that
particular exercise has trained. In the following
section we will describe each of the forty eight
month palms in detail.
The foundations of an internal strike are found
in the subtle body connections, intricate body
alignments, functioning of the joints and
tendons, flexibility of the entire body, and
secondary muscle movements. In training these
exercises you will be finding and using muscles
you didn't even know you had and you will be
developing suppleness in areas that are difficult
to stretch during normal daily activity or
standard flexibility exercises.
Developing the kind of twisting, turning and
"whipping" power which is prominent in Pa
Kua Chang, the practitioner must develop a
level of suppleness in the joints which is beyond
that of the average athlete or martial artist. It is
not only the major joints, such as the shoulders,
hips, elbows, and wrist which must gain a new
degree of suppleness. This looseness must also
extend to the entire spine and the junctures of
the ribs to the spine and sternum.
In many of the exercises outlined in this book
you will be striving to achieve levels of
flexibility in your joints that you may now think
are impossible. The "standard eight" ch'i kung
set shown in Chapter 7 of this book is a good
89 
supplemental set to these palm exercises as it
helps train the flexibility necessary in the
execution of the palm striking drills. The
"hiding flower under leaf" exercise also helps
develop the kind of flexibility which is required
in developing Pa Kua Chang striking power.
This training is not easy, the number of subtle
physical connections, alignments, and secondary
muscle movements required to produce an
effective internal strike will be overwhelming to
the uninitiated. This is one reason why Park
always starts beginners with simple exercises
and drills as the ones we presented in the last
volume of this book. Without putting in a great
deal of time with the basic exercises, the student
will not be able to make sufficient gains with the
exercises which follow.
The genius of this particular set of exercises
is that in correctly training all eight of the
"forty-eight month" palms, after obtaining a
good foundation with the prerequisite exercises,
the correct alignments, connections, energy, and
power will be naturally developed. The
practitioner does not have to search to uncover
the "secrets" of internal power. He or she just
has to practice these exercises correctly for a
sufficient amount of time. That is the beauty of
this set, you just practice and the results will
come.
In order to properly train your body, each
component and subcomponent of the internal
strike must be trained and understood through
experience before they can all be brought
together. This is what the practice of this
particular set in the correct sequence and for a
sufficient amount of time can do for you.

The Eight "Forty Eight Month" Palms   
Before beginning the forty eight month palm
training sequence, it is imperative that the student
has spent a sufficient amount of time perfecting
the mechanics of the Shaking Palm and the Dragon
Back Double Palm as described in the first volume
of this book. All of the forty eight month palms
rely on the mechanics developed during the
practice of these first two basic palms and thus
without a thorough "body knowledge" of these
palms, and the internal connections and
alignments practice of these palms will develop,
the student will not be able to correctly perform
any of the forty eight month palm exercises.
It is not enough to simply know how to perform
the first two palms correctly. Once the student
can correctly perform these first two palm exercises,
Park will require that they be practiced daily for
six months to a year before any of the forty eight
month palm exercises are taught. Only through
correct practice of these two fundamental exercises
for an extended period of time will the body be
developed sufficiently in terms of flexibility,
alignment, and coordination.
Park Bok Nam visits my school several times a
year and monitors the progress of my students.
On several occasions he has looked at one of my
students who I have taught a particular exercise
and says, "His foundation is not good enough.
You taught him this exercise too early. He needs
to go back." I will then require the student to go
back and concentrate on the previous exercises
before trying to proceed. After a period of
concentration and practice on the fundamentals
the student will then go back to the original
exercise and notice a big difference and is glad he
or she was not allowed to progress too fast.
Rules to Follow in Practice
Before beginning training for "power" in the
use of the palms as weapons, there are two key
points to be aware of in order to avoid negative
repercussions. The first rule is that before any
power is applied to the exercise, the movements
must be correct and exact. As we mentioned in
90 
the first volume, in all of Park Bok Nam's training,
when the student begins any new exercise, it is
first executed slowly with no power (the six training
stages of Park's system are explained in relation to
palm training on pages 155-156 of Volume I).
Before power is applied in any new exercise,
the student should have become familiar with the
exact movement, alignments, and mechanics
through practice of the exercise in a slow and
exact manner for a considerable length of time.
Practicing correctly and slowly while executing
hundreds of repetitions will also serve to form the
proper internal and external body connections
and alignments which must be in place before
trying to execute an exercise with power.
If the student applies power to a motion before
he or she has experiential body knowledge of the
correct movement, alignments, and mechanics of
the motion, there could be damage done to the
body. Any time power is generated from the legs
up through the torso and out to the hand and the
motion is not exact, the alignments and
connections are not right, or the timing is off, that
power can be misdirected in the body instead of
flowing out through the hand. This can cause a
condition where both the internal and external
systems of the body can be shocked. The external
parts which are usually affected are the area
between the shoulder blades, the shoulders, and
the elbows. The internal system which is usually
affected is the heart.
In order to avoid placing an inappropriate
amount of stress on the body in either an internal
or external manner, the practitioner must first go
slow and practice correctly when engaging in
power training exercises. Executing thousands of
repetitions of these palm striking exercises in a
very slow, natural manner, paying attention to
correct body alignments and positioning, will
ensure that problems do not arise. Even if the
alignments and motions are correct on the first
repetition, thousands of repetitions still must be
practiced so that the joints, nerves, tendons,
ligaments, and muscles are conditioned and the

internal and external body systems
are harmonized.
Performing exercises slowly also trains more of
the muscle fiber in the muscles which are related
to a given motion. By executing movements
slowly in the beginning, the student will train the
exercise giving each muscle group more time to
engage the complete muscle. Also, when moving
slowly other supporting, structural muscles will
engage because a slow moving arm requires more
structural support from the body than a rapidly
moving arm. If you train a movement fast from
the beginning, the motion will utilize fewer
muscle groups and muscle fibers and thus the
body will be limited in both power and connection.
If trained slowly, the muscles of the body are
developed more completely (more fibers firing at
the same instant for the same purpose). Later,
when the exercise is performed at full speed, the
body's "memory" of that movement will still
engage the complete muscle as it was trained in
the slow practice, thus the structure, power,
alignment, and timing will all be optimal.
The second rule of thumb involves the mental
intention and the movement of energy in the body
during the practice of power palm exercises.
When the student is practicing the exercise in a
slow and exact manner, the intention is placed on
the striking palm. As we explained in Volume I,
this is to facilitate a movement of ch'i and blood to
the palm. This also provides correct internal
connections and harmonizes the mind, breath, and
body. This type of harmony must first be
developed in the practice of slow, smooth, fluid
motions.
During the execution of slow exercise, Park
tells his students to "keep the ch'i." This means
that the student does not allow the ch'i to extend
past the hand. In other words, the intention stays in
the hand as if the exercise is a ch'i kung exercise.
The intention does not go out past the hand as if
the practitioner were thinking about striking
someone. In the beginning stages of working with
any of these palm exercises it is best not to think
about the movement as a palm "strike," but think
about it simply as a ch'i kung exercise.
When Park talks about "keeping the ch'i" in the
hand between movements he tells students to
visualize the ch'i moving from one hand to the
91 
other as the sides change. He says that when
doing this the "ch 'i must be full" from the tan
t'ien to the hand at all times because it takes to
long to bring ch'i from the tan t'ien to the hand in
a fighting situation when changing from one
technique to another or throwing multiple strikes.
It must already be there and be full at all times.
Glen Moore explains this principle using
"Pascal's Law of Hydraulics." He says that in any
hydraulic system if the pressure is applied on one
end of a closed loop it is felt immediately on the
other end. If a fire hose is charged and the root
valve is on, one will get pressure as soon as the
nozzle is opened. If the system is not charged and
the root valve is opened, you will have to wait for
the pressure to get to the nozzle. In our case, the
tan t'ien is the root valve and the palm is the
nozzle. When practicing, you will want to always
keep your system "charged" by not "losing" the
ch'i.
In regards to ch'i development, this type of
exercise is designed to build a strong energetic
connection between the tan t'ien and the palm,
and cultivate a full circulation of ch'i in the body.
It is a yin, or "building" exercise. In this exercise
the ch'i should not be "used" by projecting it
outside the body with the motion or the intention,
it should be kept, or "recirculated" within the
body.
After the student progresses from the slow,
exact movement to the quick, whipping style,
"power" building movement, the mental intention
changes. Here, when the palm is thrown forward,
the intention extends past the hand as if the
practitioner is trying to throw something far into
the distance. This use of intention takes the ch'i
from the tan t'ien, out the hand and away from the
body. Training the intention in this manner is
important when cultivating the ability to use
internal energy to damage the opponent. This type
of energy usage, or yang style exercise, should
always be balanced with the yin style exercise
described above. If the student does not balance
the training between energy rebuilding and energy
usage, the body's energy will become drained.
A good rule of thumb to follow in practice is to
begin a palm training set with the slow energy
building set, execute the power training sets, and
then end the practice with a long, slow set or circle

walking. Every training program and every training
session should have a balance between exercises
which expend energy and exercises which
cultivate, or rebuild energy.
In a seminar Park Bok Nam gave in California
several years ago, an acupuncture student watching
Park execute the power palm exercise asked Park
if the practice of this exercise would deplete the
practitioner's ch'i. Park explained that practice
always must be balanced between energy
cultivation and energy usage and that the ch'i in
the body is always being used and replaced. "This
is natural," Park said. Park believes that it is
actually good to practice exercises which expend
ch'i as long as there is also practice of exercises
which cultivate ch'i. Approaching a complete
training program in this manner, the ch'i in the
body is always being cycled and thus there is less
chance of ch'i stagnation.
Your body develops ch'i in order for you to use
it. You should not avoid difficult exercise or
taxing situations just so you can save or build ch'i
for the sake of having it. However, you should
never deplete your body of more energy than you
have. A common sense balancing of food, drink,
internal and external exercise, and rest will
maintain your health in a natural manner. To
much rest, too much energy conservation, too
much of a sedentary life style can be just as bad as
over work and over stress. Always seek a balance.
The Training Sequence
In training the forty eight month palms, the
student will progress through a graduated sequence
of training in order to properly develop the power
associated with these palms and then learn how to
use them in fighting. This sequence begins with
each of the palms being practiced as a solo,
repetitive exercise as described in this book. As
with all training drills in Park's system, the exercises
are first practiced slowly, then with power, then
with speed and power, then the palm strikes are
integrated with the eight direction rooted stepping
footwork which was described in the first volume.
After the student gains an experiential
understanding of how all of these palms are
combined with the eight direction rooted stepping
exercises, he or she will then learn how to combine
these palms together in particular combinations,
92 
how to combine these palms with the elbow sets
and "eight animal" movements, and how to
integrate these palms into circle walking forms.
The student will also learn "apparatus" training
for each of these palms. Each of these stages of
training which follow the practice of the basic
repetitive palm exercises will be briefly discussed
at the end of this chapter.
In regards to the exact training sequence of the
forty eight month palms themselves, each student
will start by learning the "single palm change" and
the "double palm change" exercises as the first two
of the series. From that point, the other six might
be taught in a variety of different orders depending
on what part of the body Park feels the student
should be developing. He bases this decision on
the individual's body size, level of flexibility,
coordination, and development of the "kung fu
body."
Single Palm Change and
Double Palm Change
The first two palms of the forty eight month
palm set were examined in detail in the first
volume of this book. These two palm training
methods are the first two exercises taught in the
forty eight month palm set because the mechanics
and movements of these exercises are naturally
developed from the two fundamental exercises
(shaking palm and dragon back). Since these
palms were explained in the last book, we will not
discuss them in much detail here. However, as a
reminder, we have included new footage of Park
executing these exercises on the companion video.
The Single Palm Change exercise combines the
mechanics of the shaking palm (rotation of the
body around a central axis) and the dragon back
(segmented whipping of the spine) into one
exercise. Additionally, in both the Single Palm
Change and Double Palm Change exercises, the
stance of the exercise is changed from a "horse
stance" to a "bow stance" and thus the mechanics
of the movements become more difficult to
perform as the hip and back motion become more
restricted as a result of the stance.
Additionally, the combination of the shaking
palm and the dragon back motions performed

while standing in the bow stance serves to further
train the legs, hips, shoulders, arms and spine in
both strength and suppleness. The whole body is
trained in the execution of these palms. Of special
importance for developing internal power is the
work these two palm exercises do to condition the
psoas muscle and the intercostal muscles between
the ribs. These two muscle groups work together
in the performance of the dragon back motion to
provide the mechanical power associated with
these palms.
Anyone who has practiced these two exercises
correctly can testify to the fact that the day after
first training these exercises, they could feel it in
every part of the body. Of all the palm exercises
a student is taught in this system, Park states that
if the student wants to develop a great deal of
striking power, these two exercises should be
practiced for a considerable length of time.
Remember that when you are practicing these
palms, be sure to keep your head facing forward.
If the head looks to the side as the power comes up
the spine, you can injure your neck muscles or
cause a severe headache.
Now we will begin to describe the remaining
six of the eight "forty eight month" palms. In
each of these sections we will present the following:
an introduction to the physical mechanics of each
palm, the exact movements of the exercise, and
some combat applications or uses of each palm.
In introducing the physical mechanics of the
palms we will address each palm's mechanics of
movement by describing what part of the body it
is training and how practice of this palm helps
train the physical body. When we discuss these
mechanics, we will be talking in physical,
mechanical terms. There will not be much
discussion of ch'i energy in this section. We are
getting down to detailed basics here.
Many practitioners think that the "secrets" of
the internal arts are found in the ch'i kung - the
energy work of the system. The ch'i and the
mental intention do play an important role in the
overall picture. However, today, in some circles,
ch'i has been built up as a mysterious power that,
when obtained, will allow the practitioner to have
"superhuman" abilities. In many cases ch'i and
93 
ch'i kung have been overemphasized to the point
where correct natural body alignments and
efficient movements have been practically ignored.
The real knowledge to an internal system
should not strictly be defined in terms of the ch'i
development. It is equally as important to gain
experiential knowledge of the physical mechanics
of the system - learning how to use your body the
most efficient and effective way possible. This is
what we will address in this section. When this is
accomplished, the development and efficient
movement of ch'i will be a natural progression.
Ch'i kung practice is then used to amplify this
natural process, and the good habits of body
mechanics that have been trained are combined
with breath and intention to form an integrated
mind and body.
In writing these sections on body mechanics
we are assuming that the practitioner has gained
an experiential knowledge of the two body motions
which were emphasized in the first volume. These
mechanics are: axial rotation around the skeleton
as trained in the "shaking palm" exercise, and
segmented whipping of the body as trained in the
"dragon back" exercise.
After describing the mechanics of the palm,
we will then describe the exact execution of the
palm exercise. This section will be aided by the
use of photographs of two types. One is a "slow
set" taken with a still camera. The other is a "fast
set" extracted from video footage.
The exercises section will be followed by some
descriptions of how the palm might be employed
in combat. In this section we will emphasize that
the application of these palms is not necessarily
exactly like it is practiced in the exercise set. Each
palm has numerous variations in application that
differ from the exercise. The important point to
grasp when practicing these palms is not the exact
palm shape, height, or angle of the strike, but,
more importantly, developing an understanding
of what part of the legs, hips, waist, and torso are
being trained and how the power is being issued.
When practicing, ask yourself, "How is the power
being developed in this palm?" Answering this
question will allow you to use the mechanics of
the palm strike in numerous situations, not just
the situation which pertains directly to the exercise.
Paying attention to only the application which is

an exact copy of the exercise itself will severely
limit your usage of these palms in fighting.
Throwing Palm
Introduction: In practice, the "throwing palm"
trains the practitioner's ability to totally relax the
hand, arm, and shoulder while utilizing centrifugal
force and gravity to help move blood and ch'i to
the hand. After practicing this exercise you will
notice that your hands become very red and feel
heavy and "full."
Practicing this exercise in a relaxed manner
really facilitates an opening up of the ch'i and
blood pathways in the arm and hand, and because
of this, it is important that you are quite warmed
up before you start this exercise. It is best to
practice the shaking palm, dragon back, and/or
single and double palm change striking exercises
prior to practicing the throwing palm. Because of
the great amount of ch'i and blood that naturally
moves to the hand when practicing this exercise,
if the body is not first already circulating the ch'i
and blood to a slightly elevated degree, the vigorous
movement of ch'i and blood to the hand which
occurs during this exercise can cause the hand to
ache as the channels and pathways in the hand
are dilated too quickly.
In the execution of the throwing palm exercise
it is also important that the arm and shoulder
remain very relaxed as the arm and hand are
"thrown" by the twisting of the torso and bending
of the body. The hand is "thrown" from an over
head position to a position between the legs and
just above the ground as if one is trying to flick
water off of the hand. To achieve this feeling the
wrist must also remain very loose.
Because the arm, hand, elbow, wrist, and
shoulder are very relaxed and the hand is being
thrown downward vigorously through a circular
arc, the movement facilitates a great rush of ch'i
and blood to the hand. This helps to open ch 'i and
blood channels in the arm and hand and teaches
the student to completely relax the shoulder and
arm while generating power from the legs and
torso. Additionally, the bending motion associated
with this exercise conditions the muscles of the
abdomen and lower back and the twisting motion
94 
further conditions the muscles around the hips
and inner thighs that were used in the shaking
palm and single palm change exercises.
When most beginners are first learning how to
use power in striking, they will inevitably "try"
and produce power by utilizing the muscles in the
shoulder and arm to forcibly produce a powerful
effect. Usually a beginner's idea of power is such
that when they are thinking of striking, their
mind automatically engages the muscles of the
upper body. Because this exercise does not really
look like a strike, the practitioner's mental image
of striking someone is less vivid and thus it is
easier to relax the shoulder and arm and generate
the "power" from the lower body.
The extreme twisting and stretching of the
body in the area of the rib cage with the "wind-up"
and the complete collapse of this area when
bending forward aids in training the muscles
around and between the ribs and the abdominal
muscles in both flexibility and coordination. These
areas of the torso become important to the
production of a vertical component of power
when striking with subtle power. The execution
of this exercise also loosens the spine and helps to
maintain the health of the lungs and kidneys
because the arching of the spine and twisting of
the body when the arm is raised up, followed by
the bending of the spine and the body with the
downward throwing motion, aids in helping the
kidneys and lungs move within their respective
internal cavities.
Performance of the Exercise: The throwing
palm exercise is performed as follows:
1) Begin in a "horse" stance with the palms held
in beside the ribs. See slow set photo 1.
2) Extend the right hand forward and bring the
left hand in behind the right elbow. See slow set
photo 2.
Raise the right hand upward with the palm
facing downward and twist the torso to the right.
Relax the area around the right rib cage and allow
these muscles to expand with the lifting of the
arm. Twist the hips as far as you comfortably can.
Inhale as the hand is raised. Allow the left hand
to fall back down by the ribs with the palm facing
up. Ensure that the shoulder remains relaxed. If

1 2
5 6
Throwing Palm (slow set)
you would like to facilitate a greater stretch in the
area of the ribs, you can twist your right hand
until the thumb is facing downward. The slow set
photo shows the palm facing downward, the fast
set photo (#6) displays the twisting of the hand to
a greater degree. See slow set photo 3.
4) While maintaining a completely relaxed
shoulder, arm, and hand, twist the torso back to
the left while bending straight over from the
waist. Audibly exhale through the nose with this
motion as you did in the shaking palm exercise
described in the first volume. (To review this
breathing method, refer to pages 156 and 157 of
the first volume). Allow the hand to be thrown
between your legs with the bending of the waist
and twisting of the body. Allow the wrist to be
very loose and snap at the last moment as if you
are trying to flick water off of your hand.
You can see in the photos for the fast set shown
95 
3 4 
 
 
on the next page that in the execution of this
segment of the exercise the elbow is brought
down first and leads the lower arm and hand (fast
set photos 7 and 8). This occurs because the arm
is relaxed and as the power is generated from the
body it creates a chain reaction on the arm much
like a whip. The shoulder is thrown first (fast set
photo 7), then the elbow follows (fast set photo 8)
and then the hand is subsequently whipped
downward rapidly in an arc (between photos 8
and 9 of the fast set). This chain reaction, or chain
of movement, will naturally occur if the
mechanics of the body motion are correct and the
shoulder, arm, and hand are relaxed. You do not
need to think about it. It is the centrifugal force of
the hand arcing around the axis of the elbow
which provides the first moment of power in this
exercise which results from the leg, hip, shoulder
connection. The next moment of power in the

chain is facilitated by the "flicking" of the fingers
in an arc around the axis of the wrist.
As the hand moves downward, you should
hear the rushing sound of the air passing your
hand. If your arm, wrist, or hand is stiff, the
rushing sound will not be there or will not be too
prominent. All the joints should be relaxed and
supple and the wrist should be flicked at the very
end of the movement in order to complete the
chain of power, or whipping effect.
Be careful not to hit the ground with you hand
and do not allow your arm to swing too far under
your legs or you might hit yourself in the groin
with your arm. The shoulder is very relaxed and
hanging downward in this position. The energy
of this strike is primarily downward with just a
slight swing to the rear. Do not swing to far out in
front of you when striking
In this position, the spine is rounded and the
shoulder and hip relaxed. The knees are bent such
that the legs carry the weight of the body and
there is not unnecessary stress on the lower back.
The lower back should be relaxed. See slow set
photo 4.
5) From the downward hanging position, begin
to raise up and bring the right hand upwards with
the palm facing up. As the right palm comes up,
bring the left arm underneath the right.
Both
palms are facing upwards. See slow set photo 5.
6) Continue bringing the palms upward to face
level. See slow set photo 6.
7) You are now ready to execute this palm on the
other side. Continue to allow the left palm to rise
to the position the right palm is in as shown in
photo 2. Now repeat the steps on the other side.
Application in Fighting: In application, the
throwing palm emulates the power generated at
the very tip of a whip. Park's teacher told him that
in China the whip was a very popular weapon and
this palm is an attempt to generate the stinging
power of the whip with a strike of the hand.
This palm is used to create a very uncomfortable
stinging or burning sensation on the area of the
opponent's body where it is delivered. This feeling
is similar to what is referred to by some people as
the "fire" palm. The energy of this palm does not
penetrate as deeply into the opponent's body as
some of the other palms, but the intense stinging
96 
or burning sensation it inflicts will definitely get
the opponent's attention. If delivered properly,
there will be welts on the opponent's body which
rise up to produce an exact outline of your fingers
and/or hand.
The "flicking" motion of the wrist and the
image of flicking water off the hand become
especially important when training to use the
throwing palm in fighting. This palm can be
delivered from almost any angle, it does not need
to be applied as a downward strike as practised in
the exercise. The key in its usage is to allow the
wrist to be totally relaxed and let the power
generated by the body transfer through a loose
and relaxed shoulder and elbow and then allow
the motion to "flick" the wrist. It is as if one is
cracking a whip or snapping a towel.
When applied to the opponent, this palm is
typically delivered to soft, fleshy areas of the body
for the best effect. When applied to the arms or
legs it is usually used as a block which is
immediately followed by another strike to body,
neck, or face. However, it can also be used
effectively as a primary strike which rakes the eyes
or smacks the face or head in a vulnerable area.
The most dangerous area to hit with this palm is
the opponent's temple. This strike can be delivered
with either the fingers or the whole hand and the
back of the hand works as well as the front of the
hand.
Slapping Palm
Introduction: The slapping palm exercise trains
the body to develop vertical striking power in a
downwards moving direction. In the execution of
this exercise, one side of the torso will be trained
to relax, open and expand and then compress
downwards as the palm is thrown along a strictly
vertical path. To take full advantage of the muscles
between the ribs aiding in the power of this strike,
breathing will also play an important role in this
strike.
The expansion and compression of the torso
(area between the hips and shoulders) will be
utilized in this and the next palm (lifting palm)
exercise and is an important component in
generating vertical striking power. This does not
  

              1                            2                            3                              4                            5 
 

              6                            7                            8                              9                            10 
 

              11                          12                          13                            14                          15 

                         
Throwing Palm Change (fast set) 
 

97 

only apply to directly upward or downward striking
motions because eventually your strikes that are
applied directly in front of you can have a vertical
component to them and thus the execution of
these exercises aids the development of all striking
possibilities.
In this exercise, the muscles in and around the
rib cage must learn how to relax and expand and
then contract in a unified and coordinated manner.
However, this is not a "tense" muscle contraction.
It is more like an intentional dropping, or
collapsing, of the ribs. The expansion and
contraction which naturally occur as a result of
this exercise will "wake up" muscles that you are
not accustomed to using and teach them how to
coordinate with the rest of the body to provide
unified whole body power. If the exercise is
practiced for a sufficient length of time, the
coordination of the entire body and the breathing
will begin to naturally occur and will become
habit.
As with all developmental exercises and their
corresponding applications, these exercises are
executed with big movements while the actual
movements in application become quite small,
quick, and subtle. In order to develop subtle
vertical striking power, the tendons, ligaments,
and muscles need to be conditioned, the joints
loosened, and the proper mechanics trained in
the execution of the slapping palm and the lifting
palm.
The downwards compression of the torso is a
drawing together of the muscles in the torso in a
completely vertical manner. The spine remains
vertical and the power is generated by rotating the
body around its center axis and compressing the
torso. In this exercise the torso (from hip to
shoulder) works like a spring. When the palm is
lifted up, the spring is stretched. When the palm
is thrown downward, the spring is released and
snaps back to its original shape. The spine is to
remain straight as this exercise is practiced. A
common mistake is to let the body collapse forward
and thus the connection between the shoulder
and torso is sacrificed.
In the execution of this movement, the arm
and shoulder are relaxed and thus the power
comes from the torso and legs. The movement in
the area of the torso is similar to that of the
98 
"throwing palm" exercise, but the motions are
much more subtle. Also, the "slapping palm"
does not utilize the "flick" of the wrist like the
throwing palm does. It is a more solid, penetrating,
downward strike. This is one reason it is good to
practice the throwing palm before the "slapping
palm," it provides a good warm up and stretching
of the body.
The last component of power utilized in the
execution of this strike is the lower torso and legs.
If you watch Park Bok Nam execute this exercise
on this book's companion video, you will notice
that there is a slight movement of the lower body
up and down as the striking hand is brought up
and then thrown down. The dropping of the body
with the downward thrust of the palm in this
exercise helps to work the legs and the coordination
of the upper and lower body. However, it is
important to know that this up and down motion
of the body is not employed in actual application.
In actual application the body will not move up
and down in this manner. The up and down
motion of the lower body is simply a part of the
exercise designed to teach the student to sink and
relax the body with the strike and it helps to train
the legs. Like all motions in Pa Kua Chang, this
component of the exercise will eventually become
very subtle when this type of palm application is
used.
The subtlety of any up and down motion of
the lower body when applying a Pa Kua strike is
important to understand because some
practitioners mistakenly believe that dropping
the body weight with a strike by relaxing and
physically lowering the body is the way to get
"internal power." While dropping the body weight
with a strike can certainly help an individual
develop a strong punch (especially big people), we
stay away from using this method of developing
power when applying Pa Kua because speed and
maneuverability are sacrificed when this method
is employed. Pa Kua Chang is an art that applies
its strikes when the practitioner is continuously
moving. It is hard to keep moving if you are
dropping your weight with every strike.
Additionally, Pa Kua practitioners learn how to
strike numerous times in a matter of seconds. If
the practitioner has to drop the body weight with
every strike, it slows down the striking

combinations significantly.
Performance of the Exercise:
1) Begin in a "horse" stance with the palms held
in beside the ribs. See slow set photo 1.
2) Raise the right palm with the palm facing
upwards as shown in slow set photo 2.
3) Turn the hips and waist to the right allowing
this rotational motion to continue up the body
and rotate the shoulder and twist the arm over so
that the palm is facing downward. At this point
the shoulder should remain relaxed and the area
of the rib cage up to the area under the arm pit on
the right side of the body should relax and expand.
It is important to feel an opening in the area of the
right rib cage when executing this move.
The whole torso, from hip to shoulder, on the
right side should feel like it is being stretched
open, but the shoulder muscles should not tense
and raise up and the elbow should not be brought
up too high. Because the arm is being lifted, the
shoulder will naturally rise to a small degree, but
the muscles around the shoulder should remain
relaxed.
The left shoulder should also remain relaxed
downward. Do not allow the left shoulder to rise
upward when the right arm is raised - you should
actually feel like the left shoulder is sinking
downward when the right arm comes up. This is
a subtle sinking and is facilitated by a degree of
looseness in the area of the sternum, not because
the shoulders are being moved to any large degree.
As the left shoulder sinks downward, also feel the
rib cage on the left side compress (sink downward).
As the right rib cage expands and the left rib cage
sinks down, you should feel a slight sheering and
twisting movement in the area of the sternum if
the ribs/sternum junctures are supple enough.
Inhale during the execution of this movement.
The inhale will also help the left side rib cage
expand as the arm is raised up.
The rotation of the hips and the expansion of
the torso in the area of the rib cage are the two
important motions to execute properly in this
move. See slow set photo 3. Notice that the palm
is facing straight downwards as if it is lying flat on
a high table which is parallel to the floor.
4) When the palm is in the upper position and
99 
ready to be brought downwards, the power for
this motion comes from allowing the expanded
rib cage on the right side to contract with the
exhale and turning the hips swiftly back towards
the left (left hip moving back). While this motion
is occurring the rib cage on the left side remains
relaxed downward. Ensure that the hips and
shoulders stay in alignment. Do not allow the
right shoulder to thrust forward too far.
It is important that the palm be brought straight
down along a vertical trajectory. It should not be
thrust forward when it comes down. As in all Pa
Kua strikes, the joints of the body remain very
loose and supple and the arm very relaxed. This
being the case, the power generated from the
body first affects the elbow and the elbow is
brought down before the palm. This can be easily
seen in the fast set photos 6 and 7. You do not
need to force this to occur, it will naturally occur
if the movements are correct and the arm is
relaxed.
When the palm is brought down, allow the
butt of the palm to "snap" downwards while the
fingers are brought slightly upwards in such a way
that the palm ends up being flat as if setting on a
table. In this exercise you do not want the fingers
to extend down past the level of the wrist as they
did in the throwing palm. When the wrist snaps
down and the fingers pull up slightly, it feels as if
you are striking with the butt of the palm, but you
actually strike with the heart of the palm (palm
center). In the throwing palm you allowed the
fingers to slap down and follow through, here you
want them to pull up slightly so that the palm is
flat. This snapping motion of the wrist is an
important element in applying the final bit of
power to this palm strike. Park says that his
teacher strongly emphasized "wrist power" in
applying all Pa Kua strikes. See slow set photo 4.
5) After the palm is thrown on the right side, the
right palm turns upwards and comes up the center
line of the body. The left palm follows behind it
coming from the elbow of the right arm, up the
right forearm and past the right wrist. This motion
was described in volume one when we discussed
the fan chang exercises. See slow set photo 5.
6) Now the left hand raises up and the hips and
shoulders turn to the left. The exercise is then
executed on the left side. See slow set photos 6

1 2
5 6
Slapping Palm (slow set)
and 7.
During the evolution of this exercise the knees
should face directly forward. Do not allow the
knees to buckle inward when throwing the palms.
One of the most common errors beginners make
when executing any of the palm exercises from
the horse stance is that they allow the knees to
move too much. The reason this occurs is that the
hip and pelvis are not loose enough to allow the
hips to turn freely without the knees moving also.
If you notice that your knees are moving
side-to-side when you are practicing any of these
exercises, you will need to back track and practice
the shaking palm exercise slowly until the hips
loosen up sufficiently.
100 
3 4 
7 
 
Practice Variation: In the execution of this
exercise, the strike can be practiced as either a
"heavy" or a "shock" strike. The general
difference between the heavy and shock strikes
was explained in the first volume of this book on
page 167. As these variations apply to this palm
one can imagine the difference between the
slamming down of a bear's paw versus the
cracking of a whip.
In order to practice the "heavy" strike, imagine
that the arm is very heavy when you lift it up and
drop it down. When the hand reaches the lowest
point in its downward motion, allow it to stop
there with a "thud" as if the arm and hand were
just dead weight falling out of the sky. Also
  

 
              1                            2                            3                              4                            5 
 

 
              6                            7                            8                              9                            10 
 

              11                          12                          13                            14                          15 

                         
Throwing Palm Change (fast set) 
 

101 

imagine that the energy of the strike continues
and penetrates down into the ground when the
hand stops.
In order to practice the "shock" strike variation,
when the palm is thrown down and reaches its
lowest point imagine that you are slapping the
surface of a tub of water. As the palm "strikes"
the water, allow it to bounce back up slightly as if
was rebounding off of the surface. This "bounce
back" is subtle and should be allowed to occur as
a natural recoil. Do not physically force this
rebounding motion. If you do, your muscles will
be too tense.
The image of the energy of the shock strike
should be as if you are slapping a ball to the
ground and catching it with the rebounding of the
palm as it bounces back up very quickly (faster
than a normal rubber ball would travel).
Application in Fighting: The slapping palm is
applied in fighting when any vertical (downward)
strike is required. It could be a downward moving
strike to any part of the opponent's body leg, foot,
arm, hand, back, or head. The crown of the head
is an especially dangerous place to employ this
strike in its "shock" variation. Sometimes the
slapping palm is also applied as a simultaneous
double strike with one palm hitting the head and
the other hitting the chest. This double strike is a
nice follow-up to a single palm change maneuver
which opens up the opponent's center.
One other useful application of the slapping
palm occurs after the practitioner has thrown an
opponent to the ground. Immediately after the
opponent is thrown to the ground, the practitioner
will execute a slapping palm to the opponent's
face, chest, or back, depending on how the
opponent has landed. One precaution to use in the
execution of this kind of strike is to avoid bending
over at the waist to reach the opponent. If you
bend over at the waist in order to strike the opponent,
it will be easy for him to grab you and pull you off
balance. In this situation it is better to kneel down on
one leg (with that knee not quite touching the
ground). This way the upper body remains upright
and the legs are in a strong position to quickly
stand up again and keep moving should that be
necessary. Also, in this position it will be more
difficult for the opponent to try and
102 
pull you off balance.
The slapping palm strike does not have to move
in a strictly downward direction as it is practiced
in the exercise, the downward motion can also be
applied with a horizontal component (forward
movement). This strike is similar in application to
the "splitting fist" of Hsing-I Ch'uan. When
employing this palm, the practitioner can use the
"heavy" or the "shock" application. The heavy
strike is used when you want to control the
opponent's body or break bones. The slapping
palm is very effectively used in arm breaking
techniques when it is combined with the lifting
palm. The shock energy is used when you want to
damage the opponent internally and is usually
applied to the chest or head.
Starting on the next page we show two examples
of how the slapping palm might be used in
application.
Example 1:
1) The opponent tries to come inside Park's
defenses by deflecting Park's forward arm too the
side. See photo number 2.
2) Park pulls down on the opponent's arm with
his right palm. Even though this downward
pulling motion is not a "strike," it employs the
mechanics of the slapping palm. Keep in mind
that the execution of any of these palm mechanics
does not have to be a "strike." The applications
can include pushing, pulling, leading, guiding,
trapping and many other types of martial art
technique. See photo 3.
3) As Park blocks the opponent's left arm, the
opponent attempts to hit Park with his right arm.
Park once again uses the slapping palm to trap the
opponent's attack. Notice that Park blocks the
opponent's upper arm so as to better control the
opponent. As Park is blocking he prepares to
strike the opponent's head with a slapping palm.
See photo 4.
3) Park continues to control the opponent's right
arm as he begins to execute the slapping palm to
the opponent's head. See photo 5. 5) Park
executes a slapping palm to the top of the
opponent's head.
Example 2:
1) Park's opponent reaches to grab his wrist. See
  

Slapping Palm Application #1 

1 2 3 

4 5 6 

photo 1.
2) Park's opponent grabs the arm and tries to pull
Park off balance. See photo 2.
3) Park begins to step backward and out to an
angle to the opponent's right side. At the same
time he rolls his wrist around to place his hand on
top of the opponent's wrist and brings his other hand
up to the opponent's hand. Stepping out to an angle
and rolling over the wrist will dissipate the
opponent's pulling force and put the opponent in a
disadvantageous position. See photo 3.
4) Park begins to step backward and begins to
pull the opponent's arm across the opponent's body
in order to off balance the opponent. See photo
4.
5) As the opponent begins to loose his balance,
Park continues pulling the opponent's arm across
the opponent's body as he steps backwards. Many
times in the execution of the sequence show in
photos 4 and 5 Park will execute the "dragon
back" whipping motion as he is pulling the
opponent. This not only off balances the
opponent, but sends a shock wave up the arm to
the opponent's neck. This technique produces a
whiplash effect on the opponent's neck. See
photo 5.
6) Park releases the opponent's arm with his right
hand as he continues to control the opponent

103 
  

Slapping Palm Application #2 

 

1 2 3
 

4 5 6 
 

7 8 9 

104 

Slapping Palm Application #2 (con’t)
10
with his left hand still grabbing the opponent's
right wrist. He also begins to move out to the
opponent's right flank. See photo 6.
7) Park continues moving to the opponent's flank
and, as the opponent falls forward, he begins to
execute the slapping palm to the opponent's
back. See photos 7 and 8.
8) Park executes a slapping palm to the opponent's
back with his right hand and begins to immediately
follow the right slapping palm with a left slapping
palm. See photo 9.
9) Park executes the slapping palm with the left
hand and then follows that with a right elbow.
See photos 10 through 12.
Although this application may seem like a
time consuming sequence of events when it is
broken down step-by-step, Park's execution of
this sequence is blindingly fast, especially the
one-two-three combination of two slapping palms
followed by the right elbow.
Lifting Palm
Introduction: The lifting palm exercise trains
the body to develop vertical striking power in an
upwards moving direction. Its expression of power
is exactly opposite of the slapping palm. The
expansion and compression of the torso (combined
with the rotation of the body around the center
105
 
11 12 
axis) is also the key source of power in this palm,
however, whereas the power in the slapping palm
was applied during the compression phase, the
power during the lifting palm is applied during
the expansion phase.
One thing to notice when performing this
exercise is the relative motion of the left and right
sides of the rib cage when applying the strike. You
should notice that while one side is expanding
with the application of the strike, the other is
compressing, or sinking. This action also occurs
during the slapping palm when one arm is raised
up to strike and the ribs on that side open, the ribs
on the other side close as the shoulder sinks.
The movement and action of the respective
sides of the body in the area of the ribs is consistent
with the theory of yin and yang. In order to have
power and stability, the body must be balanced. If
one side moves forward, the other side moves
back, if one side moves up, the other side moves
down - this is how we maintain balance and
stability when fighting and applying power. In
the execution of the slapping palm and the lifting
palm, there are two forces which should be
balanced. One is the respective forward and
backward motion of the hips and shoulders and
the other is the upward and downward motion of
the opposite sides of the torso.
When twisting the body around its center, the
hips and shoulders on the side of the nonstriking
 

(receptive, yin) side should move backward with an
equal and opposite force and intention as the hips
and shoulders on the side of the striking (active,
yang) hand. This not only provides balance in the
body, it also allows the body to generate more
power around the center. It might be called the
"wing-nut" principle. If you had to unscrew a wing
nut, you wouldn't just push on one side, you would
apply equal and opposite force on each side. This
was the main principle of body mechanics and
motion that was practiced in the shaking palm
exercise described in the first volume.
In the practice and application of the slapping
palm and the lifting palm, the motion of the body
moving around its center (wing-nut principle) is
combined with the equal and opposite upward and
downward motions of the upper torso and chest in
the area of the ribs. In the slapping palm, the ribs of
the active hand were expanded when the hand was
raised upward and the opposite ribs compressed
(relaxed downward). During the execution of the
strike, the striking side ribs were compressed while
the opposite side ribs held their compression in
order to support the compression of the active side.
When executing the lifting palm, the power of the
expansion on the striking side is greatly aided by the
simultaneous compression on the passive, or
nonstriking side.
The principle of using both sides of the body in
an equal and opposite expression is one of the key
developmental concepts to grasp in the practice of
the lifting palm. An uncommon degree of
suppleness of the muscles between the ribs, around
the sternum, and around the spine in the mid-back
region helps facilitate these body mechanics and the
development of power.
Performance of the Exercise:
1) Begin in a "horse" stance with the palms held
in beside the ribs. See slow set photo 1.
2) Bring the left hand forward to about face level
and then bring the right hand underneath the left
elbow and execute a fan charts maneuver. The
right hand comes up in front of the face and the left
hand is by the right elbow. See slow set photo
number 2.
3) From this position turn the right hip and
shoulder to the right, rotating the body around its
center. Do not allow the right hand to drop down
106
lower than the level of the shoulder when you
turn the body. Ideally you want the right hand to
stay in front of the face and not be dropped down
in an effort to "cock" the strike. However, it is
recommended that beginners allow the hand to
drop down to about shoulder level when first
executing this palm so that it will be easier to get
a feel for what the body is doing.
When the body turns, allow the right shoulder
to relax and sink down and allow the ribs on the
right side of the body to compress. Again, this
"compression" is not a muscular adjustment you
have to force, it is merely a relaxing of the area of
the ribs and an "intention" of compression in that
area. (There is no slow set photo of this move.
Please refer to the fast set photos.)
4) Now, twist the body around its center so that
the right hip and shoulder move forward. At the
same time, thrust the palm upward. As the body
twists and the palm is thrown, allow the right side
of the torso to relax and extend while the left side
compresses downward with the drawing back of
the left hand and the sinking of the left shoulder.
If this is done properly you should actually feel a
very slight shearing motion up and down the
center of your chest in the area of the sternum. See
slow set photo 3.
In this movement, there is also a slight pushing
upward with the legs as the palm is thrust upward.
It is not very noticeable in the body, but you
should feel the legs actively participating in the
upward thrusting of the palm.
When the palm is about to reach its apex, the
wrist is thrust quickly upward in a snapping
motion while the fingers are pulled down slightly.
This is a similar action to that performed in the
slapping palm, although the palm is facing up
instead of down. As we will discuss later, the
"wrist power" is very important in every palm
strike. Not only does the wrist power help optimize
the mechanics of the movement, additionally,
the wrist, elbow, and shoulder articulations
stimulate the motor nerves of the arm. The more
flexibility, suppleness, and movement there is in
the joints, the more messages are sent by the
sensory nerves to the brain telling the brain to
send more energy to that part of the body.
With the upwards thrusting of the palm, the
practitioner exhales audibly. The mechanics of
 
  

1 2 3 4 

 
5 6

Lifting Palm (slow set) 

the dragon back can also be used by more
advanced practitioners to aid in the development
of power for this strike. As the body turns around
its center to thrown the palm, the spine can add a
subtle whipping motion to the movement. This
motion can be seen in Park's execution of this
palm on the companion video tape.
The dragon back motion actually occurs in all
of these palms to some degree, depending on the
palm. All of the palms strikes are a combination
of yin and yang motion which is derived from the
shaking palm and the dragon back. In all palms
there is linear and wave-like movements executed
simultaneously. Executing the dragon back
motion in a palm strike also excites the sensory
nerves of the spine facilitating a greater degree of
energy being sent through the body and to the
muscles which are performing the movements.
5) After the palm is thrown on the right side,
execute a fan chang maneuver to prepare for the
left side strike. See slow set photos 4 and 5.
6) Repeat the exercise on the left side. See slow
set photo 6.
Application in Fighting: The lifting palm is
applied in fighting whenever an upward moving
strike is delivered. This strike could be to the
groin, the arm, the chin, the body, or even the face
if the opponent has bent forward. In many
instances, this palm will be immediately applied
to the area of the opponent's chin after the
application of a slapping palm or a straight palm

107 
  

   
   
   
   
   
   
     
              1                            2                            3                                4                            5 
    
   
   
   
   
   
   
                6                            7                            8                               9                            10 
 
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
              11                          12                          13                              14                        15 
                             
  Lifting Palm Change
  (fast set) 

    
   
   
   
   
   
   
108 

strike to the chest. In applying this palm, the
fingers do not have to be facing straight forward.
For instance, if one were to hit the opponent under
the chin with this palm, the fingers could be turned
to the side as the heart or heel of the palm hits the
opponent.
Another common application of the lifting palm
occurs in conjunction with a simultaneous usage of
the slapping palm. One can catch the opponent's
arm and apply the lifting palm strike to the elbow
while simultaneously applying the slapping palm
to the opponent's wrist with the other hand. This is
a nice arm breaking application.
In the photo sequence shown on the next page,
Park demonstrates a use of the lifting palm after
setting up the opponent with an application of the
"hiding flower under leaf" maneuver. The
application is as follows:
1) The opponent attempts to move inside Park's
defenses by rolling around his wrist from the
outside while stepping in towards Park. See photos
1 through 3.
2) Park blocks the opponent's arm with a rolling
block that moves the opponent's arm outside and
down. The motion is one which comes from the
"scooping moon from sea bottom" exercise
presented in the first volume. See photos 4 and 5.
3) Park catches the opponent's hand with his left
hand while continuing to guard the opponent's
elbow with his right forearm. See photo 6.
4) Park steps in with his left foot and then
executes a 180 degree pivot around that leg. As he
begins to pivot, his left arm hooks underneath the
opponent's arm and his shoulder is planted into the
opponent's upper arm. This maneuver causes the
opponent to spin around a tornado like force set up
by Park's rapid pivoting. See photos 7 through
10.
5) As the opponent begins to loose his balance,
Park quickly changes the direction of his rotation
and turns back into the opponent with a lifting
palm strike. The opponent's momentum carries
him into the strike, thus increasing the
effectiveness of the strike.
This type of application, where the practitioner
sets up the opponent's momentum to be
accelerated in one direction and then the
practitioner quickly changes direction to take
advantage of that momentum is very prevalent in
109
Pa Kua Chang.
The lifting palm is also frequently combined
with the slapping palm as either a one-two
combination, or as a simultaneous two palm
strike. One palm strikes upward and the other
strikes downward. As mentioned previously, this
double palm application is useful as an arm
breaking technique.
Chopping Palm
Introduction: The palm exercises demonstrated
in the first volume of this book series developed
a palm striking foundation that primarily worked
on striking straight to the forward direction. The
last two palm exercises worked on developing
the ability to strike in the vertical direction (up
and down). In practicing the two preliminary
palms (shaking palm and dragon back) and the
first two of the forty eight months palms (single
palm and double palm) the practitioner develops
the ability to generate power by rotating the
body around its central axis and by a segmented
whipping of the spine. The next of the forty eight
month palms (throwing palm) facilitated a
loosening of the entire body in the twisting and
bending motion and helped the practitioner learn
how to completely relax the shoulder and arm.
The next two forty eight month palms (slapping
palm and lifting palm) trained the torso in the
area of the rib cage to generate power in a
coordinated expansion and contraction of the
body.
The next three exercises will train the ability
to strike diagonally, to the sides, and the rear. In
executing these motions repetitively in the
exercises, the muscles of the lower and middle
torso will be conditioned and trained to
coordinate with the hips, spine, and upper torso
in a variety of different ways thus forming a
solid connection and strength between the upper
and lower parts of the body. After practicing
these exercises the practitioner will notice a big
difference in the ability to generate power in the
performance of previous exercises such as the
shaking palm.
The chopping palm will develop strength,
flexibility, and coordination in the area of the
flanks (sides of the torso), lower chest, and mid- 
 
  

   
Lifting Palm Application 
   
 
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
1 2 3
    
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
4 5 6 
    
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
7 8 9 
   
   
   
   
   
   
110 

  Lifting Palm Application (con’t)
                      10                                                  11                                              12
back. The twisting motion of this palm, combined
with the extended positioning of the arms and
hands, works the area of the torso which surrounds
the lower part of the rib cage. This helps build a
strong connection between the upper and lower
parts of the torso and suppleness in the mid-back
region. Exercises four, five, and six of the
"standard eight" ch'i kung set shown in Chapter 7
are excellent exercises to practice in order to
prepare oneself for executing the chopping palm.
Like those exercises, because of the twisting
motion in the mid-torso region, this exercise aids in
maintaining a healthy liver.
The mechanics of this exercise will also develop
skill and power in striking across one's own body.
So far in this set we have learned to strike straight
forward with one palm and both palms, straight up,
and straight down with a single palm on the same
side of the body as the striking hand. In training
this exercise the practitioner learns to strike across
the body in order to develop a diagonal striking
force. As discussed in the applications section of
this palm, this type of "shearing" force is used very
successfully in controlling the opponent's body in
the execution of chin na or throwing techniques.
Another important aspect to consider in the
execution of the chopping palm is the articulation of
the wrist. Because the wrist motion and follow
through is very important in all of these palms, we
111 
 
will take a brief side track here and discuss this
concept.
Wrist Power and Follow Through: In each of
these palm exercises, the power developed in the
motion of the wrist is very important. If the wrist is
not loose and the wrist action not proper in the
execution of the palm strike, the power and energy of
the strike will not be complete. The wrist action
provides the "follow through" which completes the
energy in the movement. Baseball pitchers,
basketball players, bowlers, golfers, tennis players,
and many other athletes understand the importance of
the follow through in the execution of their
movements. Just as the baseball pitcher will use the
articulation of his wrist and follow through in order to
vary the type of pitch he will deliver, the Pa Kua
Chang practitioner will do the same in order to
change the energy of the strike which is executed.
Before we discuss the type of wrist action
associated with each of these palms, we will first
need to establish some vocabulary of wrist
motion so that these concepts will be easier to
explain and understand. The wrist can rotate
around three axes as shown in the illustrations on
this page. It can rotate along the axis of the forearm
and middle finger as shown in illustrations 1 and 2.
It can flex and extend around the axis of the wrist
itself as shown in illustrations 3 and 4. Lastly,
  

 
1 ‐ Outward Rotation                                                      2 ‐ Inward Rotation 
    of the Forearm                                                                  of the Forearm 
 

 
 
              3 – Flexing the Hand            4 – Extending the                5 – Inward Contraction   
                                                                            Hand                                    of the Hand 

can contract and expand around the axis of the

wrist's center as shown in illustrations 5 and 6
(imagine the palm flat on a table, the center of the
wrist held stable and the fingers moving back and
forth in an arc around the wrist's center).
In the above illustrations 3 through 6 you will
notice that the fingers are moving in an arcing
pattern around the wrist. As variations to these
four movements, these actions can also be
performed with the fingertips held in place and
the wrist moving up and down or side to side.
Now that we have defined these motions, we will
discuss their significance to the palm exercises.
In the shaking palm, dragon back palm, single
palm, and double palm striking exercises discussed
in the first volume, the "wrist snapping" was
performed as a result of two motions of the wrist.
The first is the rotational motion. The wrist was
turned and "snapped" at the end of the strike as it
quickly followed the rotational motion of the
bones in the forearm. You can think of this hand
motion as being a sharp rotation of the hand
 
              6 – Outward Contraction 
                        of the Hand 
around the axis of the middle finger. Additionally,
because the palm is facing away from the practitioner
and the fingers are pointing straight up and the end of
the strike, there is a second articulation of the wrist in
that it bends along its horizontal axis (the extending
motion shown in illustration 4).
This ending position of the wrist, palm, and hand
in the execution of the palm striking exercises
shown in the first volume of this book is not only
important for the development of proper wrist
power and follow through, it is also an important
aspect of the mental intention and energy of these
exercises. If the hand is held limp or too relaxed

112 
  

 
1 2 3  

 
4 5

Chopping Palm (slow set) 

with the fingers facing forward instead of
upward as shown in illustration 4, the follow
through of the strike will be incorrect, the
intention will be lost, and the palm shape will
not facilitate optimum energy flow to the hand.
Whenever a power palm strike is thrown the
mental intention follows the movement and then
extends beyond the hand when the motion reaches
its apex. However, it is very important that the
mind immediately come back to the hand after the
projection of intention occurs with the energy flow
of the strike. With this intention, energy will
continue to flow to the hand and it will be available
for the next move. As an additional aid in keeping
the energy flowing to the hand, the palm shape
should be such that it is not limp or lax. There
should be a slight bit of tension across
the heart of the palm. This concept applies to
all of the palm striking exercises and it is part
of the follow through.
In the throwing palm exercise, the wrist was
held very loose and the hand was allowed to
whip in an arc around the axis of the wrist
(flexing of the hand as shown in illustration 3).
It is as if you are waving "good-bye" to
someone. This action helps to provide the
stinging power associated with this palm in
that the fingers act as the tip of the whip.
While most of the throwing palm applications
are performed with the hand flexing for a
forehand strike and extending for a back hand
strike, there are some applications where the
hand will be whipped in the arc of the inward
contraction. This type of strike is usually
applied to the eyes or bridge of the nose.

113 

In both the slapping palm and lifting palm
exercises, the wrist articulation was around the
same axis as in the throwing palm, but the hand
was extending (illustration 4) instead of flexing.
Another difference is that in the throwing palm
the fingers arced around the wrist axis while in
the slapping palm and lifting palm the fingers are
held fairly static while the wrist snaps up or down
to produce power in the butt of the palm. The
only difference is that in the slapping palm the
palm is facing down and the force is downward
while in the lifting palm the palm is facing up and
the force is upward.
In the chopping palm we encounter the third
type of wrist articulation. The chopping palm
exercise itself utilizes the outward expansion
movement as shown in illustration 6 (the only
difference being that in the exercise the palm is
facing up). However, in application, the chopping
palm utilizes both the inward contraction and
outward expansion (as shown in both illustrations
5 and 6) and it utilizes these motions with the
palm facing up (yin palm) or down (yang palm).
Performance of the Exercise:
1) Begin in a "horse" stance with the palms held
in by the ribs. See slow set photo 1.
2) Start this motion by bringing the left palm out
to the front of your body slightly and then curl the
fingers in towards the body while keeping the
palm facing upwards. Continue the twisting
motion of the left hand as the fingers move
behind the back past the left flanks to the rear.
Begin to twist the hips to the left and start to
throw the right palm across the body to the left
side. The palm is facing upward and the wrist is
bent so that the hand is in the position of outward
expansion. While the right palm is moving across
the body to the left, the left hand is moving back
behind the body to the right. The left hand is in
the position of inward contraction with the palm
facing up. The left hand is out away from the
body. Do not have it come in close to the back.
The movement of the left hand balances the
motion around the body's center and facilitates a
greater amount of twisting in the area of the torso.
This twisting helps to open and stretch the muscles
of the chest and mid back. In application, the
114
nonstriking hand will help the power of the strike by
hooking or grabbing the opponent's arm and pulling
him off balance while the strike is being executed.
This technique can be seen in the chopping palm
applications shown on page 116.
3) Once the right palm is thrown, the right hand
curls under with the fingers facing back in towards
the body. The right hand remains facing upward.
As the right hand curls under, the left hand is
brought back by the left side ribs.
4) The body begins to twist back to the right as
the right hand moves toward the right flank of the
body and then back behind the body.
Application in Fighting: In fighting, the chopping
palm is not used as a straight strike, but is a
deflective, or shearing strike or force, executed
with the side of the hand. It is primarily used in
attacking the opponent's joints, temple, neck,
between muscles, or in raking the ribs.
While the chopping palm can be used as a "strike"
in the percussive sense, it can also be used as a
shearing force in the application of many chin na
(locking) and throwing techniques. The shearing
force of the chopping palm is used to control and
offset the opponent's body during a throw or lock
and can also be used to break the joints in the
application of chin na. For instance, if you caught
the opponent's wrist with one hand when he
punched and then applied the chopping palm as a
circular, upward changing to downward, shearing
force to the area just above the opponent's elbow,
this technique would be an excellent arm lock or
arm break. This technique would be one that
would employ the inward contraction of the hand.
Another nice place to execute the cutting palm in
the inward contraction mode is just under the
opponent's nose (on the upper lip). This strike is
executed with the palm facing down and the
shearing force moving across the opponent's face
and backward in order to throw his head back at an
angle. This force is typically applied while you
have hold of one of the opponent's arms. During
this maneuver you could also simultaneously be
sweeping or trapping one or both of the opponent's
legs in the execution of a throw. The "phoenix
spreads its wings" motion from the eight animals
form employs this kind of cutting palm application
 
  

 
              1                            2                            3                                4                            5 
 

 
                6                                    7                                        8                                      9         
 

 
              10                          11                          12                          13                            14               
                         
Lifting Palm Change (fast set) 
 

115 
  

Chopping Palm Application #1 

 

 
1 2 3
 

 
4 5 6 
 

 
7 

116 

Chopping Palm Application #2
1 2
4 5
to either the area under the nose or the back of the
opponent's neck in the execution of throws or
take-downs.
Although the chopping palm exercise was
performed with the striking palm facing upward,
in application the side of the palm can be used
with the yang palm (palm facing up) or the yin
palm (palm facing down). Two consecutive
chopping palms can be executed in combination
with the palm changing from yin to yang
between the strikes.
This palm can also be applied high or low.
Previously we discussed some applications with
the palm striking high to the face or neck, when
the palm strikes low it is used to strike the liver,
117 
 
3
6 
floating ribs, or hip joints. Striking to the hip
joints with the chopping palm while you have the
opponent in a k'ou pu or pai pu leg lock is an
excellent way to off-balance the opponent. This
type of low palm can be seen in the "bear" posture
of the eight animals. Because this palm can be
executed high or low with the palm facing up or
down, it can be used to all eight directions.
On pages 116 and 117 we show two applications
of the chopping palm.
Example 1:
1) The opponent begins to enter Park's defenses
by executing a fan chang maneuver. See photos
1 and 2.

2) Park hooks the opponent's left arm and begins
to slide his right hand up the opponent's left arm in
the execution of a chopping palm. At the same
time, Park begins to execute a pivot step to the
opponent's left side. See photos 3 and 4.
3) Park continues to execute the pivot step to end
up on the opponent's left flank as he executes a
chopping palm application to the base of the
opponent's skull. See photo 4 through 6.
Notice that since Park has used a pivot step to
move out to the opponent's flank he is now in a
good position to follow the chopping palm
application with a variety of follow-up techniques
to the opponent's back, side, and left arm.
Example 2:
This example is similar to the last, however,
instead of executing such a large pivot step, Park
executes a shallower pivot and applies the
chopping palm to the opponent's ribs. See photos 1
through 6.
White Clouds Chasing the Stars Palm
Introduction: The previous four palm exercises in
this set were single palm exercises (one active
striking palm thrown at a time). For the next two
palms we will be utilizing both palms
simultaneously in the striking phase of the exercise.
This next palm, which we will refer to from here
on as "chasing the stars" for convenience, divides
the body's energy and power down the center of
the body. One hand strikes high and forward at a
diagonal and the other hand strikes low and to the
rear.
This palm is primarily designed to teach the
student how to execute a powerful low strike in the
rearward direction and a diagonal "clothesline"
type of force in the forward direction. The double
palm combination executed in this exercise helps
the practitioner obtain a good feel for the balance
of two equal and opposite forces being delivered in
a balanced way around the axis of the body's center.
As we discussed previously, all strikes should be
executed with the "balancing of forces" principle in
mind, however, in the previous exercises only one
palm was thrown. The balancing of forces in the
one palm exercises came from the
118
action of the shoulders and hips. In this exercise, both
palms actually deliver power and thus the
execution of this exercise gives the practitioner a
chance to get a good feel for how the body's power is
supposed to be balanced in all of the exercises. After
gaining some experience with this exercise, the
student should go back to the previous single palm
exercises and try to execute them with the same
feeling in the area of the hips and shoulders.
In executing this strike one hand is thrown forward
and out at a diagonal while the other hand and the
body weight move towards the rear. The effect this
exercise has on the chest area is quite interesting. The
shoulder on the side of the hand striking to the rear is
thrown back and as the shoulder moves downward
the ribs on that side compress. The other side of the
body expands and opens up with the diagonal
thrusting of the palm forward. Because the opposite
palms are thrown in
opposite directions at the same time, i.e. one left, up,
and out, and the other right, down, and back, there is
a great deal of relative movement in the area of the
ribs and chest and thus these areas are conditioned
and developed, once again, in a slightly different
manner.
Thus far in this chapter we have made frequent
mention of the relatively high degree of suppleness
and elasticity one should develop in the area of the rib
cage, spine, hips, shoulders, and sternum. In this
system of Pa Kua Chang, almost every upper body
exercise the beginning student will practice is aimed
at helping the body gain some degree of suppleness
in these areas prior to the execution of the 48 month
palm strikes.
The sequence of training begins with the three fan
chang exercises (especially t'ien fan Chang) and the
first two breathing exercises. These sets begin to
loosen up the practitioner's upper body in the areas of
the spine, ribs cage, and shoulders. The practice of the
shaking palm, dragon back, and the single and double
palm change exercises also loosen the hips, shoulders,
and spine. The standard eight ch'i kung set, the "hiding
flower under leaf exercise," which are all presented in
this volume, are also exercises which continue to
loosen the upper body and hips in a variety of ways, in
Park's school, all of these exercises are usually
practiced prior to the student learning the 48 month
palms. Additionally, practicing each of the 48 month
 

1 2
5 6
White Clouds Chasing the Stars Palm (slow set)
palm exercises at a slow pace with a concentration
on the correct movement of the upper body will aid
in loosening these areas.
If the student begins to execute the 48 month palm
exercises with power prior to gaining a increased
degree of suppleness in the upper body, the
"whipping" power that is developed in these
exercises will be weak. Having a stiff upper body
and trying to produce power in these exercises
would be analogous to having stiff sections in a
whip that you were trying to crack. Some power
will be produced, however it will not be full and
crisp. The rule here is that the more suppleness and
flexibility one can gain in the hips, shoulders, spine,
rib junctures, and sternum, the more whipping
power can be effectively produced.
In summary, the "chasing the stars" exercise
teaches the student how to use the body, back,
and shoulder in a relaxed natural manner in
119 
3 4
7
 
executing a low strike behind the body. At the same
time, the student is training how to execute a high
diagonally moving clothesline type strike in the
forward direction. The energy of this upward
moving diagonal strike is very relaxed and is like
snapping a towel. The feeling is the same as one
gets when throwing a frizbee.
After focusing on the rearward moving power,
thrown in combination with a forward moving force,
the student will notice that when he or she returns to
practicing any of the one sided striking exercises
practiced previously which utilize the "wing-nut"
type of power, the ability to generate equal and
opposite force around the body's central axis will
have improved. Intermediate level practitioners can
also try to incorporate the dragon back mechanics
into this palm strike.

1) Begin in a "horse" stance with the palms held in
beside the ribs. See slow set photo 1.
2) Raise the right arm up to about head height
and even with the right shoulder. The palm turns to
face outward. The left hand comes up under the
right elbow. See slow set photo 2.
3) Twist the body and pivot the feet to the left
allowing the right hand to move along with the
body. During this movement, the right hand
turns to face the body and is held at face level
directly in front of the face (aligned with the nose).
During this movement the weight comes forward
slightly. The distribution of weight is about
50/50. In this position, the hips are facing the same
direction as the nose. See slow set photo number 3.
4) The left palm comes up under the right elbow
and slides up along the right forearm as the right
hand begins to move toward the rear. The
execution of this movement is similar to the fan
chang maneuver. As the fan clumg begins, the
practitioner will rotate the body around its central
axis and move the weight rearward as both strikes
are thrown simultaneously. The eyes follow the
rearward moving strike. The hips and shoulders
should twist to the right. The practitioner should
emphasize the rearward movement of the right
shoulder. As the right hand moves to the rear, the
palm rotates to face backward. The wrist
movement here is an inward rotation of the
forearm combined with an extension of the hand at
the very end of the movement. Looking at
photo number 4 of the slow set we see that the
palm of the right hand is facing directly rearward
with the fingers facing downward at the end of this
movement.
In this phase of the exercise, as the right hand
moves back and down and the left hand moves
forward and up, the practitioner should feel an
opening the chest area. This movement is subtle.
The chest should not stick out. Each palm should
move with an equal and opposite force, however,
the intention, the eyes, and the movement of the
weight follow the rear palm. As stated previously,
the left arm should be thrown diagonally upward
with the same feeling as in throwing a frizbee. The
arm should always remain relaxed. See slow set
120
photo 4.
In executing steps one through four, the movement
is continuous and fluid. There are not stops or
hesitations in this move. The movement of the right
hand across in front of the face while the body is
turning is a block which should be immediately
followed by the strike. The entire movement is smooth
and circular.
5) Twist the body to the right keeping the left hand
up in front of the face. Bring the right hand in by the
right ribs. See slow set photo 5.
6) Continue turning the body to the right and bring
the left hand in front of the face with the hand aligned
with the nose. Again, the weight is about 50/50 in this
position. See slow set photo 6.
7) Execute the strike on the other side. See slow set
photo 7.
Application in Fighting: The rearward moving hand
in this exercise is primarily used as a high block with a
subsequent strike to the groin, bladder, or stomach
areas. The upper strike is used as a close-line type of
strike across the opponents chest or throat. In many
cases these two strikes are thrown in succession as a
one-twocombination as shown in the first example
below.
Example 1:
1) The opponent tries to come inside Park's defenses
by rolling his hand inside of Park's lead hand. See
photos 1 and 2.
2) Park blocks across with his right hand, steps in
toward the opponent with his right foot and then
executes a pivot on his right foot. This is a risky
move because the opponent can catch your ribs with
his free hand when you are stepping in. If you
execute this technique to the inside, as Park has done
here, you need to be aware of that strike coming to
your ribs and block it with your elbow. See photos 3
and 4.
3) As Park moves in, the opponent tries to strike with
his right hand to Park's ribs. Park catches this strike
with his elbow and immediately strikes to the
opponent's bladder with his palm. Park's pivot has
put him to the side of the opponent with his right side
facing the opponent's left side. This move must be
executed at the correct angle, otherwise you are in
danger of exposing your back to the opponent. See
photos 5 and 6.
 
  

 
              1                            2                            3                                4                            5 
 

              6                          7                              8                                9                          10 
 

            11                        12                          13                              14                          15               

                         
White Cloud Chasing the Stars Palm (fast set) 
 

121 
  

White Cloud Chasing the Stars Palm Application 1 

 

1 2 3
 

4 5 6 
 

 
7 8  

122 

White Cloud Chasing the Stars Palm Application 2
1 2
4 5
4) As soon as Park's strike lands to the opponent's
bladder region, Park steps in through the
opponent's legs, taking away his root. The angle is
such that it is easy to off balance the opponent with
this step. As he steps through, Park executes the
upward diagonal striking palm across the
opponent's chest and throws him back. This palm
could also have been thrown to the opponent's
throat in order to cause more damage.
As mentioned above, this is a risky move when
executed to the inside of the opponent. In order to
pull it off correctly, one must execute the technique
with proper timing and angle and be aware of the
opponent's ability to strike your side as you move
in. A less dangerous application of this nature can
be executed to the opponent's outside. If the
opponent were to lead with his left
123 
 
3
6 
hand as in executing a fan chang maneuver, the
exact same application could be executed to the
outside.
Example 2:
Here Park will use the slapping palm and the
chasing the stars palm in combination.
1) In this example, the opponent attempts to kick
Park in the groin. As the opponent kicks, Park
pivots to get out of the way of the kick and
executes a slapping palm strike to the opponent's
knee at the same time. See photos 1 through 4.
2) After striking the opponent's leg with the
slapping palm, Park immediately executes the
chasing the stars palm to the opponent's groin as he
continues to pivot to the opponent's side. See
photos 5 and 6.

At this point it would be easy for Park to turn
and step through the opponent's center while
executing the upward diagonal strike component
of the chasing stars palm as he did in the last
example. This move will off balance the opponent
and cause him to fall to the ground.
Sliding the Window Shutter to Look
at the Moon Palm
Introduction: This palm, which we will refer to
from here on as "sliding the shutter" for
convenience, is a double palm strike to the side of
the body with both palms striking on the same side
of the body, one high and one low. The mechanics
of this palm work to increase the practitioners
ability to generate a centrifugal force around the
central axis of the body with the energy like that of
a tornado.
Previously all exercises which employed the
mechanics of generating force around the body's
central axis worked on the "wing-nut" principle.
This means that as one shoulder and hip moved
forward, the other moved rearward and the
opposing forces were balanced around the center.
In this palm strike, the energy of the body winds
up around the center and unwinds around the
center, but it is then all whipped over to one side of
the body as both hands strike in the same direction.
The circular path traveled by the hands during the
wind up and the subsequent unwinding of the
body in one direction will train the body to learn
how to develop centrifugal "tornado" like power.
The power radiates out from the center along a
circular path.
This type of tornado power has many
applications in using both hands to strike the
opponent from a side angle. Learning how to
generate power, strength, and connection in this
manner also aids the student in his or her
development in other aspects of Pa Kua
movement and application. For instance, this type
of winding and unwinding of the body around its
central axis will develop the connections and
power that the student will use in the execution of
the single palm change motion. When employing
the single palm change, the Pa Kua practitioner will
not always use the maneuver as a direct attack or
124
strike, however, learning how to generate power in
this palm striking exercise forges the alignments
and connections that will be valuable in any
offensive or defensive employment of the single
palm change.
Performance of the Exercise:
1) Begin in a "horse" stance with the palms held
in by the ribs. See slow set photo 1.
2) Bring the right palm up in front of the face with
the palm facing outward. The left hand comes to
a position under the right elbow. See photo 2.
3) Execute a fan chang maneuver by bringing the
left hand up under the right forearm. At the same
time, turn the body to the left. The hips and
shoulders also turn to the left. See photo 3.
4) After the palms reach a position facing directly
to the left, turn the hips and shoulders slightly
back to the right with the palms remaining in the
same position as in photo 3. This is the "wind up
before the throw" portion of the exercise. Now
begin to bring the hips and shoulders back to the
left and start to turn the palms over. See photo 4.
5) Continue whipping the hips and shoulders to
the left and turn the palms to face to the left. This
is the "unwind" portion of this exercise. See
photo 5.
During the wind up and unwind portion of this
exercise, the winding and unwinding are relatively
small movements. This exercise will train the
practitioner to begin to develop the ability to use
subtle movements to generate a great deal of
power. The wind up and unwind are quick, small
rotations of the torso around the center of the
body.
6) Begin to execute a fan chang maneuver while
swinging the body 180 degrees to the right. See
photos 6 through 8.
7) Repeat the exercise on the right side. See
photos 9 and 10.
Application in Fighting: This palm is used to
strike the opponent's face and chest, side of the
body high and low, or the back and kidneys
simultaneously. It also is effective in the execution
of various throwing applications where the legs
are trapped or swept at the same time the arm
motions are being applied.
 
  

1 2 3 4
 

 
5 6 7 8
 

 
9 10

Sliding the Window Shutter to look at the Moon Palm (slow set) 

125 
  

              1                            2                            3                                4                            5 
 

              6                          7                              8                                9                          10 
 

            11                        12                          13                              14                            15             

                         
White Cloud Chasing the Stars Palm (fast set) 
 

126 

As with all of these palm strikes, the applications of
the strikes will vary depending on the distance and
angle the practitioner is positioned relative to his or
her opponent. For instance, in the application of the
"sliding shutter" palms, if the practitioner is at a long
range from the opponent, the strike is applied as a
shock strike with the wrists articulating as they do in
the throwing palm exercise. That is, the wrist will be
loose and the hands will flex as the strike hits the
opponent. However, if the practitioner is at close
range, this motion may better be employed in the
execution of a throwing technique. There are many
various applications of all the palm strikes
depending on the distance and angle one obtains.
On the next page Park demonstrates an application
of the sliding shutter palm.
1) The opponent tries to get inside Park's defenses
by executing a fan chang maneuver. See photos 1
and 2.
2) Park steps in and blocks the opponent's arm
with his forearm. See photo 3.
3) Park begins to pivot around his right foot in
order to move to his opponent's flank. See photos 4
and 5.
4) Park extends the pivot to get some distance
between him and his opponent so that he can
execute a shock strike to the opponent's kidneys. He
begins to apply the sliding shutter strike. See photo
6.
5) Park applies the sliding shutter strike to the
opponent's kidney area. See photo 7. From here
Park is in a very good position to follow up with
more strikes to the opponent's back and head.
As a variation to the entry Park has utilized in
photos 1 through 4, if he had stepped in deeper and
placed his right leg behind his opponent's left leg, he
could have stayed in close to his opponent and
executed a throw by simultaneously sweeping the
opponent's leg and executing the sliding shutter
technique across the opponent's neck and chest
areas. Also, as another variation, Park could have
executed the "chasing star" palm to the opponent's
groin after he positioned himself as shown in photo
4.
As a possible follow-up to most applications of
the sliding the window palm, the practitioner
might choose to execute the upward directed
strike of the chasing the stars palm. For instance,
127
if one were to use the sliding the shutter palm with
a leg trap in order to off-balance the opponent, you
could then follow-up with a clothesline type strike
across the throat or face. Changing from one to the
other is very powerful and efficient.
Follow-on 48 Month Palm Training
After the practitioner has gained a suitable amount
of experience with the eight palm exercises as
explained thus far in this chapter, he or she will
then begin to combine the palm strikes with the
"eight direction rooted stepping" drills which were
presented in the first volume of this book. Through
this practice the student will learn how to employ
the palm strikes while moving.
It is important that any exercise which is
practiced while standing in a static posture also be
practiced while the practitioner is executing the
footwork techniques of Pa Kua Chang. Once the
student learns how to develop the proper
mechanics of motion through static exercises, if he
or she does not also learn how to properly utilize
the mechanics and generate the power while
moving, it will be difficult for them to use these
strikes in a fighting situation.
After the student has practice each of the 48
month palm strikes in combination with basic
straight line and pivoting footwork drills, he or she
will then work to develop palm striking
combinations. This can first be practiced in a
standing posture and then later with the footwork.
In practicing 48 month palm striking
combinations, the student learns which palms can
effectively be used together. A rule of thumb Park
tells his students when they begin to practice
combinations is that the most effective striking
sequences always change between yin palm and
yang palm and vice-versa. For instance slapping
palm followed by lifting palm is a good
combination because slapping palm is yin and
lifting palm is yang. In the same sense, the lower
"chasing the stars" palm followed by the upper
"chasing the stars" palm, as shown in the
application example on page 122, is a good
combination. Also a yin chopping palm applied
to the temple which is immediately followed by
a yang chopping palm to the neck is also a good
 
  

White Cloud Chasing the Stars Palm Application 1 

 

 
1 2 3
 

 
4 5 6 
 

 
7

128 

combination.
Palm striking combinations should follow the
lien huan (continuously linked) principle which
was discussed in Chapter 2. This means that in
changing from one palm to another, the energy
and movement is smooth and fluid, there is no
break in the energy flow in changing from one to
the other. If a student executes a combination of
palm strikes and there is awkwardness, hesitation,
or disharmony between the two strikes, Park says,
"This is not lien huan."
Park says that learning the changing principle
as it applies to the 48 month palm combinations
is very important. Parks teacher taught him that
just as there are rules to follow when connecting
calligraphy strokes, there are rules to follow when
connecting the palm strikes. He says that if the
palm combinations do not connect fluidly, then
the practitioner will be leaving himself open if he
tries to apply that combination in a fighting
situation. In other words, if a practitioner executes
a palm strike in a fight and for some reason that
strike does not hit its mark, is deflected, or does
not do enough damage to finish the fight, the
practitioner's body should have ingrained a habit
of moving from that strike directly to another
without hesitation and without a break in the
energy of the motion.
in fighting you never want to put all your eggs
in one basket and think that one strike is going to
devastate the opponent. Also, when you strike
the opponent, you never want to hesitate after the
strike to "see what happened." Many beginners
fall in to this trap when learning how to fight.
They will throw a strike and then hesitate to see if
it hit its mark. This is a big mistake. When you do
this you are giving your opponent time to react or
recover. This is why the repetitious practice of
palm striking combinations and palm/elbow
striking combinations is so important in training.
These combinations must be habitual so that in a
fighting situation the practitioner can fluidly
change from one technique to the next in
accordance with the opponents reactions and
responses. This ability is also developed in the
"research sparring" practice as discussed in Chapter
2.
The next stage of training the 48 month palms,
129
after the student has practiced the striking
combinations with the "eight direction rooted
stepping" footwork, is to learn the eight section
48 month palm circle walking form. This form
takes all eight of the palms and puts them into
circle walking changes. Here the student begins to
learn how to combine the mechanics and power
of the eight palms with the circular footwork and
the rapid change of direction which is associated
with combat oriented circle walk practice. An
example of one of these changes, utilizing the
"sliding the shutter" palm, is shown on pages 131
and 132.
In this example Park is walking the circle in the
counter-clockwise direction and then he
transitions directly into a hiding flower under leaf
posture (see photos 1 through 4). Unwinding
from the hiding flower posture. Park then executes
the sliding shutter strike (see photos 5 through 9).
He then turns and executes the sliding shutter
palm on the other side (see photos 10 through 15).
From here he once again executes the hiding
flower posture (photos 16 through 18) and then
immediately transitions into the t'ien fan Chang
maneuver (see photos 19 through 23) and begins
walking the circle in the other direction.
After the student has gained experience
practicing the 48 month palm circle walking
form, he or she will also learn a variety of other
static exercises, footwork drills, and circle walking
forms which combine the 48 month palms with
the supplemental palms, the elbow sets, the kicking
sets, and circle walking combat forms. The order
in which the student learns these drills and
exercises depends on the students aptitude,
progress, ability, and individual needs. Park will
teach every student a little differently depending
on what he feels that student needs to learn.
One of the exercises a student might be taught
at this point in the training is the 48 month palm
apparatus drills. As we mentioned in the last
volume, all of the 48 month palms have separate
apparatus which are struck while practicing the
palm. However, Park does not teach this training
to beginners for a couple of important reasons.
One of the main reasons that Park starts all of his
students "hitting air" in the palm exercises,
instead of hitting a bag, is that in the execution of
an internal strike, the practitioner needs to be able
 

to "throw" the intention out with the strike so that
the ch'i will extend out beyond the palm. In
practicing the palm exercises without hitting
anything and extending the intention as if
throwing something far away, the student learns
how to properly use the mind and body together.
If the student started hitting a bag before he or she
learned how to properly coordinate the mind and
body, the practitioner's intention would end at the
surface of the bag and not extend into or through
the bag.
Another reason, which has more to do with
physical health than striking technique, is that
practitioners who try striking bags before their
body is externally and internally connected will
run the risk of either damaging themselves or
creating bad habits. Internal martial arts strikes
are executed in a relaxed manner. The
practitioner can remain relaxed and hit an object
only if the body alignments and connections are
such that the force of the strike comes from the
ground. If the practitioner's connections and
alignments are off, the force coming back into the
practitioner's body as a result of the strike can
easily damage the wrist, elbow, or shoulder.
In order to compensate for this force, beginners
will tighten their muscles as if executing an
external style strike. This will cause bad habits to
form. Therefore, Park does not teach students
apparatus training until their body alignments and
connections have been properly executed in the
"air striking" practice and their mind/body
connection is correct in the way they use their
intention when striking. Park can watch someone
strike into the air and tell if they are "holding the
ch'i" or "extending the ch'i. When they can extend
the ch'i properly in the basic training exercise, and
demonstrate proper body alignments, they are
ready for apparatus training. Even after the
student begins the apparatus training, there are
certain rules to follow to ensure that the
practitioner's training is safe. Each of the
apparatus that is struck during the exercises has a
certain amount of flexibility and "give." In Park's
school students never strike heavy bags. All the
apparatus is fairly light and/or has plenty of
cushion. For instance, one of the exercises
practiced with the slapping palm uses a one foot
pile of newspaper on a wooden table. The table
130
should not be solid or too thick. The papers are
not tightly bound, but loosely stacked. Hitting a
one foot stack of papers has cushion enough that
the practitioner is not at risk of being damaged by
hitting something too hard.
An object that is too heavy or hard will not
only give too much resistance to the strike, but the
c/i'/that exits the practitioner's palm will be
blocked by a thick, heavy object. Park says that a
heavy object has "dead" ch'i. If an object that is
heavy is struck, the ch'i that leaves the
practitioner palm can come back into the
practitioner's body and cause problems. Park says
the ch'i in the hand is "live ch'i." When it leaves
the hand, it becomes "dead ch'i." The heavy
object will turn the ch'i back and it will re-enter
the hand as dead ch'i. This could cause some ill
effects.
Some practitioners have the idea that if you are
going to fight someone who weighs 200 pounds,
you should practice by hitting a 200 pound bag.
This is a very external "force against force" way
of looking at fighting. In the internal martial arts
you should never hit someone in a manner that
you take the brunt of their weight. Before you
apply a strike you always ensure that you have
off-balanced the opponent or that you are hitting
them at their weakest angle. If the strike is setup
properly, you will never need to fight against the
opponent's weight.
After the student in Park's school has learned
all of the exercises, combinations, and forms as
discussed above, he or she will then begin to
learn how to execute the 48 month palms in
conjunction with the pole training described in
Chapter 3. In practicing these exercises and forms,
the student will learn how to utilize the 48 month
palm mechanics and power while executing very
quick turning maneuvers, sharp changes of
direction, and small circle or spiraling footwork.
 
  

 
Sliding the Window Shutter to Look at the Moon Circle Walking Form 
 

 
                1                                    2                                    3                                      4 
 

 
                5                                    6                                      7                                  8   
 

 
 
                  9                                  10                                    11                                12   
 

131 
  

 
Sliding the Window Shutter to Look at the Moon Circle Walking Form (con’t) 
 

 
                13                                  14                                    15                                16 
 

                  17                                18                                    19                                20   

 

                  21                                  22                                  23                                24   

 

132 

The Supplemental Palms 
In addition to the 48 month palm training set that
has been discussed thus far in this chapter, there
are various other "supplemental" palms that the
student will practice in order to take the
mechanics trained during the execution of the 48
month palms and vary the application, yet keep
the mechanics of motion which has already been
ingrained in the body through repetitious practice
of the 48 month palms. By taking the core body
mechanics that have been practiced in the
execution of the 48 month palms and learning
how those mechanics can be applied in a variety
of different expressions of the arms and hands,
the student begins to grasp the importance of
having developed a solid foundation with the
beginning exercises.
In this next section, we will present four of the
supplementary palms. Because all readers should
by now have gained some experience with the
shaking palm and dragon back exercises which
were presented in the last volume of this book,
we will present four palm exercises which are
based on the mechanics of those two exercises.
The first two of these exercises, the "piercing
palm" and the "swallow penetrates through the
forest" palm, are based on the mechanics of the
shaking palm exercise. The last two exercises
"three basins settling to the ground" palm and
"embracing the moon at the chest" palm are
based on the mechanics of the dragon back
exercise.
Park does not usually wait until the student has
finished learning all of the 48 month palm
exercises before he teaches these particular four
supplemental palms. With most students, Park
teaches these supplemental palms after the
student has gained a firm experiential
understanding of the shaking palm and dragon
back palm. Sometimes Park teaches these
particular supplemental palms to students before
they learn the 48 month palm exercises if he feels
that they need more work on the mechanics of the
shaking palm and dragon back.
133
 
Piercing Palm
Introduction: The piercing palm (also known as
the penetrating palm) is one of Pa Kua Chang's
most famous techniques, especially in the Yin Fu
lineage of Pa Kua. In the classic writing of Pa
Kua handed down by its founder, Tung
Hai-Ch'uan, it states:
Even those with proficient skill fear the three
penetrations,
Moving to the outside is not a waste of time.
He walks outside and I walk inside,
Its not difficult to attack with the extending hand.
Applying three consecutive piercing palms is a
common tactic in Pa Kua Chang. It is very
difficult for an opponent to counter three
consecutive piercing palm strikes which are
applied in rapid succession at the appropriate
angles and with the practitioner's body in the
optimum position. Therefore, in the piercing palm
exercise, we always practice three palms in
succession.
The mechanics of the piercing palm are exactly
the same as the shaking palm exercise. The
coordinated movement of the hips and shoulders
around the body's central axis provide both the
speed and power necessary to correctly execute
this exercise. If the body wobbles or sways, or the
weight is shifted back and forth, the speed and
fluidity of this exercise will be decreased. The
body is aligned on the center and moves around
the center for best results.
Performance of the Exercise:
1) Begin in a "horse" stance with the palms held
in by the ribs. See slow set photo 1.
2) Bring the right hand directly in front of the
face with the palm facing generally toward the
left. Bring the left hand under the right elbow
with the palm facing generally to the right. See
photo 2.
3) Bring the left hand up under the right forearm
by moving forward with the left hip and shoulder.
 
  

                  1                                    2                                      3                                  4 
 

                    5                                  6                                    7                                    8   
 
Piercing Palm (slow set))

The hip and shoulder should move in a coordinated
manner as described in the last volume when we
presented the shaking palm exercise. As the left
palm comes forward it should rub under the right
forearm as it shoots directly forward in a stabbing
motion. The fingers of the left hand point directly
forward. At the last instant, as the fingers are about
to reach their farthest extension, the wrist bends and
the fingers turn to point slightly upward. This
movement adds penetrating power to the strike and
helps move the ch'i to the fingertips. See photos 3
and 4.
4) Execute the same maneuver, however, this
time bring the right hand under the left forearm.
Once again, this motion is driven by the hips and
shoulders. The right hips and shoulders are
projected forward while the left hips and
shoulders are pulled back with equal and
opposite force. See photos 5 and 6.
5) Repeat the sequence in the left side one
more time. See photos 7 and 8. You have now
executed three consecutive piercing palms.
These three strikes should be executed in rapid
succession. Three strikes in rapid succession
constitutes one execution of the exercise. On
the next repetition the practitioner will start
with the left hand forward and the right hand
under the left elbow as shown in photo 8.
In executing the piercing palm three times in
rapid succession, the student learns how to move

134 
  

1 2 3 4
 

5 6 7 8
 

9 10 11 12

Piercing Palm (fast set)) 
 

135 

the hips and shoulders rapidly and crisply around
the body's center line. Remember that the hips
and shoulders should remain loose and supple as
this movement is executed. If the body is stiff, the
movements will be too slow.
Application: The three piercing palms thrown in
rapid succession typify the "jab, bridge, finish"
sequence which we discussed in Chapter 2. One
might use the first pierce to gain a reaction from
the opponent. This pierce is thrown straight out at
the opponent's eye. If he blocks it, which we
assume he will, then the next pierce is thrown to
the opposite side of the opponent's blocking arm.
If the opponent misses the block, then the strike
extends right into the opponent's eye.
If the second piercing palm is blocked, the
practitioner once again throws another to the
opposite side of the opponent's blocking arm.
However, in the execution of the second piercing
palm, the practitioner has utilized his or her
footwork to get in closer to the opponent and off
to a optimum angle for attack. If the opponent
misses the second strike, again he is gouged in the
eyes.
If the opponent has blocked the first two
piercing palms, the practitioner should have
planned the sequence such that while the
opponent was busy blocking the first two, the set
up for the third to hit its mark has occurred. In
order for this to happen, it is imperative that the
practitioner has utilized the proper footwork in
the execution of the first two strikes. Of course
the proper footwork will be dictated by the
opponent's responses to the first two strikes.
When the third strike is executed, it is either
aimed at the opponent's eyes or throat for best
results. Because the strike is a straight forward
stabbing strike with the finger tips, the
practitioner will want to hit an area of the
opponent's body that is soft, like the throat or
eyes.
After the piercing palm has hit the opponent's
throat or eyes, it is a good idea to follow
immediately with a slapping palm to the
opponent's face or chest. The hand is not drawn
back in the execution of the this slapping palm.
As soon as the fingers jab the eyes or throat, the
wrist of that hand is bent and the palm comes
straight in to strike. As soon as the palm strikes,
136
the practitioner will want to follow that with an
elbow strike to the same area the palm hit. This
finger, palm, elbow combination is executed in
very rapid succession. There is no hesitation
between strikes.
When throwing the one-two-three
combination, the retracted palm only comes back
as far as the elbow of the extended hand. This
helps the structural speed and also helps the
piercing palm bridge onto a counterattack thrown
by the opponent. Also, when throwing these
strikes, the thumb does not stick up and the
fingers are slightly bent. Having the fingers
slightly bent will cause the fingers to fold inward
instead of backward if the strike hits a bony area
such as the cheek bone.
What we have described here thus far in this
section is the technique known as the "upper
piercing palm." There is also a "lower piercing
palm." This palm is practiced in the exact same
manner as the upper piercing palm. However, the
rear hand rubs across the top of the forward arm
in the execution of the strike, and the strike is
aimed down at about waist height. The lower
piercing palm is a good technique to use in
blocking strikes which the opponent is attempting
to deliver to your abdomen.
When striking with the lower piercing palm,
one of the prime targets is the inguinal crease
(inside of the leg where the upper leg meets the
torso). This area is full of nerves and a piercing
strike here is very painful. This strike also
weakens the joint, momentarily allowing you to
execute the "bear" movement from the eight
animals form to the inner hip joint as you sweep
the leg.
As the Pa Kua combinatorial analysis would
dictate, all possible executions of every palm shape
and striking direction should be explored in training.
You will have noticed that thus far we have only
discussed executing palm strikes with the fingertips
while the palms are facing to the side (palm facing
left or right), but do not think that the techniques
end there. Striking with the fingertips while the
palm is facing up and when the palm is facing
downward are also techniques which are trained as
piercing palm variations. If you examine the
"dragon flying" and the "phoenix" postures of
Park's eight animals (as shown in the
 

last volume of the book) you will see that these palm
shapes are represented. Also, you will notice that the
third elbow training set has a component where the
palm is piercing in for a fingertip strike to the throat
with the palm facing upwards.
Swallow Penetrates Through
the Forest Palm
Introduction: The "swallow penetrates through the
forest" palm is an exercise adapted from one of the
eight animal circle walking postures. Like the last
exercise, this one also employs the mechanics of the
shaking palm, however, its hand and arm
movements are much more complex.
The arm and palm movements executed in this
exercise teach the student how to get power in the
execution of circular motions. In the practice of this
exercise both hands are constantly following circular
and rotational patterns of movement. It is much
harder to learn how to get power in these type of
circular and rotational patterns as compared to linear
methods of striking. Thus, this exercise is a valuable
training tool.
As in many other of the palm striking exercises, the
wrist action in this exercise is extremely important.
Both hands are actively involved in this exercise and
at the very end of the strike the flicking motion of the
wrists provides the follow-through.
Performance of the Exercise:
In the slow set example of this exercise you will
notice that Park is standing with his feet held together
instead of in the horse stance posture. This is a
variation of training which can be performed in order
to provide a different type of stretching in the area of
the hips. This kind of stance is only practiced on the
slow set. You can also stand in the standard "horse
riding" stance as in all of the other exercises. This
variation is shown here in the slow set just as an
example of how this particular exercise might be
varied for a different effect. The exercise is
performed as follows:
137
1) Begin by bringing the right hand up in front of
the face with the palm facing up and the fingers
facing to the right. The left hand comes up over
the head with the palm facing upward. The left
palm and left arm should be held out away from
the head. The hips and shoulders are rotated to
the left. See photo 1.
2) Allow the left hand to begin traveling out along
a circular arc to the left as the right wrist straightens
out and the fingers of the right hand point out
away from the body. The hips and shoulders
begin to rotate towards the right as the body
moves around its central axis. See photo 2.
3) The left hand continues to arc out away from
the body and the hand turns so that the palm is
facing downward. The right palm also turns to
face down and away from the body. See photo 3.
4) The left palm continues along the circular arc.
When it gets to about the level of the shoulder, the
fingers point downward and the palm begins a
scooping motion. The right palm turns out away
from the body. See photo 4.
5) The left palm continues along the circular arc
now cutting in towards the body in a scooping
action. As the left palm scoops across in front of
the body, it comes down to about the level of the
hips. At this point in the motion the hips and
shoulders should be about square to the front.
The right palm begins to turn to face upward. The
eyes follow the left palm. See photo 5.
6) The left palm continues along its circular arc as
it begins to come up the right side of the body.
The palm is still performing the scooping motion.
The right palm continues to turn upward. The
hips and shoulders are continuing to turn to the
right. See photo 6.
7) The left palm continues along its circular arc.
However, now it begins to also move away from
the body towards the front as it comes up the right
side of the body (actually it is moving along the
body's center line, however since the hips and
shoulders are turned to the right, it looks as if the
palm is moving up on the right). The right palm
continues to turn upward. See photo 7.
8) The left palm continues its circle with the palm
now facing upward and hooking back across the
body. The fingers point to the left. The right palm
is now facing upward and the arm is held up over
the head, but not too close to the head. See photos
 
  

1 2 3 4
 

5 6 7 8
 

 
9

Swallow Penetrates Through the Forest Palm (slow set)

 

138 
  

1 2 3 4 5
 

6 7 8 9
 

10 11 12 13

Swallow Penetrates Through the Forest Palm (fast set)

139 
  

Swallow Penetrates Through the Forest Application

 

1 2 3
 

4 5 6 
 

 
7 8 9 

140 

Swallow Penetrates Through the Forest Application (con’t)
                    10                                            11                                              12
8 and 9.
In the execution of this movement the left
palm has traced a very smooth circle and has
moved in a continuous and fluid motion. Park likes
to say that in this exercise the palm should be likea
bird and the tip of the middle finger the birds beak.
He says when a bird flies it follows its beak,
meaning that the tip of middle finger leads the
motion. When you practice this motion, be very
relaxed so it feels as if the palm gains momentum
during its downward falling arc which helps propel
it upward along the upward moving arc and across
the body to its final position. The turning of the
hips and shoulders around the body's center
provide most of the power in this motion. However,
the momentum created in the arcing of the left
palm also provides a spiraling force. The last bit of
power is provided by the quick and crisp flicking
of the left wrist as the fingers are turned to the left
and the inside heel of the palm is projected forward.
You can see the last action of the wrist if you
compare the palm positions in photos 8 and 9.
The right hand power is also obtained in the
aggressive flicking of the wrist and rotation of
the forearm around its central axis. Although the
right hand has hardly moved from its original
position, the rotation of the palm and forearm
and the quick snapping of the wrist as the palm
141 
 
makes its final upward turn provides a great deal of
power. The movement of this hand is usually
applied in a blocking motion or in escaping from
an opponent's grabbing of the right wrist. 9) Now
you are ready to begin the next repetition of this
exercise. The steps are the same, however, this
time the right hand scoops down in a circular arc
while the left hand remains up above the head.
After you have practiced this exercise as outlined
above, you can then combine two or more of these
movements in rapid succession to work on speed.,
Application: The "swallow penetrates through the
forest" palm has many various applications. It can
be used effectively as a jab, a block, a bridge, a
strike, or a throw. As a jab/bridge combination the
practitioner can throw two quick and consecutive
"swallow penetrates through the forest" palms. As
the opponent blocks the first, the second will get
inside. Because of the complex nature of the
motions involved, it is difficult for the opponent to
keep up with what is happening when two of these
palms arc thrown in rapid succession. When
striking with this palm, you can use the fingertips
or the heel of the palm.
In the example shown on the previous page, Park
demonstrates how one might get out of a wrist grab
and follow up with a throw using this technique.

1) Park's opponent grabs his right wrist. See
photos 1 and 2.
2) As soon as the opponent grabs, Park begins to
execute the swallow penetrates through the forest
movement. The right hand turns up as the left
hand pierces. Park begins to step in towards the
opponent. See photo 3.
3) Park continues stepping in towards the
opponent while his right hand turns upwards and
his left hand pierces inside the opponent's right
arm and up behind his neck. As the hand is placed
behind the opponent's neck, Park's left foot has
stepped in behind the opponent's right foot. See
photos 4 through 6.
4) Park now shifts his weight to his left leg and
begins to execute a pivot step, pivoting around his
right leg, as he pulls down on the opponent's neck
in a circular arc. See photos 7 through 9.
5) At this point Park could continue with the
momentum of this motion and throw the
opponent. However, typical of Pa Kua Chang
technique, Park decides to change directions. As
the opponent's momentum brings his head toward
the ground, Park brings up his knee to meet the
opponent's head. See photos 10 through 12.
Three Basins Settling to
the Ground Palm
Introduction: As stated previously, the last two
palm exercises aided the practitioner's understanding
and development of the mechanics of the shaking
palm exercise. The next two exercises will add to the
student's understanding of the dragon back exercise.
In the dragon back exercise and the double palm
change exercise which were described in the last
volume of this book, the student learned to generate
power in a forward directed double palm strike by
executing a segmented whipping of the spine. The
"three basins settling to the ground palm" adds to the
double palm strike technique by teaching the student
how to develop double palm striking power to the
rear, the diagonal, and to the side.
This palm exercise is usually taught fairly
early in the training program (shortly after the student
has become comfortable with the dragon back
exercise) as a shoulder loosening, flexibility, and
142
coordination exercise. The rotation of the shoulder
joint forward and then backward in this exercise is
very therapeutic and enhances the flow of ch'i to the
arms. When this exercise is performed slowly, a
great deal of ch 7 can be felt because of the "rest
stretching" of the ligaments, tendons, and nerves on
the ulnar side of the arm.
Performance of the Exercise:
1) Begin in a wide "horse" stance with the arms
held extended out to the sides with the palms
facing up. See slow set photo 1.
2) Begin to round the lower back so that the small
of the back projects rearward and the sacrum
tucks under. As the lower back rounds, also begin
to round the upper back as the palms come
downward and turn to face the rear. The wrist
action cause the palms to "slap" at the very end of
the strike.
The power for this strike comes from the psoas
muscle and the intercostal muscles between the ribs
in the front of the body. The contraction of the psoas
muscle provides the power for the tucking under of
the pelvis while the contraction of the intercostal
muscles allows the chest to hollow and upper back to
round. See slow set photos 2 through 4.
3) From the rounded back and buttocks position
of the previous strike, you now open up the chest
and project the hips forward as you bring both
palms up diagonally and out to the sides. The
motion of the arms is as if you are holding a frisbee
in each hand and throwing the frizbees directly
out to both sides. The arms perform a whipping
motion and so the shoulders, elbows, and wrists
must be very loose. At the end of the strike the
wrists' movement allows the hands to extend
outwards. See photos 5 and 6.
4) For the last strike of this sequence, the
practitioner will perform a full dragon back motion.
With the first roll of the spine, the hands are
brought in slightly. See photo 7. As the second
"cracking of the whip" roll of the spine occurs
both hands are thrown out to the sides and the
palms turn to face outward. See photos 8 and 9.
In Park's school, the "three basins settling to
the ground" palm is also practiced with one palm
at a time. Practicing with one palm allows the
 
  

1 2 3
 

4 5 6 
 

 
7 8

Three Basins Settling to the Ground Palm (slow set)

143 
  

1 2 3 4 5
 

6 7 8 9 10
 

10 11 12 13

Three Basins Settling to the Ground Palm (fast set - front view)

144 
  

1 2 3 4 5
 

6 7 8 9 10
 

11 12 13 14 15

Three Basins Settling to the Ground Palm (fast set - side view)

145 

                    1                                        2                                      3                                      4
Swallow Penetrates Through the Forest Application (con’t)
student to learn how to combine the dragon
back motion with the shaking palm
mechanics of turning the hips and shoulders
around the body's central axis. This one
sided execution of this exercise is also the
more practical in terms of application.
Application: The double palms version of
this exercise is more an exercise used to
develop certain body strengths and
connections than an exercise which is tied to
any particular martial application. However,
the single palm version of this exercise has
quite a number of practical uses.
When executing the downward strike to
the rear, this palm is applied exactly like the
rearward striking palm of "chasing stars"
palm. Similarly, the upward diagonal striking
phase of thisexercise is applied like the
upward strike of the "chasing stars" palm.
These two palms can be applied as a
combination of either low/high or high/low.
The third strike of this sequence can be used
whenever the practitioner needs to strike
directly to the side of his body.
146 
 
Embracing the Moon at the Chest
Palm
Introduction: This is another strike which trains the
use of the dragon back mechanics. This strike is a
double handed strike where one hand is used to
support the other almost like a Tai Chi "press."
This exercise teaches the student how to use the
dragon back mechanics of the spine with a "store
and release" technique of the arms. The motion of
the back and the arms in combination with a
supple wrist action provides a great deal of power
with relatively little motion, thus making this a
very good "inside" fighting technique.
Performance of the Exercise:
1) Bring the right hand up in front of the face and
the left hand up under the right elbow. See photo
1.
2) Begin to curve the right hand inward (palm
facing towards you) as you bring the left hand up
along the right forearm with the left palm facing
the right forearm. See photo 2.
3) Turn the body 45 degrees to the right as you
bring the left palm up to press against the right
palm. At this point the elbows are bent and the
arms relaxed. See photo 3.
4) Execute the dragon back technique with the
spine. As the power comes up the back allow it to
whip out the arms. The arms press outward and
  

 
1 2 3 4 5
 

 
6 7 8 9
 

10 11 12 13 14

Embracing the Moon at the Chest Palm (fast set)

147 

at the last moment the right wrist snaps
forward as the left hand supports it from
behind. See photo 5.
The motion of this exercise is almost as if
you are squeezing a big rubber ball between your
arms and chest and trying to press it inwards
into a elongated sphere against its wanting to
spring back out into a round shape. As the
dragon back whips out the arms, you visualize
that you cannot hold the force of the ball back
any longer and the ball springs back to its
original round shape.
There are a couple of slight variations to
this palm exercise. The first is to press the left
palm against the right forearm when
executing the strike. Instead of flexing the wrist
to get power, the forearm rotates crisply as the
strike is applied. This type of movement is
applied against the opponent's joints. Another
variation is to have both palms facing outward
away from the body. This variation is usually
practiced and executed in combination with the
first exercise. In other words, the practitioner
will strike with the back of the wrist and then
immediately turn the forward palm over and
strike with the palm while the rear palm
remains in support.
Application: This palm strike is usually
applied to the areas of the floating ribs, liver,
spleen, or kidneys. The strike provides a sharp
shocking effect to these vital areas of the body.
Additionally, this strike may be applied from a
very low posture to the opponent's hip joints
while the forward foot is hooked around the
opponent's front foot in order to offset the
opponent's balance. The one two combination
described above where the first strike is applied
by the wrist and the second strike with the palm
in quick succession is also quite useful. Usually
the first strike is applied to the opponent's
floating rib and the second strike applied to
the liver or spleen areas.
148
body properly, learn efficient body mechanics,
and train various secondary muscles groups in
the area of the torso and back so that all of the
body's muscles work together in an integrated
fashion. In practicing thousands of repetitions
of the shaking palm, dragon back, forty eight
month palms, and the supplemental palms the
student will be able to naturally develop all of the
necessary components of subtle striking power.
Not only do these exercise teach the student
how to strike in all directions in a variety of
different ways, but in practicing the entire set,
the student's body is conditioned fully.
After the student has practiced all of the
palm exercises as they are outlined in the two
volumes of this book, he or she should then
begin to practice the same exercises, yet
decrease the amount of movement. In other
words, make the movements more subtle by not
drawing the hands back so far between
repetitions. When working to develop this
"short" power, the suppleness of the joints and
the flicking or snapping of the wrist becomes
very important. As mentioned previously,
the joint articulation not only helps to optimize
the mechanics of the motion, it also increases
the flow of energy to the palms.
After you have put in a sufficient amount of
time in the practice of these exercises, you
should then begin to incorporate these
movements in with the single palm change
variations which are presented in Chapter 4.
 
  

Chapter 6
Pa Kua Chang Elbow Training 

149 

Chapter 6 
Pa Kua Chang   
Elbow Training 
The Pa Kua Chang practitioner is an expert in the
use of the elbows. Elbows are used in all aspects
of offensive and defensive action. They are used
for striking, locking, trapping, sticking, redirecting,
and "listening." In this sense, the "elbow" does not
just include the pointy protuberance of bone at the
junction of the radius, ulna, and humerus. Here the
"elbow" will also include parts of the forearm and
upper arm. When using the elbows in striking, the
Pa Kua practitioner will target many areas of the
opponent's body.
The main target areas used when applying the
elbows are the vital points and areas around the
opponent's joints. Elbows can be effectively
applied to the opponent's wrists, the back of his
hands, his elbows, shoulders, hips, knees, ankles,
and head. Of course, the opponent's torso, front
and back, especially the areas of the spine and
sternum, are also nice targets for the elbow. Elbow
strikes are effectively used in combination with
palms strikes, punches, and other elbow strikes.
The manner in which the elbows are used in
fighting will always depend on the distance the
practitioner is from the opponent, and the angles
of efficient application.
In Park's school the use of the elbows is trained
in several progressive stages. First the student will
learn several basic elbow blocking, or clearing,
maneuvers which are practiced as static exercises.
These drills teach the student how to effectively
use the forearms in blocking, adhering, and
redirecting. In these exercises emphasis is
place on the use of forearm rotation and the proper
150 
timing of that rotation. As in all exercises, the
student will first practice slow and exact, then
gradually increases the speed, then adds power,
then combines speed and power, and then
executes the strikes in combination with footwork.
After the student learns the basic blocking
exercises, he or she will then combine these
exercises with the "shaking" palm exercise which
was presented in the first volume of this book.
There are various combinations of basic blocks
used in conjunction with the shaking palm that the
student will learn and then practice. Again, the
practice is first executed slow and exact, then with
speed, then with power, then with power and
speed, and then with footwork. These simple
combinations introduce the student to the first
level of "speed combination" exercises.
Next the student will learn and practice a set of
eight different elbow and palm striking
combinations. Some of the exercises in this set are
a combination of various elbow striking patterns
while others combine elbow strikes with palm
strikes. Each of the eight exercises combines
anywhere from two to four strikes and/or blocking
maneuvers. Once the student has practiced these
exercises, he or she will then learn be taught a
linear set which utilizes the elbows, and then an
eight section circle walking form which integrates
the elbow striking exercises. Here the student
learns how to incorporate the use of the elbows
with the continuous circular patterns and twisting,
rotating, and turning motions of Pa Kua Chang.
Another stage of training the student in
Park's

school will enter after he or she has completed the
basic elbow set, the eight elbow combination set,
the forty eight month palms, and the supplemental
palms is the practice of "speed combinations."
When students begin this training, Park will assign
each student a two, three, or four combination
sequence of palms, fists, and/or elbows to practice.
Each student is given his or her own sequence "by
prescription." Park assigns the sequence based on
the techniques and combinations which best suit
each individual student's size, build, character,
temperament, and ability.
Along with the first speed combination, the
student is assigned "homework." This homework
consists of practicing the combination hundreds of
times until it becomes second nature, and exploring
all of its possibilities. Say the student was given a
one-two combination with the left followed by a
one-two combination with the right. The student
would practice that combination until he or she could
perform it smoothly, rapidly, and with power. Then
the student would begin exploring variations of that
combination based on different attack/defense,
The Basic Elbow Exercises   
The basic elbow exercises of Park's system are
designed to teach the student how to begin to
learn simple high/low, left/right blocking
patterns using the forearms and then combine
those patterns with the shaking palm strike.
These exercises introduce the importance of
using a rotational motion of the arm around
the arm's central axis in deflecting an
opponent's strike, adhering to their force, and
redirecting that force. In all of these exercises,
the power is provided by the turning of the
body around its central axis (as in the shaking
palm exercise), and the "skill" of the
movement is in the rotation of the forearms in
redirecting the opponent's force.
If the practitioner blocks an opponent's strike
with his or her forearms and times the rotational
motion of the forearm properly so that the
opponent's force is intercepted and redirected by
151 
left/right, short range/long range, high/low, inside/
outside variables (as explained on pages 41 through
43 of the first volume of this book).
After the student studies and researches the speed
combinations as static drills, he or she will then
combine the combinations with various footwork
methods and then research how these sequences
might best be applied. Park will then check the
student's progress in applying these combinations
and based on that progress, the student will be
assigned a new set of combinations.
In this chapter we will present some of the basic
elbow blocking combinations, explain how the
basic elbow strikes can be combined with the
shaking palm, and then present each of the eight
elbow exercises. Used in combination with the
palm exercises which were presented in the last
chapter, the circle walking footwork which was
presented in Chapter 3, and the Single Palm change
maneuvers presented in Chapter 4, the student will
have a very extensive arsenal of offensive and
defensive movements to study and combine in
various ways.
this rotational energy, the block will be
effective without being percussive or invasive.
Additionally, the practitioner will be able to
"stick" to the opponent's arm and redirect the
force without the use of muscular strength.
The skill is in the timing of the motion and the
angle of the redirecting force.
At the very beginning level, there are
two basic exercises which are practiced and
then several variations are added. The two
basic blocking exercises are designed to
teach the student to be able to block strikes
coming in towards the face and chest from
high and low, left and right, and from
various diagonals. These exercises are very
simple, but they will form the foundation for
more subtle and precise movements and
applications which are taught in the later
stages of training. In practicing these simple blocking

motions the student focuses on the timing of the
body rotation with the rotation of the forearms
and changing of the palms.
Exercise 1:
This exercise is designed to teach the student
how to block with the forearm in a simple
horizontal, inside and outside, blocking pattern.
One important detail in regards to alignment;
when you are executing any of these blocking
motions, keep the forearm angled no less than
135 degrees from the upper arm. If the angle
decreases, you will lose your naturally aligned
strength. You can easily test this. Extend your
arm out so that the upper arm is parallel to the
ground and the forearm is angled between 135
and 165 degrees from the upper arm. Have a
partner push on your hand. Feel the strength and
connection. Now bring your forearm up to a 90
degree angle from your upper arm (elbow bent at
a 90 degree angle). Have your partner push your
hand toward your face. You will find that in order
to resist, you have to use muscle force, whereas
before you could use naturally aligned strength.
You always want to maintain that naturally
aligned strength throughout these exercises.
The exercise is as follows:
1) Begin in the "horse riding" stance as shown in
photo 1-1 below.
2) Bring the right hand up in front of the face and
1-1 1-2
1-2
1-1
Basic Blocking Exercise # 1
Basic Blocking Exercise # 1
152 
the left hand under the right elbow as shown in
photo 1-2 below.
3) Turn the body to the left around its central axis
(hips and shoulders moving together). As the
body moves, the forearm rotates and the palm
changes to face the body. The elbow, forearm,
and hand remain aligned along the center of the
body. The bottom palm also rotates to turn
upward. See photo 1-3.
4) Turn the body back to the right keeping the
hips and shoulders aligned. As the body turns,
the forearm rotates once again and the palm
changes to face away from the body. The hand
remains in front of the face. See photo 1-4.
From this position you can continue this
identical motion back and forth in continuous
repetitions with the right hand, or you can
alternate the hands after each repetition. That is,
you can block with the right hand to the inside,
then right hand to the outside, followed by a
block with the left hand to the inside and the left
hand to the outside. It is best to start out
practicing continuous repetitions on one side at a
time, until you get the timing and motion feeling
natural, before you try to practice the alternating
sides variation of this exercise.
Once you have practiced this exercise
sufficiently in a slow and exact manner, you will
then gradually increase the speed while trying to
remain relaxed and smooth, you will then try to
execute the movement "with power." The power
1-3
1-3 1-4
1-4
  

along a diagonal instead of horizontal. If you 
  look  at  the  photographs  for  exercise  #1,  you 
will  notice  that  Parkʹs  elbow  moves  along  a 
  horizontal  plane  (parallel  to  the  ground) 
while  his  forearm  remains  vertical 
  (perpendicular  to  the  ground).  In  the 
second  exercise  the  forearm  is  angled  (see 
photo  2‐3  on  the  top  of  the  page)  and  the 
  motion  follows  a  45  degree  diagonal  as  the 
right  forearm  first  blocks  down  and  to  the 
  left (photo 2‐3) and then up and to the right 
(photo  2‐4).  This  exercise  is  usually  only 
  practiced  on  one  side  at  a  time.  The  two 
 
sided (alternating sides) version of this exercise 
  2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4
is  practiced  in  conjunction  with  the  shaking 
Basic Blocking Exercise #2
palm 
     
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
   
V1-1 V1-2   V1-3 V1-4
   
Basic Blocking Exercise #2 
 
   
 
   
here is in a quick crisp rotation of the hips along a diagonal instead of horizontal. If you
and shoulder around the body's central axis, look at the photographs for exercise #1, you will
combined with a quick and crisp rotation of notice that Park's elbow moves along a
the forearm. Do not try and place too much horizontal plane (parallel to the ground) while
of the "power" in the side-to-side motion. his forearm remains vertical (perpendicular to
The emphasis and "snap" of power is in the the ground). In the second exercise the forearm
rotational motion of the forearm. Also, do not is angled (see photo 2-3 on the top of the page)
let the arm move too far to the outside when and the motion follows a 45 degree diagonal as
blocking. The side-to-side motions should be the right forearm first blocks down and to the
relatively small. left (photo 2-3) and then up and to the right
(photo 2-4). This exercise is usually only
Exercise 2: practiced on one side at a time. The two sided
The second exercise is performed exactly like (alternating sides) version of this exercise is
the first, except the blocking motions are now practiced in conjunction with the shaking palm
 
 
 
 
 
 
153 

  V2-1 V2-2
  Basic Blocking Exercise #2
strike (see photos on page 156).
Variation #1:
The first variation of the basic exercises is an
exercise which combines the horizontal block of the
first exercise with the angular block of the second
exercise. In this blocking variation, the student will
first block inward, however, the hand remains in
place while the elbow moves in and across the body.
This motion requires an increased degree of
flexibility in the area of the shoulder, elbow, and
forearm (see photo VI -3 on the previous page).
After the inside block is executed, you execute
the same upward outside block which was executed
in the last exercise (see photo Vl-4). Ideally, you
will want to keep the tip of your middle finger fixed
in space as you block back and forth across the
body. In keeping the tip of the middle finger fixed
in space and directly in front of your face, you will
always be covered, and you will learn how to
effectively block with your forearms and elbows
while executing very small lateral motions.
Variation #2:
The next exercise is a variation of the first
blocking drill. In this variation you will only
execute the inside blocking portion of the first
exercise. In other words, you will bring the right
hand up (see photo V2-2) and across to the front
in the execution of an inside blocking motion (see
154 
V2-3
 
photo V2-3) and then bring the left hand up and
across the front in the same manner. You will
continue this right-left alternating pattern in a
crisp and rapid manner. This exercise helps you to
learn how to gain speed in motion while
maintaining proper mechanics and accuracy.
While all of these blocking drills might seem
relatively simple, practicing these exercises will
form a foundation for all of the exercises which
follow. Therefore, a serious study of these simple
exercises will be to the student's advantage later
on.
Basic Blocking Combined with Shaking Palm
Once the student has spent some time
practicing the basic blocking drills, these
movements are combined with the shaking palm
exercise which was presented in the first volume
of this book.
Exercise #1:
In this exercise, the shaking palm is combined
with the inward elbow block of the basic
blocking variation # 1. As always, the student
first practices this motion slow and exact. The
sequence is shown in the photographs at the top of
the next page. In photos 1 through 3, Park is
shown executing the shaking palm movement as
it was detailed in the previous volume of this book.
After the strike of the shaking palm reaches it peak

  1 2
  Basic Blocking Combined with Shaking Palm #1
power, you will want to let the inward elbow
blocking motion naturally follow the recoil of the
arm (see photo 4 at the top of the page). The
movement from start to finish should look as
though it is one continuous motion. As soon as the
wrist has "snapped" and the whipping power of the
shaking palm has been applied, you will
immediately and crisply rotate your forearm so that
the palm turns to face upward and you will bring
your elbow in towards your centerline.
Once you have completed the exercise on one
side (as shown above) you will then execute the
same sequence with the other hand. The practice of
this exercise is very fluid as the practitioner
alternates throwing the shaking palm from one side
to the next. This exercise provides a good
foundation for the two handed exercise which
follows and for elbow exercise #8.
Exercise #2:
In this exercise, the student will take the
movements which were practiced in the previous
exercise and involve both hands in the blocking and
striking maneuvers. This exercise combines several
of the previous blocking exercises with the shaking
palm exercise.
The exercise is executed as follows:
1) From the horse stance, you will bring the hands
out in front of the body. The right hand is in front
of the face and the left hand is under the right
155
3 4
 
elbow (see photos 1 and 2 on the next page).
2) The right arm moves across the front of the
body to block. This movement isexecuted like the
horizontal block which was practiced in the first
basic blocking exercise. The forearm rotates and
the palm turns toward your face. The hips and
shoulders rotate around the body's center and
move to the left. The left hand stays by the right
elbow. Both palms are facing upward (see photo
3).
3) You will now thrown the shaking palm with
the left hand while blocking high and at a diagonal
with the right hand. The right hand block is
thrown like the block you practiced in the second
basic blocking exercise (see photo 4).
4) As soon as the left palm is thrown, the forearm
rotates crisply and the elbow is brought in towards
the centerline of the body. This movement is
exactly like the movement practiced in the last
exercise. The right hand comes down by the left
elbow. Both palms are facing upward (see photos
5 and 6).
5) Now you are ready to throw the strike on the
other side. Throw a right shaking palm while
blocking upward and at a diagonal with the left
hand (see photos 7 and 8).
The exercise is now repeated from side-to-side.
You should practice until you can execute this
exercise with continuity, speed, and power. You
will notice that this exercise combines the
movements of several of the previous exercises.
 
  

1 2 3 4
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  5 6 7 8
 
 
Basic Blocking Combined with Shaking Palm #2 
 
 
Experience has shown that students who have book.
not practiced the previous exercises for a After you have gained a sufficient amount
sufficient length of time will have problems of experience in the practice of these blocking
learning how to execute this exercise properly. elbows, you may want to try a partner exercise
Practice of this particular exercise will then lead which helps you to understand how these
the student into the practice of Park's straight blocks are used in combination with the eight
line Pa Kua Chang combat sets. direction rooted stepping footwork. The drill is
We will not present the straight line combat to place one arm behind your back and have a
sets in this book. However, if you have practiced partner attack you. He can attack high and low,
the "eight direction rooted stepping" footwork left and right, continuously and you have to
and combined it with the shaking palm as we defend all of his attacks using only one arm in
presented in the previous volume of this book, combinations with footwork. If you know how
you should be able to easily express this blocking to use your footwork in combination with the
and shaking palm movement in combination with blocking exercises shown in this section, you
the jump step. The majority of Park's straight can be successful in blocking all of your
line combat sets are simple exercises which opponent's attacks. The key is in the footwork.
combine the palm, elbow, kicking, and footwork
exercises which have all been presented in this

156 

The Eight Elbow Combinations Drills 
Now that you have gained a basic foundation
in the use of the elbows in blocking, we will
move to the use of the elbows in striking. This
elbow set is designed to teach the student how to
use power in striking with the elbows in various
directions and to begin to learn how to combine
elbow strikes with palm strikes, fist strikes, and
elbow blocks. While practicing these exercises
(first slowly, then with increased speed, then with
power, then with speed and power, then with
footwork) you will notice that, although the
elbow striking mechanics are the same as
executed in the various forty-eight month palms,
there will be a slight difference in the movement
and connections of the torso. This is because the
power is ending at the elbow and not moving all
the way out to the hand. Therefore your "chain of
motion" is shorter and more compact.
The elbow exercises will also increase the
flexibility in the area your latissimus dorsi
muscles and the mid-back region. If this area is
tight on your body, do not practice the elbow
exercises with power until you have loosened this
area. Practice of the chopping palm exercise
which was presented in the last chapter, and the
"basic eight" ch'i kung numbers 4 through 6, will
help to loosen this area of your back and prepare
you for practicing the elbow exercises.
Because the power of an elbow strike cannot
rely on an articulation of the elbow and wrist, as a
palm strike can, your shoulder will have to be
very loose in order for the power to be full.
Therefore, when throwing elbow strikes, always
remember to keep your shoulders relaxed.
Tension in the shoulders will severely limit the
amount of power you will be able to generate in
the elbow strike.
One other important point to keep in mind
when practicing all of the elbow exercises is that
you do not want to "wind up" in order to produce
power. When you are throwing combinations, the
"wind up" wastes valuable time. Rely on the
power from your legs and torso to express itself
crisply and sharpy in the throwing of the elbow.
157
We will now present the Eight Elbow
Combination exercises:
Elbow Exercise 1:
This first exercise is designed to teach the
student how to execute an upward striking elbow
followed by a horizontal elbow strike. The power
in the legs and torso for the upward strike is
similar to that of the "lifting palm" described in the
last chapter. However, because of the way the
elbow is bent, a greater degree of flexibility in the
area of the ribs and back is required to perform the
elbow strike. In executing the horizontal strike,
mechanics similar to that of the "cutting palm" are
utilized. The exercise is performed as follows:
1) Begin in a horse stance with the hands held
beside the ribs, palms facing upward, as shown in
photo 1-1.
2) Bring the right elbow straight upward. In
executing this movement the hips and shoulders
are slightly turned to the left. The right side of the
torso is expanded (expand the ribs) as the left side
is sunken downward (ribs compress). The right
hand forms a fist with the pinky side of the fist
facing upward. See photo 1-2.
3) From the exact position shown in photo 1-2,
twist the hips and shoulders to the left as the fist
rotates inward so that the pinky side of the fist is
facing towards the left. Throw the right elbow
horizontally across the body to the left. It is very
important that you do not "wind up" when
executing this second elbow strike. The tendency
for beginners is to pull the elbow to the right
before throwing it across the body to the left. This
little wind up wastes time. You should go straight
up with the first elbow and then immediately go
straight across the body. See photos 1-3 and 1-4.
4) Now twist the hips and shoulders back to the
right and throw the upwards striking elbow with
the left elbow, then continue the exercise on the
left side as shown in photos 1-5 through 1-7.
In application, the upwards striking elbow can
be used as a strike just under the opponent's
 
 

  1-1 1- 2
1-5 1- 6
sternum. In joint locking and breaking
applications it can be used to lock or break the
opponent's elbow. The horizontal strike has many
various applications. It can follow the upward
sternum strike by striking the chest, shoulder, or
sternum a second time. It can be used in striking
the opponent's shoulder to the inside or outside.
It can also be used to lock or break the opponent's
elbow. This elbow can also strike the areas of the
opponent's head and face.
As stated above, the combination of these two
elbows can be used if you get inside your
opponent's defenses and can execute the
upward strike to the area just under the
opponent's sternum as you jump step in
through the opponent's center. With this
strike the opponent will be
158
1- 3 1-4
1-7
thrown backwards as your strike lands in this
vulnerable area and your body moves through his
center. As his body moves backwards, you execute
another jump step and throw the horizontal elbow
to his sternum or just inside the shoulder at the
point where the shoulder meets the chest.
Another useful application of this elbow
combination occurs when you use the upward
moving elbow to block inside an opponent's
punch. You slip the punch and deflect the punch
by bringing the elbow up inside the opponent's
punching arm. Your arm will serve to deflect the
opponent and guard your face and head at the
same time. Once you have slipped inside the
opponent's punch with the upward moving elbow,
you can then throw the horizontal elbow to the
 
  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  2-1 2- 2 2- 3 2-4
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  2-5 2- 6 2-7
 
opponent's head. as shown in photos 2-1 through 2-3.
When practicing this exercise with stepping 2) Following the horizontal elbow strike, you will
movements, you can practice executing the jump immediately rotate the hips and shoulders back to
step with the first elbow and then another jump the right and use that momentum to throw a
step with the second elbow, or you can execute a downward striking elbow. The mechanics of this
jump step with the first elbow and then a pivot step elbow in the area of the torso are similar to that of
with the second elbow. the slapping palm. As the elbow is thrown, the fist
rotates so that the back of the fist is facing away
Elbow Exercise 2: from you. The bend in the elbow is no less then
135 degrees. A common mistake is to have the
The second elbow exercise builds on the first elbow be bent at a 90 degree angle when throwing
exercise by adding a downward striking elbow to this downward strike.
the one-two combination of the first exercise. This 3) After executing the one-two-three combination
exercise is performed as follows: on the right side, continue the exercise by
executing the sequence on the left.
1) Execute the same steps as the previous exercise
In application, the third elbow is used to strike

159 
  

3-1 3- 2 3- 3 3-4

3-5 3- 6 3-7 3-8

vital areas on the opponent's legs and arms when he kicks or punches. In
many instances, when Park is applying this elbow to an opponent's ankle or
wrist, he will catch the opponent's ankle or wrist with his other hand moving
upward under the ankle or wrist in order to produce a "sandwiching" effect.
This third elbow strike can also be a nice follow-up to the combination
discussed previously where the first upward moving elbow slips inside an
opponent's attack and the second horizontal elbow strikes his head. After the
second elbow has connected with the opponent's head, the third strike can
come down and smash the opponent's collar bone.

Elbow Strike 3:
 
3-9
The third elbow combination of this series is similar to the first.
 
However, instead of throwing the upward elbow followed by the
horizontal elbow, this exercise will begin the sequence with the horizontal elbow

160 
  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  4-1 4- 2 4- 3 4-4
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   
  4-5 4- 6 4-7
 
After the horizontal elbow is thrown, the right angle of the upward and horizontal strikes of
downward striking elbow is executed as in the last the previous two exercises). See photo 3-2.
exercise. In this exercise, as a tag to the end of the 3) Now execute the downward elbow strike as it
downward elbow strike, you will spear forward was performed in the last exercise. See photo 3-3.
with the fingers in an upwardly spearing strike, 4) Immediately after executing the downward
then curl the fingers and pull back in towards your elbow strike, straighten the fingers and spear the
body. These last few moves are executed as if you hand strike forward at an upward angle of about
are spearing the opponent in the throat and then 45 degrees. The power here is similar to that of the
curling your fingers to hook under the opponent's lifting palm which was presented in the last
jaw bone and pull him towards you. The exercise chapter of this book. See photo 3-4.
is executed as follows: 5) Immediately after the spearing motion has
1) Begin in the horse stance with the hands beside occurred, curl the fingers as you pull the arm back
the ribs and the palms facing upwards as shown in down towards the body, ending with the elbow
photo 3-1. pointed downward and the arm bent at a 135
2) Turn the hips and shoulders around the body's degree angle. See photo 3-5.
centerline and bring the right elbow up and across 6) Repeat the sequence on the other side.      See 
the body in an arcing motion (as opposed to the photos 3‐6 through 3‐9. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
161 

In order to train your body to perform efficient
and effective combinations, you should work to
make the execution of either a spearing strike with
the fingers, an upward lifting palm strike, or a
uppercutting fist strike, a natural follow-up to the
downward striking elbow. The execution of a
shaking palm would also work well in
combination with the downward striking elbow.
Exercise 4:
Exercise number four begins with a vertical
elbow strike followed by a horizontal elbow strike,
just as in exercises one and two. After the
horizontal strike is thrown, you will immediately
throw a backfist. The exercise is performed as
follows: 1) Start from the horse stance. Throw the
upward elbow and then follow that by the
horizontal striking elbow just as you did in
exercises one and two. See photos 4-1 through 4-3.
2) Immediately following the horizontal strike,
turn the hips and shoulders back towards the front
and execute a forward striking backfist. When
throwing the backfist, allow the whipping of the
body to cause the forearm to whip around as if
your forearm is a rope and your fist is a rock on the
end of that rope. As your forearm whips forward,
allow the wrist to be very loose and "snap" at the
very end of the forearm's arcing motion. Strike
with the first two knuckles of the hand. By striking
with the first two knuckles in a crisp snapping
motion (using the "wrist power" which was
discussed in the last chapter) you will be able to
strike very accurately to the opponent's vital
points.
The horizontal elbow followed immediately
by a backfist is a common technique in Park's Pa
Kua. As we discussed in the "Distance and
Degree" section of Chapter 2 of this book, the
backfist will hit the opponent up the chain of his
joints. In other words, if the elbow hits the wrist or
ankle, the backfist will hit the knee or elbow, if the
elbow hits the elbow or knee, the backfist will hit
the shoulder or hip, if the elbow hits the shoulder,
sternum, or hip, the backfist will hit the body or
head. Throwing the backfist after a horizontal or
diagonal elbow strike should become a habit.
During the execution of the first four elbow
exercises, you have learned an upward striking
162 
elbow, a horizontal striking elbow, and a
downward striking elbow. You have learned how
to practice these elbows in combination with one
another and you have learned how to add a
spearing strike and a backfist to these
combinations. Learning the spearing strike, which
could have also been a lifting palm or uppercutting
fist, as a follow-up to the downward striking elbow,
and the backfist as a follow-up to the horizontal
striking elbow, teaches you how to begin to build
efficient follow-up combinations to these common
elbow applications. All of these combinations
should now be practiced with footwork.
The next four elbow striking sets will start to
combine various elbow strikes with palm strikes.
You will also learn how to use your elbows in four
new ways. In exercise five you will learn how to
strike with the elbow towards the rear. This kind
of application is most commonly used as a
blocking motion to protect your ribs when your
opponent is attempting to strike or kick you there.
However, at very close quarters, it can also be
applied as a strike to the opponent's body. This
rearward striking elbow follows the horizontal
elbow which you learned in exercise number three.
This horizontal striking elbow tends to open up the
area of the ribs on the striking side and thus in
elbow number five, you will learn how to
immediately protect that area after you have
opened it up in the execution of a horizontal
striking elbow.
In exercise six, you will learn how to employ
the elbow in striking downward at a diagonal and
you will learn how to follow this strike naturally
with a horizontal strike with the elbow to the
outside of your body. The first horizontal strike
you learned was across the body and the forearm
led the strike. The horizontal strike in exercise six
will be a horizontal strike to the outside with the
upper arm leading. The horizontal elbow strike in
exercise six is followed by the "white clouds
chasing the stars" palm.
In exercise number seven you will learn how
to employ the elbow to the upward moving
diagonal. This upward diagonal elbow is
preceded by the shaking palm blocking
combination which was presented in the first
section of this chapter and it is followed by a
chopping strike with the hand.
  

   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  5-1 5- 2   5- 3 5-4
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
     
  5-5 5- 6 5-7
Exercise 5:
 
The upward moving diagonal elbow is mostly used Exercise 5:
as a blocking motion against an opponent's axe
kick or downward chopping strike. It is also an Elbow exercise five combines the shaking palm
outstanding defense against a head-butt. Exercise strike with the horizontal striking elbow you
eight takes elements that have already been practiced in exercise three and a rearward striking
practiced and puts them together in a speed elbow. The exercise is executed as follows:
sequence to help the practitioner work on fast and
efficient motion. 1) Begin in the horse stance and then execute
As you can see, in executing the set of eight The horizontal striking elbow which you learned
elbow exercises, the student learns how to employ in exercise number three as shown in photos 5-1
the elbow in nine directions (up, down, left, right, and 5-2.
diagonally up to the left and right, diagonally down 2) As you can see in photo 5-2, the horizontal
to the left and right, and to the rear). He or she also elbow will open up your ribs on the side of the
learns how these elbows can be efficiently striking elbow and leave them susceptible to a
combined with each other and with various finger, strike there if your elbow strike does not hit its
palm, and fist strikes. We will now continue with mark. In order to cover yourself, this exercise
the exercises. teaches you to cover your ribs with a rearward
  moving elbow. As the elbow is brought back, the
 
   
   
 
 
 
 
163 

6-1 6- 2
6-5 6- 6
hips and shoulders are turned around the body's
center. See photo 5-3.
3) After the rearward moving elbow is thrown,
you will then execute a shaking palm strike to the
front. The shaking palm was presented in the
previous volume of this book. See photo 5-4.
4) After you have thrown the shaking palm, you
will then execute the same sequence on the other
side. See photos 5-5 through 5-7.
Exercise 6:
In exercise six you will learn how to throw an
elbow strike in a downward diagonal direction.
This strike is then followed by a horizontally
moving elbow to the outside of the body. The
downward diagonal striking elbow is a very good
strike to use on the opponent's hand if he has
164 
6- 3 6-4
6-7 6-8
grabbed your wrist. It can also be used as an
elbow lock or break, as a strike to the opponent's
foot or knee if he kicks you, as a strike to the
opponent's hip joint, or as a strike to the
opponent's shoulder joint. If striking to the back
of the opponent's shoulder joint on the downward
diagonal, the horizontal elbow strike which
follows in this exercise is a very good follow-up
when aimed at the opponent's head or spine. If the
diagonal strike is directed at the inside of the
opponent's shoulder joint, the horizontal strike
can then be aimed at the opponent's head or
sternum. In this exercise the horizontal strike is
then followed by the "white clouds chasing the
stars" palm which was presented in the last
chapter. The sixth exercise is executed as follows:
1) From the horse stance turn the hips and
shoulders around the body's center and throw a
  

7-1 7- 2 7- 3 7-4

7-5 7- 6 7-7 7-8

downwardly directed elbow which comes across the body and down at a
downwardly directed elbow which comes across the body and down at a
45 degree angle. See photos 6-1
  and 6-2.
45 degree angle. See photos 6-1
  and 6-2.
5) Turn the hips and shoulders back around the body's center in the other
2) Turn the hips and shoulders back around the body's center in the other
direction and throw the right  elbow directly out to the right side. Your
direction and throw the right  elbow directly out to the right side. Your
shoulder must remain very relaxed during the execution of this movement
shoulder must remain very relaxed
  during the execution of this movement
if you are going to develop the
  right kind of power in this strike. See photo
if you are going to develop the right kind of power in this strike. See photo
6-3.  
6-3.
6) Now unfold the right arm   and turn the palm to face upward with the
3) Now unfold the right arm  and turn the palm to face upward with the
fingers facing forward (there is not a photo of this move on this side, see
fingers facing forward (there  is not a photo of this move on this side, see
photo 6-7 for an illustration of this move on the other side). Bring the left
photo 6-7 for an illustration of
  this move on the other side). Bring the left
hand forward and up and the right hand down and to the rear in the
  right
hand forward and up and the hand down and to the rear in the
  execution of the "white cloud   chasing the stars" palm as presented in the
execution of the "white cloud chasing the stars" palm as presented in the
                  7-9 last chapter of this book.  
last chapter of this book.
  7) Now fold the left elbow and  turn the hips and shoulder back to face the
4) Now fold the left elbow and turn the hips and shoulder back to face the
  front as the elbow folds. Next  twist the hips and shoulders to the right and
front as the elbow folds. Next  twist the hips and shoulders to the right and
  throw a left elbow down at a diagonal. See photo 6-5. Continue with the
  throw a left elbow down at a  diagonal. See photo 6-5. Continue with the
sequence on this side as shown in photos 6-6 through 6-8.
  in
  sequence on this side as shown photos 6-6 through 6-8.
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
165 
  

   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
     
  8-1 8- 2   8- 3 8-4
    
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
     
  8-5 8- 6   8- 7 8-8
    
  Exercise 7:  
   
  Exercise seven begins with  the execution of the first elbow block with the
   
shaking palm which was presented in the first section of this book and then
   
  employs an upwardly diagonal   blocking elbow followed by a chopping
  motion with the hand. This exercise
  is executed as follows:
  1) From the horse stance, execute
  the shaking palm followed by the inward
  elbow block which was described
  in the first section of this chapter. See
  photos 7-1 through 7-3.  
  2) From the inward blocking  elbow, keep the elbow bent and bring it upward
   
  at a 45 degree angle. Bring the
  left hand up to the right fist for support. This
    elbow is a blocking "wedge" which is used to block an axe kick, a downward
                8.9 chopping strike, or a head-butt.
  See photo 7-4.
   3) Now follow the upward diagonal
  elbow block with a side hand chop with
   
the right hand. See photo 7-5.
  4) Continue by executing the  exercise on the opposite side. See photos 7-6
   
  through 7-9.  
     
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
166 
  

Exercise 8: palm changes.

In researching the use of the elbow in fighting,
Exercise eight is a combination of elements the student will always remembers the principles of
you have practiced in the previous seven exercises. "distance and degree." All elbow applications have
It is used primarily to teach a very fast and efficient a specific time and place to be employed for
palm-elbow combination. When this exercise is maximum efficiency and power. Examining the
practiced, the student can learn how to generate a usage of the elbow strike to various parts of the
great deal of speed in striking. The speed trained in opponent's body and in combination with the forty
this exercise helps the student transition into the eight month palms, supplemental palms, single
follow-on "speed combination" training. The palm change, and circle walking, k'ou pu and pai pu,
exercise is executed as follows: and eight direction rooted stepping footwork is a
1) From the horse stance, execute the shaking study which requires much research and
palm followed by the inward elbow block as was exploration.
practiced in exercise seven. See photos 8-1 through
8-3.
2) Now execute the rearward striking elbow
which was practiced in exercise five. The flow
from the inward blocking elbow of photo 8-3 to
the rearward striking elbow of photo 8-4 should
be continuous, smooth, and without hesitation.
It should appear to be one fluid motion.
3) Now throw a horizontal cross-body elbow as
was practiced in exercises three and five. See
photo 8-5.
4) Continue the exercise on the other side. See
photos 8-6 through 8-9.

Conclusion

In practicing all of the basic elbow blocking drills

and the eight elbow striking sets, the student in
Park's school gains a fundamental knowledge of
generating power in an elbow strike and using the
elbow in fighting. Of course, as always, the
sequence of training these elbow drills is to first
practice them as outlined in this chapter slowly,
then gradually add speed, then add power, then
execute with speed and power, and then with the
eight direction rooted stepping. After that sequence
of training has been accomplished, the student then
learns the eight elbows straight lines sets and circle
walking set. After the student gains some
experience utilizing these elbows in the circle
walking format by practicing the eight elbows circle
walking form, he or she then adds the elbow strikes
into other circle walking sets in combinations with
the forty eight month palms, supplemental palms,
and the single and double

167 
  

168 
  

Chapter 7
Pa Kua Chang Ch’i Kung 

169 

Chapter 6 
Pa Kua Chang   
Elbow Training 
In the last volume of this book we presented a few of
Park Bok Nam's ideas about ch'i kung and described
some very basic breathing exercises, movement
exercises, and meditations. In this volume we will
not discuss the breathing methods further because, as
we said in the last volume, Park likes to reserve the
teaching of breathing methods to individual students
because he believes that the breathing methods
beyond those described in the first volume should be
given by "prescription" only. In this volume we will
work primarily with a ch'i kung exercise set which is
designed to strengthen the internal organs, loosen the
joints and muscles, and harmonize the body, breathe,
and mind. We will also talk a bit more about
meditation. Before we begin to talk about the actual
exercises and techniques, we will have some
discussion about ch'i kung in general.
What is Ch'i Kung?
Because almost every traditional medical,
martial, religious, physical, and, in many cases,
scholarly disciplines in China have a tradition of
ch'i kung ( ) practice, it is very difficult to
strictly define the "hows and whys" of ch'i kung
without putting it in the context of the discipline in
which it is practiced. Each discipline, and each of
the various schools within those disciplines,
practice ch'i kung with different goals in mind and
thus each has a different criteria and method for
practice. There are literally hundreds of ch'i
kung methods in China, each traditional method
having its own fairly unique systematic approach
170 
to practice. Additionally, terms such as nei kung
( ) and nei tan ( ) are also used frequently to
describe exercises and methods which some might
also call ch'i kung and vice-versa. Thus ch'i kung
methods can really only be defined within the
discipline they are to be practiced and in the context
of each individual's personal practice.
While most martial arts schools will have their
own definitions for terms such as ch'i kung and nei
kung and will probably have separate training
methods which they place under these categories of
practice, each school's definition tends to be slightly
different. While some schools might call one thing
ch'i kung, another school might call that same thing
nei kung. Also, some schools will call all of their
internal practices ch'i kung while others will call all
of their internal practices nei kung.
Some people will say that "traditionally" all
internal practices were called nei kung and that ch'i
kung is a fairly modern term. However, there are
others who will say the exact opposite. In this chapter
we will not argue semantics, nor will we provide our
own view about how the terms ch'i kung and nei
kung are defined or how their methods might differ.
For the purpose of this book, it will suffice to say that,
in most cases, the practices which are grouped under
these terms are so similar that the terms can be used
synonymously. In this book, we will group all
"internal" practices involving the coordination of
breath, mind, and body under the "umbrella" of the
term ch'i kung.
"Kung” literally means ʺeffortʺ or ʺwork,ʺ ʺmeritʺ 

or "achievement," and "usefulness" or
"effectiveness." If we choose our definition of ch'i
kung to be "ch'i work" or "ch'i achievement," we
can see that almost every form of physical, mental,
or breath exercise could possibly fall into this
category since everything we do involves the use
of our ch'i. In this book we will focus on a small
slice of the ch'i kung spectrum of exercises and
techniques in that we will only be discussing
methods which are typically taught as Pa Kua
Chang ch'i kung training. However, even these
methods will vary from school to school because
many instructors have added ch'i kung training
to their Pa Kua programs which they have
borrowed from other martial arts styles and other
internal disciplines (religious, medical, etc.)
Since Pa Kua Chang is an internal martial art,
some of the goals of ch'i kung practice as it relates
to Pa Kua development would be a balanced, full,
smooth, strong, distribution of energy in the body,
a harmonization of the mind, breath, and body
motion, and a refinement of all internal processes.
The results of the practice should be a strong,
internally healthy body, efficient and effective use
of the body in martial arts application, the ability
to issue a great deal of martial power through very
subtle body motions, and a heightened state of
awareness and sensitivity to one's internal body
and external environment. Pa Kua ch'i kung
methods are designed with these goals in mind.
Mutual Dependence
One important concept to understand before
discussing ch'i kung practice is the idea of mutual
dependence of the various systems of the body
and the relationship between the systems of the
body and the world outside the individual body.
The traditional Chinese model of the universe,
both inside and outside the body, is based on a
concept of energetic relationships and an
energetic continuum. All things in the universe,
and in the human body, interact and mutually
support one another. Any one thing only has
existence and meaning within the context of the
whole. Nothing exists in isolation.
It is important to know that all internal
systems of the body have interdependencies and
overlapping functionalities. There is an internal
system of checks and balances, modeled by the
171
five element theory in Chinese medicine, which
serves to keep the body in balance and healthy.
In practicing ch'i kung, this system of checks and
balances must be respected. If there is a deficiency
or excess in any one part of the body, the rest of
the body will be affected. The problem with
practicing ch'i kung when one part of the body is
out of balance is that the ch'i kung practice, if it is
not appropriate for that particular condition,
could throw the body even farther out of balance.
This is why individuals who are engaging in the
practice of ch'i kung should be monitored
frequently by a knowledgeable ch'i kung teacher
and why Park will only teach many of his ch'i
kung methods by "prescription."
The relationship between the internal body
and the external environment is also an important
consideration in ch'i kung practice. Park tells his
students to practice in a quiet place which is
shielded from the wind and cold. In fact, when
Park's teacher was meditating and practicing his
breathing exercises, he posted Park as a guard at
the door to keep people from disturbing him. A
quiet atmosphere is important in the practice of
ch'i kung, especially once the student's ch'i
circulation becomes strong.
There are also certain times of the day which
are optimum for practice, concerns about the
quality of the air in the practice area, and certain
directions one should face during practice.
Environmental factors and personal habits (poor
diet, over working, too much drinking, smoking,
too much sex, etc.) all effect the body and the
ch'i. Anyone who is engaged in ch'i kung training
should be under the guidance of a skilled
instructor who knows how to prescribe a ch'i kung
method which is appropriate for that person's
individual constitution and environment. Factors
such as current physical condition (internal and
external), constitution, occupation, character, age,
sex, life-style, experience level, physical and
mental aptitude, and diet should be taken into
consideration when designing an individual ch'i
kung program.
An individual who smokes, drinks excessively,
uses drugs, is sexually overactive, has a poor diet,
or leads a stressful life-style, and thinks he or she
is going to "balance" those unhealthy habits by
practicing ch'i kung can easily hurt themselves
 

more than help themselves. First, the bad habits
should be eliminated and then the body brought
gently back to a healthy state through the practice
of simple methods under the guidance of an
experienced teacher. Only then should the
student go forward with the earnest study and
practice of ch'i kung.
The Goals of Ch'i Kung Practice
As stated previously, the specific goals of ch'i
kung practice will vary from one discipline to the
next, however, in general, the martial arts
practitioner will first want to promote overall
health and well-being by seeking a balanced
distribution of energy in the body and improving
the body's efficiency in terms of energy movement
and usage. This will include methods aimed at
integrating and harmonizing the mind, body, and
breath utilizing a safe, gentle, and well-balanced
approach. Balance, efficiency, and naturalness are
the key elements to building a body which is
strong internally. If the body's internal systems
are not balanced in terms of energy production,
distribution, and consumption, then the body is
not working optimally and any attempt at
utilizing internal energy in a martial arts or
healing practice will only cause further imbalance
and can eventually damage the internal systems.
Only when the body is working in a balanced,
efficient, natural manner should the ch'i kung
practitioner worry about "energy cultivation,"
"energy refinement," building a stronger energy
reserve, or using internal strength in martial arts.
If a dam has a leak, you don't fill the reservoir
with water until the dam is fixed. It seems like
common sense, however there are many
practitioners who practice "power" ch'i kung
methods before their body is fully balanced and
operating efficiently. The power is transmitted
through a system which is not internally
connected and internally balanced and thus this
weak structure is shocked and damaged. It would
be like overloading an electrical circuit - the body
will eventually "blow a fuse."
Power ch'i kung methods should only be
practiced after the student has had a great deal of
experience with much gentler, energy balancing,
ch'i kung methods. This is one reason that Park
has all of his students practice every exercise "slow
172
and exact" before they try to add power to the
movement. The body must be internally
connected and internally balanced before power
training can be initiated. Training for power
without slowly building up through a systematic
series of exercises would be analogous to running
a marathon without ever having practiced any
type of jogging or running exercise prior to the
26 mile run. The body can be severely damaged.
Unfortunately, the damage which is done by the
practice of inappropriate ch'i kung does not
usually manifest right away. Energetic changes
in the body are subtle and gradual. Unless the
practitioner is under the guidance of an
experienced teacher or skilled Chinese medical
doctor, the signs of dysfunction can go unnoticed
until they are blatant enough to be physiologically
confirmed. At this point, the damage is done and
will take a long time to correct.
Park Bok Nam had a student in Korea who
learned a number of ch'i kung exercises from Park
and then got a job working on a merchant ship.
The man practiced on his own while he was at
sea for a year or so and, not heeding the warnings
and advice of his teacher, he over-trained. Too
much of a good thing can cause problems because
the body lacks balance. As a result of his over-
training the exercises without having a teacher's
supervision, the man developed problems. He
experienced dizziness, headaches, buzzing noises
in his ears, and loss of balance. When he returned
home, he came back to Park and described the
problems. Park was able to help the man back to
health, but it took a great deal of time and effort
to do so. Internal damage is not easy to fix.
While the practitioner is involved in ch'i kung
training, he or she should be closely monitored
by a knowledgeable instructor to insure that there
are no "hitches" in the process. If the student is
not participating in a complete method of ch'i
kung under the guidance of a knowledgeable
teacher and is not monitored through the process,
or does not know the next step in the training
process which is supposed to occur after obtaining
results from any given method of practice,
problems can also begin to arise. Because of the
mutual influences any significant energetic
movement or opening in the body has on the
 

rest of the physical body, mind, spirit, and
emotions, there must be a systematic method in
any ch'i kung training which takes results obtained
at each stage of practice and either completes,
balances, varies or continues the process when
each milestone is reached. If an energy gate,
point, or center is opened as a result of training
and the practitioner does not know how or when
the training needs to progress to the next stage,
at best they will stagnate in their training, at worst
they will create a disharmonious condition in
their body.
When a significant energy event (energy
movement, opening, or release) occurs in the
body and the student is not taught how to
advance from that experience, problems can arise.
Unfortunately, these types of energy events may
feel very nice to the practitioner because there
can be an associated "endorphin rush" when the
energy is released. Students who cling to this
experience and do not look past it to the next
level of experience will stagnate in their training
and can sometimes create a shen disturbance
condition by fixating on trying to repeat that one
experience in every training session.
"Power" ch'i gong methods are definitely a
part of the martial arts. If the practitioner wishes
to use internal strength and energy to harm an
opponent in combat, the practice of methods
designed to teach the student how to use internal
energy and internal strength in striking an
opponent are necessary. The forty-eight month
palm exercises comprise part of the power training
methods utilized in Park's system to teach the
student how to issue internal power in combat.
Additionally, Park will also teach some of the
power methods, such as the shaking palm
exercise, to those who are only interested in ch'i
kung for health purposes because these methods
aid in the opening up of the energy channels in
the body and help to develop the tan t'ien. But,
as stated above, the student should not jump right
into practicing these methods. There should be
a gradual, systematic, developmental process
taught by an instructor who knows how to cater
to each student's individual needs. Power ch'i kung
methods are not practiced until a strong
foundation is built. Secondly, once the student
173 
begins training these methods, it is vital that he
or she continue to practice ch'i kung methods
which are designed to balance and rebuild the
body's energy.
Many martial artists and Chinese medicine
doctors "burn themselves out" because they do
not balance their practice between energy usage
and energy rebuilding and balancing. A good
internal martial arts teacher with a complete
method will know how to balance a student's
practice between energy usage and energy
rebuilding (yin and yang training methods). In
Park's training program, all of the power training
methods are balanced by receptive, energy
building training methods.
In ch'i kung practice, as it relates to the martial
arts, there should be a systematic process of
training which begins with a program of
balancing the body's energy, structure, and
movement, and then continues with exercises
designed to build internal strength while
maintaining that balance. Once these two goals
are accomplished, the practitioner can then start
to learn how to use that energy for martial
purposes and power. However, once the student
begins this power training it is vital that he or
she continue to balance the training with
rebuilding and cultivation methods. The number
one priority is to maintain a strong, healthy,
balanced internal system, not to see how much
"power" one can obtain.
The Ch'i Kung Training Process
If we trace the lineage of most of the ch'i kung
methods which are practiced today, we will
probably find that they were initially practiced
and taught in the monastic environment of the
Buddhist and Taoist temples in China. In order
to better understand the optimum conditions and
methods for ch'i kung practice it would behoove
us to look at how ch'i kung might have been
practiced at its place of origin. We all know from
watching movies and reading books about
monastic life that the first lesson any young monk
is taught is patience. Patience in practice is
essential. Never be in too much of a hurry. High
quality, long lasting results will not come
overnight. If results are forced to occur before
their time, before the body is ready, there will

inevitably be problems. Those that read about
Park's training with his teacher in the first volume
of this book know that his teacher certainly tested
his patience.
We can imagine that the novice Buddhist or
Taoist monk would be taught a very complete
system of ch'i kung training in a well designed
program which systematically developed the
body, mind, and spirit of the individual and that
the external environment was one which
optimally facilitated this process. Ch'i Kung
practiced in the environment of a monastic life-
style, combined with the proper diet, meditation,
and herbal supplements, provided the individual
with a complete and balanced development.
Once the student had practiced simple methods
which were aimed at developing mental and
physical relaxation, a clear mind, and proper
postural alignments, more advanced methods
were taught. The more specific the ch'i kung
practice became, the more carefully guarded the
life-style, diet, herbal supplements, etc. The
methods that were taught were prescribed
individually. Each student had a mentor who
groomed and handled that student's development
according to that individual's particular needs.
This is how solid, long lasting results are obtained.
It may seem a bit romantic, especially in the
context of our focus on Pa Kua practice in the
modern world, to wonder about the training of
monks in temples in China since the only well
known Pa Kua practitioner who probably spent
time learning in a temple was Tung Hai Ch'uan.
The rest were primarily martial artists and most
did not mix martial arts with religion. However,
as one can see if they examine the biographies of
the first few generations of Pa Kua instructors,
most of them began their training of martial arts
with one teacher in a small village in the
countryside. Thus, while the environment was
not as sterile as the temple's, it was certainly
conducive to proper martial arts and ch'i kung
training, and the systems were taught
methodically and completely. Both Park Bok Nam
and his teacher Lu Shui-T'ien were taught in this
manner.
While the practice of ch'i kung and internal
martial arts methods all day in a monastic
environment or in a remote village somewhere
174 
in the countryside would be the ideal, it is not a
practical option for most of us. However, the
lessons we can learn from those who have
preceded us in this practice are viable today. Find
a skilled teacher with a complete method who
knows how to develop each student on an
individual basis, maintain a life-style and
environment conducive to internal training and
development, and don't be in too great of a hurry
to progress.
We will now take a look at the most important
components of internal martial arts ch'i kung
practice and how they might be trained in Pa Kua.
The Mind in Ch'i Kung Practice
Attainment of consistent mind/body harmony is
one of the major goals of martial arts ch'i kung.
The internal martial arts classics say that "the
mind ( - / or intention) leads the ch'i ( )
and the ch'i leads the strength ( - //)•" This
principle tells us that without the correct mental
intention, the ch'i and strength will not be fully
available. When discussing this principle with his
students, Park Bok Nam gives a few simple
examples to illustrate this point. Park says that if
someone was engaged in an intense
conversation with another person and
unbeknownst to him a third person came up and
put a five pound weight in his hand, he would
probably drop the weight because his mind was
not sending energy to his hand. Because his
mental focus was on the person he was engaging
in conversation, there was no intention in his
hand, thus there was no ch'i and no strength.
However, if that same person were to see
another person ready to place five pounds in his
hand, that five pounds would be easy to hold up
because the mind has sent energy to the hand.
Another example that Park uses to illustrate the
importance of the mind/body connection is to
say that if someone had a perfectly healthy arm
and put that arm in a sling for two weeks, when
he tried to use that arm again, it would be stiff
and would not function well at first. This is
because the arm was not being used and thus the
mind did not send much energy to the arm for
that two week period. When a part of the body is
inactive, energy and blood do circulate to that

area, however, because it is not being used, the
mind only sends a minimal amount of blood and
energy. The point is that if the mental awareness
and intention do not reach all areas of the body,
the energy movement throughout the body will
not be optimal.
In the practice of internal martial arts, we not
only want an optimal flow of energy to all parts
of the body for the purpose of maintaining our
health, we also want to develop an ability to move
energy out to our extremities instantaneously for
use in fighting. This requires that the neurological
and energetic connections be more highly
developed and refined than normal and thus the
mind/body connections which work in relation
with these martial movements need to be
developed to an even greater degree.
There are generally three areas of concern
when discussing the mind as it relates to ch'i kung
or internal martial arts practice. These are: the
overall mental state, mental awareness, and
mental intention. The mental state should be one
of calmness and well-being. The mental
awareness should be one of keen observation and
sensitivity inside and around the body without
the mind becoming pensive. The mental
intention should be focused, yet simple. During
ch'i kung the mind should remain as calm and
inactive as possible while remaining focused and
aware. Next, we will discuss these three aspects
of mental involvement in ch'i kung in more detail.
Cultivating a Feeling of Well-Being
The overall mental state during ch'i kung
practice should be one of inner peacefulness, joy,
and happiness. A sense of ease and happiness
will go a long way in helping to promote the
balanced flow of energy in the body. A general
feeling of happiness and well-being also helps the
body conserve energy. Feelings of sadness, grief,
worry, stress, anxiety, and anger consume energy.
Of course, in internal arts practice, everything
needs to be in a balanced state and thus even
overjoy and over-happiness can consume too
much energy. So the feeling of happiness one
cultivates during practice is a gentle, steady feeling
of joy and calmness. This is why many systems
of ch'i kung start practice with what has become
popularly known as the "inner smile" exercise.
175
Other systems have similar visualization exercises
to promote the feeling of internal well-being at
the beginning of each ch'i kung session.
In Park Bok Nam's system, students practice
one of several different variations of what Park
calls the "happiness" meditation prior to ch'i kung
exercise. This is the second set of meditations
that the student will learn after having spent a
sufficient amount of time with the focusing
(numbers) meditations which was outlined in the
last volume. Two versions of the "happiness"
meditation are explained on the next page.
Along with a sense of happiness, the mind
should be as still as possible during practice. The
innate wisdom the body has in regards to its own
health and well-being is its own best healer and
strength builder. A mind which is too active can
easily interfere with the natural healing process
in a number of different ways. General mental
chatter and noise can be an enormous energy
drain on the body. Combine mental chatter with
worry, stress, or anxiety and the mental energy
drain becomes far worse. Of all the internal body
systems, the brain wastes the most energy. If the
mind is calm and quiet, energy conservation and
rebuilding will reach its optimum.
One need only stay awake all night to know
exactly how an active mind drains the body's
energy. Even if you lay down in a bed and rest
the body, if you do not sleep (rest the mind), the
body's energy will feel drained the next day.
However, if the stories that are told about
meditation masters are true, deep meditation is
even better at recharging the body's energy than
a full night's sleep. Everyone has heard the stories
about meditation masters who can meditate for a
short period of time and feel as though they have
had a full night's sleep. In Park Bok Nam's system
of Pa Kua, students are taught a graduated method
of meditation which leads to what Park refers to
as "empty mind" meditation.
Park himself first experienced the "empty
mind" state after a one year long training retreat
in the mountains of Korea. Upon reaching this
state Park said that he felt as if he had only been
meditating a few minutes, however, it had
actually been several hours. He says that the
feeling one has after this kind of meditation is
one of lightness and the body feels as if it has had
 

The ʺHappinessʺMeditation
There are two versions of the "happiness"
meditation that Park will usually teach to
beginning students. This meditation is taught
after the student has gained some experience
with the "numbers" meditation that was
offered in the first volume of this book. The
reason for this is that it is imperative that the
student gain experience with concentration
before trying any other kind of meditation. If the
student's concentration is not good, his or her
mind will easily wander when performing any
other type of meditation.
After the student has learned to focus his or her
concentration by gaining experience with the
"numbers" meditation, Park will then teach the
"happiness" meditation. Below we describe
two different versions of this meditation.
"Happiness" Meditation #1
In the first version of the "happiness"
meditation, the student begins by imagining a
very clear blue sky and large green field stretch
out in front of where they are sitting or standing.
The image should not include anything but the
green field and the blue sky. This is because we
want to keep the mental picture as simple as
possible. If the student imagines a blue sky with
clouds and birds and a green field with plants,
shrubs, trees, pathways, and flowers, the image
becomes much to complex. You want the image
to be as simple as possible.
After the student has a mental image of
the blue sky and green field, he or she will
then begin the meditation by visualizing a
seed in the ground in the middle of the field.
The focus is placed on that seed as the seed
begins to grow into a flower. The flower
should be the student's favorite flower and
of the student's favorite color. But we are
getting ahead of ourselves. First, the student
will clearly visualize the seed sprouting, the
stem
176
growing upward, the leaves slowly growing, the
flower bud forming, and then the flower slowly
blooming. The student should allow this
sequence to occur very slowly. Do not rush
through this visualization. The meditation ends
just as the flower reaches full bloom. The student
will not continue meditating past this point.
The purpose of this mediation is to allow the
mind to focus on one simple thing that is
progressively growing and makes the practitioner
feel happy seeing it come to fruition. However,
because some individuals do not get too excited
about flowers, Park provides a "happiness"
meditation alternative.
"Happiness" Meditation #2
The second "happiness" meditation is
similar in nature to the first, however, more
people can usually gain the feeling of inner j oy
working with this one than with the flower
meditation.
In this meditation the student begins by
imagining he or she is sitting by the ocean side.
The student visualizes a clear blue sky and a deep
blue ocean. Do not add anything else to the image.
Again, we are trying to keep it simple. As the
student looks out onto the ocean, he or she sees a
boat on the horizon. The student imagines that
this boat is carrying his or her favorite person and
that this person is coming to visit.
For the length of this meditation the student
simply watches the boat get closer and closer as it
sails across the sea. When the boat arrives on
shore, the person the student has been waiting for
exits the craft and the student embraces that
person. Just as the embrace occurs, the meditation
ends.
The duration of both of these meditations can
vary depending on how slow the flower grows or
the boat travels.
 

a full night's rest. If the mind can be trained to
become totally quiet, the natural energy
rebuilding and healing process will be optimum.
If the mind is calm and quiet, the body will
rebuild and heal itself in the most efficient and
effective way possible. This occurs not only
because the mind's interference in the body's
natural healing process is minimized, but also
because the body is conserving a great deal of
energy when the mind is calm. However,
obtaining a quiet mind and internally calm body
is not easy. It takes more patience and
perseverance than most practitioners are willing
to commit.
In our modern society, where the majority of
educated people work on computers and talk on
phones all day, the greatest source of energy usage
is the brain. At the end of the day an office worker
will feel just as physically drained of energy as a
construction worker because of the amount of
energy the mind can consume. Although the
muscles of the office worker will not be sore, the
body will feel just as tired. In order to rebuild the
spent energy and maintain a healthy body the
office worker needs to move the body and relax
the mind. This is why ch'i kung, or internal martial
arts practice, is ideal for our modern day world.
Unfortunately, many who turn to these disciplines
for help never learn how to fully relax the mind.
Relaxing the mind and learning how to create an
internal feeling of well-being and happiness
should be the first priority in ch'i kung practice.
Without the ability to cultivate an internally calm
and peaceful environment, the practitioner will
have difficulty reaching deeper levels of
attainment in practice.
It is always helpful to precede any ch'i kung
practice, circle walking or otherwise, with a simple
"happiness" meditation of some kind. Cultivating
a feeling of well-being, calming the mind, and
forgetting about the outside world will aid in
conserving energy, rebuilding health, increasing
mental focus, and uniting the mind and body.
Mental Intention
After the practitioner can obtain a feeling of
internal well-being and calm the mind, he or she
learns to focus the mind. This was the main
purpose of the "numbers meditation" which was
177
taught in the first volume of the book.
The mental focus, or intention, during ch'i
kung practice should be as simple as possible. If
the mental focus is not simple, the mind is too
active and thus it is using too much energy. The
best kind of mental visualization to use in the
beginning levels of ch'i kung practice which
involves physical motion is a simple image which
brings the mind to the hands. The practitioner
can imagine the hands are moving through water,
lifting something heavy, pushing something,
pulling something, holding something, etc.,
anything which brings a sensation of the hands
moving against some sort of slight resistance.
These images are good to use during an exercise
set such as the "basic ch'i circulation exercise"
which was described in the first volume.
If the mind feels as though the hands are
meeting some resistance, the mind will send
energy to the hands. If energy is sent from the
torso to the hands, without the mind interfering
with the movement of energy between the torso
and the hands, it is circulating naturally and
efficiently through the body. Park says that during
ch'i kung exercise the student should use 10%
physical strength and 90% internal strength
(intention/ch'i). He contrasts this with exercises
that are found in Shaolin ch'i kung where the
practitioner will create tension in the body and
use quite a bit more physical strength. The 10%
physical strength helps put the mind in the
motion. If the hands and arms are completely
limp with no (0%) physical strength, then the
intention will not be correct. The posturing and
intention of the body is similar to that of a cat
getting ready to pounce. It is relaxed, but there is
still mind and energy in the posture and motion.
At the beginning levels of practice the hands
and body should be engaged in simple
movements so that it will be easier for the mind
and body to connect. If the movements are too
complex in the beginning, the mind will be
unable to maintain complete intention and
awareness. This is why Park starts all beginning
students with the "basic ch'i circulation exercise"
which was shown in the first volume.
Usually, beginning level ch'i kung movements
involve simple motions which help facilitate a
full and balanced energy flow in the whole body,
 

starting with the conception (jen mai -
and governing (tu mai - ) meridians. If
the motion of the body is simple and the
alignments are correct, the practitioner can
easily and naturally encourage a strong,
balanced, connected flow of energy in the jen
and tu meridians without the use of strong
intention. The mind need only be focused on
the hands.
If the mind is trying to guide the energy
through the jen and tu meridians, or any other
meridians for that matter, from the torso to the
hands along some special path or energy route,
two problems can occur. Number one is that the
mind is too active. In ch'i kung practice simplicity
is the key element. You want to minimize mental
activity. If the mind is trying to guide the ch'i all
over the body, it is too active and thus it is wasting
too much energy and full body awareness cannot
be maintained. The second problem is in trying
to force the ch'i though pathways it may not be
ready to go through.
A ch'i kung or internal martial arts practitioner
should never try to force energy to move in the
body by utilizing strong mental intention.
Progress in ch'i kung practice should be gentle and
gradual. If you think about your hands, the ch'i
will move to your hands. If it is moving to your
hands, it is moving from the torso, where it is
cultivated and stored, to your hands in the
manner which is most appropriate for your
individual body at that given time. Do not
interfere with the natural process by trying to
guide the ch'i where it does not want to go.
In the practice of ch'i kung, if the physical
movements and body posturing are correctly
designed to gently coax the energy to move in a
balanced manner through all of the body's energy
meridians and collaterals, then one need only
think about the hands and feet during practice in
order to have the proper mental intention. While
sitting or standing still and trying to guide energy
all around your body with your mind can be
somewhat effective, it is inefficient and can lead
to problems. As we will discuss later in the "body
motion in ch'i kung practice" section of this
chapter, if the body is not involved in ch'i kung
practice, the practice is not complete. If the mind
is overinvolved in the practice, the results will not
be as deep and complications can easily arise.
) There are a number of problems which can
arise from ch 'i kung exercises which rely too much
on mental visualization. Aside from the problems
of forcing ch'i where it is not ready to go and
overuse of the brain's energy as discussed above,
specific visualizations can also lead to problems.
Visualizations which run energy along certain
energy meridians can easily lead to energy getting
"stuck" in the body if the mind cannot maintain
full concentration while it is leading the energy.
Once a sufficient amount of ch'i is flowing in body
due to the guidance of a specific mental
visualization, if the mind becomes distracted, the
ch'i will rise to the head. This condition is known
as "rising ch'i" and can be quite uncomfortable
and may lead to migraine headaches, dizziness,
and loss of balance.
Other visualizations which call for focusing on
any particular internal organ or energy center can
cause problems if sending energy to those areas
is not appropriate for the individual's physical
condition. These type of exercises should be
prescribed like drugs. The same is true of color
visualizations and sound meditations. For
example, if a particular individual has liver trouble
or his character is such that he easily loses his
temper, that person should not meditate on the
color red at all. He will only make matters worse.
The use of imagery, visualization, and strong
intention in the practice of ch'i kung or internal
martial arts practice is useful, valid, and
appropriate when practiced correctly. Like
anything else, when needed, this practice should
proceed gradually from very simple to more
complex. The more complex should only be
practiced when the body and mind are ready and
are usually practiced only for specific results
unique to an individual's progress. For instance,
a visualization technique may be practiced to help
correct a specific physical problem, energy
blockage, or energetic imbalance. However, once
those specific results are obtained, the practitioner
always returns to the simple. The rule of thumb
regarding the mind's involvement in ch'i kung is:
simplicity is best.
Mental Awareness
Internal and external awareness are key
elements in martial arts training. In order to
178 

expertly execute the subtle techniques of the
internal martial arts in a combat situation the
practitioner needs to have cultivated a keen
awareness of his own body, its movement, its
energy, and its relationship to the body,
movement, and energy of an opponent.
Sensitivity, awareness, and "listening" energy
( - t'ing ching) are cultivated by forging
a strong mind/body connection during
martial exercise, forms training, and ch'i kung
practice.
Mental intention and mental awareness work
together to provide a full mind/body integration.
The use of intention can be compared to an
outgoing radar signal and awareness can be
compared to processing the return signal. The
mental energy is sent out to all parts of the body,
and then the mind "listens" to what "signals" are
sent back. The eventual goal of practice is to have
intention and awareness in all parts of the body
at all times.
When a new student first learns any martial
arts exercise or form, the mental awareness will
be focused on the gross physical motions of the
exercise or form. The mind and body are busy
working out the physical alignments,
coordination, timing, and balance necessary to
execute the motions correctly. Once the student
has a basic physical understanding of the motions,
the awareness should turn to the physical
subtleties of the movement. The internal
connections, alignments, and mechanics are
cultivated until these components become natural
and efficient.
Once the physical motions, proper alignments,
internal connections and efficient, natural body
mechanics are in place, the student's awareness
can then turn towards the energetic movement
inside and around the body. A simple
visualization, which is designed to move energy
to distal points, can be added to the exercise and
the mind can become aware of how the energy is
moving. Is there a feeling of warmth, buzzing,
tingling, heaviness, pulsing, ticking, etc.? Does
the energy feel as if it is collecting, dispersing,
moving upward, moving downward, moving
right to left, inside to out, etc.? Once the
practitioner becomes conscious of the "ch'i
feeling" and ch'i movement in the body, he or
she tries to cultivate that feeling and then become
179 
aware of new feelings and new sensations. The
more often a feeling is cultivated, the easier it will
manifest and the stronger it will become.
After students in Park's school finish ch'i kung
practice, he will typically ask them what kind of
feelings they encountered during that session. He
wants to know what the student is feeling in order
to monitor the students progress and he wants
the student to be able to think about what they
are feeling. He explains that students should not
always get the exact same feeling each time. If
they do, they need to make adjustments.
Sometimes Park will tell the student to make small
adjustments in the exercise, such as minor
changes in the articulation of the joints. Other
times Park will modify the exercise to a greater
degree or change the student's exercise set all
together if he feels the student is ready for
something new.
As we explained in the last volume, typical
sensations students will feel are numbing,
buzzing, tingling, heaviness, fullness, and/or
warmth. In the last book we also described the
three ch'i circulation types which Park uses to
define ch'i movement in the body. These are: skin
ch'i, nerve ch'i, and bone ch'i. In relating these
types of ch'i circulation with the ch'i feeling that
individuals typically encounter during practice,
Park explains that the tingling sensations usually
indicate that the skin ch'i is the strongest, the
numbing or ticking feeling indicate that the
student is aware of the nerve ch'i. The warm or
heavy feeling indicate an awareness of the bone
ch'i. During practice it is not uncommon that a
student experience a combination of these
feelings.
Once certain feelings and sensations are
cultivated, Park will change the training so that
the student will experience new feelings. For
example, when a student has worked with a
beginning level exercise which is designed to bring
a full feeling of ch'i to the hands, the exercise can
then be changed or modified such that the
intention and movement involves the hands and
forearms simultaneously so that a full ch'i feeling
the entire length of the arms can be obtained.
Once the student has experienced various
sensations of ch'i flowing and moving throughout
the body, he or she will then be led to cultivate

an experiential understanding of the ch'i outside
and around their body, then subsequently they
will work to understand the relationship of their
ch'i to that of other individuals around them.
After the student experiences the movements and
exercises on all of the various levels mentioned
above, he or she can then begin to expand the
awareness in partner drills. The student gains an
awareness of the spacial relationships, timing,
rhythms, and movements of his or her body in
relation to someone else. The body and mind
become sensitive to a partner's movements and
the student learns how to move efficiently and
effectively in relation to the opponent while
moving in accordance with all of the principles of
the internal martial arts.
In order to bring any movement through the
levels of awareness as described above, the
student must have enough patience to repeat each
movement, or sequence of movements, hundreds
of times. Each repetition should be performed
with full mental intention and awareness. If the
repetitions are performed robotically, with no
mind/body interaction, the movements will be
"empty." Unfortunately many students do not
take an exercise or sequence of movements past
the first stage. Once they "learn" the moves
physically, they become bored and want to learn
something new. In ch'i kung practice, the same
exercise or movement sequences need to be
practiced hundreds of times before the student
can gain full awareness and understanding of the
movements.
What the practitioner is seeking in the repetitive
practice of ch'i kung movements is a continuous,
smooth, and fluid flow of energy in the body. If
the intention (mind) is not focused on the
movement, the energy will not be smooth. Park
Bok Nam likens the wandering or distraction of
the mind during practice to a air bubble in a water
hose. When the mind is focused, the body
alignments correct, and the movements fluid, the
energy will flow smoothly and continuously. If
the mind wanders for an instant or is distracted,
the flow of energy will have a slight sputter like
an air bubble getting into a water hose and
disrupting the flow.
While the mind needs to be active and involved
in every body motion, the mind should never
180 
become pensive. As mentioned previously, the
mind should be as still and quiet as possible. The
practitioner should always maintain the status of a
quiet observer. If something happens,
acknowledge it and then let it pass. Using mental
intention and keen awareness one can work to
deepen an experience or strengthen a sensation,
however, it is important that the feeling or
experience be "watched" and nurtured, not
pondered. The mind needs to be thinking in "real
time," which means it is always in the present. If
it is reflecting on the past instant, it is not focused
on what is happening now and that "air bubble"
will occur. Be aware of what is happening in and
around the body in the present instant. Do not
dwell on any particular experience. Each
experience is simply a stepping stone to the next
experience. Each instant leads to the next.
Whenever the student practices there should be
sense of wonder and an open mind, but with a
dose of reality and practicality as applies to
martial arts. What ever feelings and sensations the
student might obtain in practice, he or she should
realize that there is always something more.
Always use common sense in practice. If you feel
a new sensation, do not get too excited about it.
Acknowledge it and then continue "listening" for
new, or deeper, sensations.
When students relate new experiences with ch'i
kung practice to Park, he will always
acknowledge the experience and then point out to
the student that there is something beyond that
experience. He never wants students to overvalue
any given experience. He says in the thirty-five
years he has been practicing he has continually
discovered new things. He says that each time he
thought he was at a "high level," more practice
and experience made him realize later that there is
always more to learn and discover no matter what
"level" you are at. This is the beauty of the
internal arts. The practitioner never stops learning
and discovering.
The message we are trying to relate is that when
practicing ch'i kung, do not limit yourself to
knowledge gained from one or two profound
experiences. Today the internal martial arts are
being saturated with "new age" metaphysics and
"healing" techniques which are being built on
the limited experiences of individuals who have 

touched upon some self-proclaimed "cosmic"
experience. Don't base your reality on a few limited
experiences or overvalue a single experience. There
is always something more. It is best to view all
experiences as rungs on a ladder. Unfortunately,
many times when speaking of mind/body awareness,
some instructors and students like to leave the real,
practical world of the martial and healing arts and
begin to fantasize about phenomenal ch'i powers and
abilities and the attainment of "spiritual
enlightenment" through martial arts practice. While
it is certainly possible to cultivate intuitive
understanding and open up higher levels of
awareness and consciousness through the practice of
internal martial arts and ch'i kung, the nature of the
martial arts vehicle is such that the body /mind
awareness should be integrated fully before the
body/mind/ spirit connection can be cultivated.
Students who expect profound spiritual experiences
to occur before the body is coordinated, connected
and harmonized with the mind are jumping way
ahead of themselves. Whenever asked about spiritual
experiences in the martial arts, Park's response is, "I
do not mix martial arts and religion."
Body Motion in Ch'i Kung Practice
Although there are many ch'i kung exercises
which are practiced while the practitioner is sitting or
standing, the distribution of ch'i throughout the body
is achieved in the most efficient, most effective, and
most complete manner when the body is in motion.
Relaxed, natural, efficient motion of the physical
body inherently promotes the movement of energy
in the body. This is a natural principle of all life -"life
is movement."
If the movements, or series of movements, in an
exercise set are performed such that there is a
relative central equilibrium, the body is aligned
efficiently, and the motions move left, right, up,
down, forward and backward in a balanced
fashion, then the movement of energy in the body
will move towards a balanced state if the mind
does not interfere with that natural balance. As
mentioned in the previous section of this chapter,
the body has an innate knowledge of how to
heal and balance itself if the mind does not try to
181 
overcomplicate the process. If the movements of
an exercise set are designed to gently coax the
balanced distribution of energy in the body with
the help of simple mental visualization, the body
will seek a naturally balanced, strong internal state.
The Yellow Emperor's Classic on Internal
Medicine (Huang Ti Nei Ching), one of the oldest
Chinese medical texts, embraces the principle, "life
is movement." While it is certainly possible to
move energy in the body by using the mind alone,
gentle mental intention combined with physical
movement is much more efficient and is better for
the body as a whole. If the movements are
accomplished through a balanced, systematic
process, starting with simple movements and
gradually increasing the complexity of the
movements, the process will be safe and the results
long lasting. In order to reach optimum health,
muscles, tendons, ligaments, joints, internal organs,
and energy meridians all need to move through
their full range of natural motion everyday. If the
body does not move, things will stagnate, tighten,
and bind up, and eventually problems will arise.
The art of Pa Kua Chang is based on the theory
of change. Nothing stands still. Therefore, the
majority of all ch'i kung performed in Pa Kua
Chang involves moving the body, not standing or
sitting statically. Park Bok Nam says that in order
to have a balanced practice, the practice must
adhere to natural principles. He states that
everything in nature adheres to the trinity of
Chinese philosophy, namely yin/yang theory, five
element theory, and the Yi Jing theory (theory of
change). In nature, yin and yang are represented by
the sun and moon, the earth contains the five
elements, and the theory of change is demonstrated
in the continuous rotation of the sun and moon
around the earth. If there was no sun and moon (yin
and yang), there would be no earth and thus there
would be no five element cycles. If the sun and
moon did not rotate around the earth, life could not
be supported on the earth and thus there would be
no five elements. In order for there to be a balance in
nature, all three principles must be represented. Since
Pa Kua adheres to natural principles, these
components must be present in all aspects of training.

Therefore, in order for the practice to be complete,
the practice should include the idea of continuous
change through body movement.
As we discussed in the last volume, Park Bok
Nam's theory of energy development and
cultivation includes three different "types" of ch'i
in the body. The first is what Park calls "skin
ch'i." This is the ch'i that moves through the
body's energy meridians, channels, and associated
collaterals. When the practitioner practices ch'i
kung and feels a tingling sensation they are
experiencing awareness of the "skin ch'i." This
kind of ch'i can be cultivated through both static
and moving exercise.
The second kind of ch'i Park calls "nerve ch'i."
This is the energy associated with the nervous
system and is experienced when the student feels
a numbing, ticking, or electric shocking. This
energy is best trained through articulation of the
joints through their full range of motion while
maintaining proper body alignments and mental
intention. Without body movement, this kind of
ch'i will not be developed fully. This ch'i is
usually experienced at first as a shock in the area
of the joints or a slight numbing sensation in the
extremities. Slightly adjusting the articulation of
the joints during practice will help the practitioner
experience this kind of energy.
The third type of ch'i in Park's model is "bone
ch'i." This is the energy which courses through
the bones. This type of energy is usually the most
difficult to cultivate because in order for it to
develop their needs to be a good balance and
cultivation of the other two types of ch'i (skin and
nerve). Again, for the fullest development of this
energy, movement is necessary, especially
rotational movement and articulations of the
joints. The practitioner will usually first
experience awareness of this energy as a dull
ache inside the bones as if something inside the
center of the bones is trying to expand outward.
Heaviness of the limbs and hot sensations are also
related to this kind of energy.
The point here in referring to these three
"types" of ch'i in the body is that in order to
progress beyond the awareness and cultivation of
"skin ch'i," the practitioner needs to move the
body. Static sitting or standing ch'i kung will only
182 
aid development to a certain point. In order to
balance the practice the body must move so that
the ligaments and tendons around the organs and
joints will remain loose and supple.
Some schools of Pa Kua will start beginning
students practicing various components of ch'i
kung separately and thus static posture holding,
sitting or standing meditation, and sitting or
standing breathing exercise may be included in the
curriculum. However, later in the development
process, all of these components are brought
together and practiced in conjunction with
progressively more difficult physical body
movements and circle walking footwork.
Body Alignments and Efficient Motion
When learning a set of physical movements, the
first two points of focus are the correct, natural
body alignments and the use of naturally efficient
motion. In terms of energy conservation and
movement, the body works best when all motion is
natural and efficient, the body is relaxed, and the
mind is connected with the motion. Body
alignments which take advantage of the body's
natural strengths will help to conserve energy and
also serve to distribute energy throughout the body
in the most efficient, balanced, and wholistic
manner.
Whenever any student asks Park details about
alignment and posture, his first statement is,
"Whatever feels natural and comfortable." He goes
on to explain that every student has a different
body and so you cannot be too detailed about the
angle and degree of every body motion because
what works for one person will not necessarily
work for another. Park's method is to work with
each student so that they find what is right for them.
But always, the number one rule of thumb is
"natural and comfortable."
When learning proper body alignments, the
student should first be taught how to align his or
her body with the force of gravity and then be
taught how to take advantage of "ground
strength" and naturally strong body positioning.
By "naturally strong" we are referring to
alignments which take advantage of the body's
natural positions of power (those that don't rely
on the use of muscle strength), such as the peng
(ward-off) strength which is emphasized in T'ai
Chi

Ch'uan. These alignments work to teach the
practitioner how to align the body structure such
that the postures are strong and connected to the
ground.
Learning to utilize alignments and ground
strength, the practitioner will not have to rely on
muscle strength in executing the postures or
movements of the practice and the body can
remain relaxed, but strong at the same time. In
Pa Kua Chang, the positions of the "eight mother
palms" (Park's eight animal postures) are usually
used to train the student's postural alignments.
There are no "standard" eight mother palms. All
systems of Pa Kua have slightly different versions
of these body postures. In Park's system these
postures are trained both in standing exercises
and the circle walking form as presented in the
last volume.
In the beginning levels of posture and
alignment training, the students may spend time
holding standing postures in order to become
familiar with the proper alignments. It is much
easier to learn how to align the body correctly
when standing still. However, if students do not
eventually transition from static posture holding
to moving exercise, it will be difficult for them to
learn how to maintain the proper postural
alignments in the context of martial arts
movement. Additionally, practicing only static
posture holding will do nothing for flexibility,
suppleness, and range of motion.
Many students who have trained proper
alignments in static posture holding have a
difficult time maintaining those alignments once
they start moving their body and/or their feet.
In Park's school the typical sequence of training
includes the student first learning eight static
upper body positions (the eight animal palms),
then learning how to maintain those postural
alignments while executing an eight animal
standing form. Next the student learns to walk
the circle, executing a simple directional change
between postures, and finally learning how to
maintain efficient and effective postural
alignments while executing progressively more
difficult directional changes on the circle.
Learning how to habitually maintain proper
structure and alignment while executing
progressively more complex body motions helps
183 
the practitioner develop whole body strength,
coordination, flexibility, balance, agility, mobility,
internal connection and internal energy. If all
of this can be executed with a relaxed body
and body/mind harmony, the practitioner is
well on his or her way to developing high level
martial arts skill. If the practitioner does not
learn how to properly align the body while
executing martial arts or ch'i kung movement,
the movement, and the distribution of energy
in the body will be inefficient, and thus the
practitioner will not gain the full benefits of
the practice. Thus body alignment, efficient
motion and correct use of strength should be
addressed first in the learning process.
Body Movements in Ch'i Kung
In the West, when we think of exercise, we
usually think about working our muscles,
increasing out heart rate, and challenging our
lung capacity. However, in order to get the
most out of a set of ch'i kung exercises, the set
should consist of a series of exercises which has
at its base the movement of all the joints of the
body through their natural range of motion
and the subtle movement of the body's
internal organs. These components are far
more important to the development of
internal health than gaining muscle strength.
The internal organs and the joints of the body
are the two primary areas of concern when
practicing body motion in ch'i kung training. If
the joints are loose and supple and the internal
organs are free to move inside the torso as they
were designed to move, the internal energy
development and distribution in the body can
reach optimum levels. The "standard eight ch'i
kung" set presented later in this chapter
focuses on these aspects of practice.
The Internal Organs
While it is necessary to regularly move all areas
of the body through a full range of motion to
maintain optimum health, there are two areas
of primary importance when practicing ch'i
kung. These are, the joints of the body and the
internal organs. The internal organs are
responsible for the production, storage, and
distribution of energy in the body. If the
internal organs are not free to move as they
were designed to move, they

will not function properly.
Each of the internal organs are designed to
move inside the body cavity in a specific manner.
If they do not move as they should, the ligamental
attachments which hold the organs in place begin
to tighten and the organ will either not be able to
move freely or will become stuck in an awkward
position. Many internal disorders such as kidney
stones, bladder infections, poor digestion,
shortness of breath, and high blood pressure can
be caused by the internal organs not being able
to move properly inside the body. Proper motion
can be easily facilitated through a systematic
program of exercise.
There are specific arm, leg, and body motions
which facilitate the movement, massage, or
"exercise" of the internal organs of the body. For
example, when the arms spread out directly to
the sides and the practitioner inhales deeply, the
lungs are able to stretch and move properly and
thus the heart also has room to move. Similarly,
when one hand is raised and the ribs on one side
are opened, the lung on that side moves outward
and the heart has room to swing slightly over to
that side. Alternating left and right raising and
lower of the arms enables the heart to move back
and forth in a slight swinging type of movement
and this helps the heart's function. When one or
both hands are raised above the head, the
ligamental attachments of the liver and/or spleen
are allowed to stretch and move. Additionally,
raising the arms above the head and lowering
them back down aids the function of the lymph
system. This system does not have its own
"pump" as the blood and air systems of the body
do and so it relies on body motion to move the
fluid. Twisting motions of the torso side to side
also aids in exercising the liver and spleen. When
the lower back is rounded and then straightened
or bowed, the kidneys become mobile within their
sphere of movement.
All complete sets of ch'i kung moving exercise
should address motions which allow all of the
internal organs to move within their sphere of
motion inside the torso. This way energy
movement to and from the organs will be
optimum and the organs and their ligamental
attachments will be exercised so that they will
remain flexible, supple, and able to continually
184 
operate to the extent of their full range of motion.
If any part of the body, inside or out, ever gets
stuck and cannot move as it is designed to move,
problems will arise. This is why it is so
important that a ch'i kung exercise program
include body movements which work to move
and manipulate all joints, ligaments, tendons,
and internal organs.
The Joints
Energy production in the body occurs in the
torso. The lungs process the air into usable energy,
the stomach and digestive system process the
food and drink, and the kidneys are responsible
for the innate or "prenatal" energy we received
from our parents. Once the internal organs have
produced and stored internal energy, in order
for it to be distributed to the rest of the body, it
must travel from the torso out to the
extremities in a full, unrestricted, and balanced
manner. This is how one maintains optimum
health.
Once energy leaves the torso, the most
complex areas it must navigate in order for it to
reach the distal points are the joints of the body.
The joints of the body are complex junctures of
muscle, ligament, tendon, flesh, cartilage, nerves,
and bone. If the movement of the joints is tight
or restricted, it will be difficult for energy to
pass through these areas in an efficient manner.
If the movement of all the joints, which
includes the spine, neck, shoulders,
sternum/rib junctures, elbows, fingers, wrists,
hips, knees, angles, and toes, are loose and
supple, energy in the body will flow more
efficiently. The characteristic turning, twisting,
and rotating movements of Pa Kua Chang are
ideal for opening up and loosening the body's
joints.
In Pa Kua Chang combat application the loose,
supple movement of the body's joints are relied
upon to produce whole body power, especially
the "whipping power," and to facilitate the use
of the body's major joints as both attack and
defense weapons. If the joints are not loose and
supple beyond normal ranges of suppleness and
flexibility, the practitioner will be stiff and slow,
will not be able to use all of these weapons
efficiently in fighting, and will not be able to
generate the kind of internal power used in Pa
Kua application.

Smooth and Continuous Movement
In the majority of ch'i kung exercise, where the
goal of the practice is to rebuild or cultivate energy
in the body, the practitioner will want to make
all movements slow, smooth, fluid, connected,
balanced, and continuous. Ideally this will be
accomplished both physically and mentally. In
Chinese they refer to this idea as "silk pulling
energy." The image here is one of pulling silk out
of a cocoon. If the pulling motion is not smooth
and continuous, the silk strand will break. If the
pulling motion is stopped or there is hesitation
once the movement begins, restarting the motion
will also break the silk thread. Therefore, once
the motion starts, it needs to be smooth and
continuous.
The silk pulling image can be easily related to
the idea of energy flow in the body. Once energy
starts moving in the body, smooth, continuous,
connected motion will facilitate a continuous
movement of the energy throughout the body.
If there is a pause, an awkwardness, or a hesitation
in the movement, the smooth energy flow will
be disturbed. If we compared energy flow in the
body to water running through a hose, such a
disturbance could be seen as an air bubble getting
into the line. As discussed previously, lack of
proper mental focus also produces this "air
bubble."
While it is true that the correct movement of
the body facilitates a smooth, continuous,
connected, and balanced flow of energy in the
body, the mind also has an important role to play
in maintaining optimal energy movement. As
we discussed previously in this chapter, the
intention must be focused and in harmony with
all movement for the movement to be complete.
If the mind does not lead the motion, the energy
will not follow the motion. If the mind is
distracted during practice, that "air bubble" in the
hose will appear. Mind and body need to be
integrated in all ch'i kung practice.
The slow, deliberate motions as described above
are mainly used to cultivate and balance energy in the
body. This practice is needed no matter how advanced
the practitioner becomes. However, there are many
"power" ch'i kung methods, such as the power palm
exercises of Park's system, which serve to teach the
185 
practitioner how to move energy in the body
rapidly and project that energy outside of the
body for use in martial application. As Park Bok
Nam states, "sometimes you need to keep the ch'i,
other times you need to throw the ch'i." However,
as we stated in the first segment of this chapter,
learning how to build and cultivate ch'i is a
necessary prelude to learning how to project the
ch'i out of the body. If it is not cultivated first,
there is nothing to project. If it is projected
outside of the body too much, then the reserve
will be depleted. So there always needs to be a
balance in practice between energy usage and
energy rebuilding.
Breathing in Ch'i Kung Practice
The body processes several raw materials in the
production of energy. One of those raw materials
is air (life force energy). Air is probably the most
important energy source the human body has at
its disposal, but because the breathing process is
"automatic," most people don't pay much
attention to it. From the Chinese perspective,
food and drink are the "energy of the Earth" and
air is the "energy of Heaven." While it is important
to balance the energy intake between that of
Heaven and Earth, we also know that a body can
live for weeks without food and days without
water. However, the body can only go a few
minutes without air. Thus the energy gathered
into the lungs from the air is extremely important.
The more efficient and effective that process is,
the more energy the body will have.
In regards to breathing, there are two main
goals in ch'i kung practice. The first is to gradually
and gently increase the lung capacity and the
efficiency of the lung's operation. The second is
to retrain the body to harmonize the breath with
the body's physical motion. In the first volume
of this book we presented a few breathing exercises
which help the practitioner learn to increase the
body's breathing efficiency and capacity. In this
volume we will focus more on the principle of
coordinating the breath with movement.
Breathing naturally and efficiently with the
breath working in complete coordination with the
body motion will greatly increase the body's

endurance, strength, and vitality. If the breath is
held, or the physical body motions are working
against the natural expansion and contraction of the
chest cavity, then the breathing will not be optimal.
Also, if the practitioner does not execute daily
exercises which are designed to gently stretch the
lungs, the lung tissue and the intercostal muscles
between the ribs can become tight and thus normal
breathing will become restricted.
Considering the above mentioned goals, there are
two rules of thumb. The first is that during practice
the inhale should be executed in coordination with
physical body motions which naturally facilitate an
expansion in the chest cavity. For example, if the
arms are moving up over the head, or are extended
out to the sides of the body, the physical movement
is encouraging an expansion in the chest and thus
this is when the inhale should be executed. If the
arms are moving in towards the center of the body
or down by the sides, this is encouraging a
compression of the chest cavity and thus the exhale
should be executed.
If the practitioner learns how to completely
coordinate the breath with the movements of the
body, the breathing will naturally become more
efficient. With a focus on this principle during the
execution slow movements in ch'i kung practice,
the practitioner will be able to train the body to
breathe properly at all times. If the practitioner can
learn how to breathe naturally in this manner in
everyday life, he or she will notice that they have
more endurance and energy. If the training is
correct, this extra endurance and energy will
naturally carry over in to the combat environment.
However, this principle must first be trained during
ch'i kung exercise. If the practitioner cannot
properly coordinate the mind, body movement,
and breath during the calm and quiet atmosphere
of ch'i kung exercise, they can not hope to have it
happen during the stress of a fight.
The second rule of thumb in regards to breathing
and ch'i kung exercise is the execution of a full
inhale and complete exhale. The inhale should be
full enough to challenge the breathing capacity of
the lungs and stretch the lung tissues and
supporting muscles in the area of the rib cage.
186 
However, the inhale should not be strained or forced.
If the practitioner begins to run out of breath, feel
dizzy, turn red, feel strained, or feel pains in the chest,
the inhale was too big. The stretching of the lungs
should be very gentle, not forced. The increase of
lung capacity should be gradually improved over a
period of time. Unfortunately, many practitioners,
especially those engaged in potentially dangerous
exercises such as "iron shirt" training, overdue this
aspect of ch'i kung breathing and cause themselves
problems. Dizziness, headaches, and high blood
pressure are minimal side effects from forceful
breathing practice. In extreme cases practitioners
have been known to severely damage the lungs, heart,
and diaphragm by being too forceful in executing
their inhale. In ch'i kung, all results are obtained
gently and gradually.
Another breathing related problem arises in
individuals who focus too much on tan t'ien breathing
without learning how to also properly exercise the
upper torso during the inhale and exhale. Those
practitioners who only focus on breathing into the
lower abdomen typically have restricted movement
in their lungs and rib cage due to not sufficiently
exercising this area. While learning abdominal
breathing is definitely a part of ch'i kung practice, the
student should not focus solely on that aspect of
breathing. All energy which comes into the body
from the air must first pass through the lungs. If the
lungs and upper chest are restricted in motion, the
energy that reaches the lower abdomen and tan t'ien
will not be optimal. One need only watch a baby
breathe to see how to breathe most efficiently. A
baby's entire torso will expand during the inhale, not
the chest alone, nor the abdomen alone. In Park's
system, the "filling breath" exercise presented in the
first volume is practiced by students of all levels in
order to keep the chest loose and lungs working to
full capacity.
While it is important to train the lungs to gradually learn
how to accept more air during the execution of the natural
inhale, a fully executed exhalation is equally as important.
The inhale can be seen as the vehicle for gathering the
energy of Heaven into the body and the exhale as serving
to rid the body of toxins. If the exhale is not complete,
this process will not be efficient and

these toxins can collect in the lungs and be stored
in the body. If the exhalation is shallow, then
some of the toxins which the body needed to rid
itself of will stay in the body. As with the inhale,
the exhale should be full, but not forced. The
body should always remain natural and
comfortable during both inhalation and
exhalation.
In order to increase the amount of air the lungs
The Supplemental Palms   
The Pa Kua ch'i kung exercises we will show in
this volume form a set of eight exercises which
Park refers to as the "standard eight ch'i kung" set.
These exercises are very typical of Pa Kua style ch'i
kung in that they utilize the characteristic twisting
and turning body motions for which Pa Kua has
become known. In addition to loosening up all
areas of the body through an opening up of all the
joints, this exercise set also aids the function of
the internal organs by allowing them to move
within their sphere of motion inside the body.
Each exercise stretches or massages the organs
and their associated ligamental attachments in
different ways. Park says that as the body moves
and the organs are massaged and manipulated,
the organ ch'i is strengthened.
Typically, Pa Kua ch'i kung exercises which are
separate from the circle walking forms are going
to involved motions which enable the entire body
to twist and turn through a full range of motion.
This twisting and turning motion is characteristic
of both the health and martial arts movements
of Pa Kua Chang. However, the beginning student
will not start out his or her ch'i kung practice by
learning the difficult twisting motions of Pa Kua.
The beginner needs to obtain experience with ch'i
kung exercise and awareness of the movement of
energy in the body by beginning their practice
with much simpler movements and exercises.
This is why we only presented the "basic ch'i
circulation" exercise in the first volume of this
book. The student trying to execute the exercises
in the "standard eight" set without having first
187 
can take in with any natural breath, it is important
that the practitioner of ch'i kung execute daily
exercises which serve to stretch the lungs and
diaphragm, and open up the rib cage. Not all
exercises need to be focused on this, however,
while executing a set of ch'i kung exercises, there
should be some exercises in the set which serve
this purpose. The practitioner is teaching the
body how to use the lungs to their full capacity
and thus breathing becomes more efficient.
worked with more rudimentary exercises may find
it difficult to develop the ch'i feeling.
The exercises shown here will not be practiced
by beginners simply because it is difficult to obtain
a feeling for the movement of energy while
executing these complex turning and twisting
motions of the body if the student has no
experience with feeling ch'i or if the body is tight.
We show these exercises here so that the reader
can get a feel for the characteristic Pa Kua flavor
in ch'i kung exercise.
This particular set of exercises is also designed
as a primer for the 48 month palm practice. If
you have read the chapter on palm training in
this book, you will notice that many of the
movements in this ch'i kung set resemble the
movements of the 48 month palms. By first
gaining experience in the execution of this ch'i
kung set before practicing the 48 month palms,
the student is able to develop structural
alignments and connections, ch'i awareness, and
increased flexibility before trying to put power
into these motions in the 48 month palm practice.
It is a good idea to practice this set for six to eight
months before attempting to practice the 48
month palm set.
The "standard eight ch'i kung" exercise set
actually consists of ten exercises, however, the
first two are considered "warm-ups." The only
reason these exercises are considered warm-ups is
probably for the simple reason that whoever
invented this exercise set felt that all Pa Kua sets

should have eight exercise, not seven, nine, or
ten. So instead of calling it the "standard ten" ch 'i
kung set, we call it the "standard eight" with two
warm-ups. Pa Kua practitioners are picky that way
when it comes to the number "eight."
The ten exercises are practiced in a continuous
sequence with no stopping in-between the
exercises. The two warm-up exercises and the first
of the eight exercises in this set were presented in
the last volume. The straight fan chang and circle
fan chang exercises are the two warm-ups and the
t'ien fan chang exercise is the first of this set. The
two warm-ups are practiced in order to help
"wake-up" the body and loosen up the spine.
The t'ien fan chang exercise works specifically to
increase the flexibility of the spine and neck, and
aids the function of the lungs because the rib
cage and chest are allowed to expand during the
execution of the movement.
Because the three fan chang exercises were
presented in the first volume, we will not show
them again here, we will go right in to the second
exercise of the set which is called "sliding the
window shutter to look at the moon." Because
this is the second exercise of the set, we will begin
numbering the photos with the preface of "2"
instead of "1."
Sliding the Window Shutter to
Look at the Moon
This exercise is almost identical to the 48
month palm exercise of the same name which
was presented in the palm training chapter of this
volume, however, here it is combined with the
shaking palm movements to form a two-part
exercise. Park says that the function of this
exercise is to "wake up the tan t'ien." Therefore,
the mental focus while executing this exercise
should be on the deep tan t'ien breathing and the
movement of energy from the tan t'ien to the
palms. Park says that the breathing, posture,
movement, and the mind should all be coordinated
in order to help open up the tan t'ien and prepare
the body's energy for the remaining exercises.
Additionally, this exercise helps loosen up the
hips and shoulders. This exercise is executed as
follows:
188 
From the last movement of the T'ien Fan Chang
exercise (see photo 2-1), execute a fan chang
maneuver with the left palm coming underneath
the right palm. As the body comes around to the
front, step out into a "horse riding" stance. See
photo 2-2.
1) Now execute a slow shaking palm maneuver as
presented in the last volume of this book. The left
hip and shoulder come back and then they are
both extended forward with the strike. Keep in
mind that all movements in this sequence are
performed slowly with the intention focused on
the leading palm. As the palm is extended and turns
over, imagine the ch'i moving out to the palm, but do
not extend your imagination beyond the center of the
palm. In this exercise you want
to "keep the ch'i," not extend it away from your
body. Just as in the shaking palm exercise, the
inhale is performed as the arm is drawn back and
the exhale is performed as the arm moves forward
to strike. Throughout this exercise the breathing
should remain smooth, fluid, and full. See photos
2-3 and 2-4.
3) Execute another straight fan chang maneuver
in order to perform a shaking palm movement on
the right side. See photos 2-5 through 2-7. This
completes the first half of this exercise. You have
now executed a slow, fluid, smooth shaking palm
on both the left and right sides. Now you will
transition into the other half of this exercise.
4) You will now begin the "sliding shutter" part
of the exercise. Execute a fan chang and turn the
body to the left. The lead hand stays up at about
eye height. With this move, begin to inhale. See
photos 2-8 and 2-9.
5) Slightly rotate the body (hips and shoulders)
back to the right keeping the palms in the same
position as in photo 2-9. Then begin to turn the
hips and shoulders back to the left and start to
turn the palms to face the left side of your body as
it is now positioned (they will be facing to the rear
of your original starting position). Begin to exhale
as the body and palms turn to strike. Continue
with this motion and execute the double palm
strike. See photo 2-10 and 2-11.
6) Execute a fan chang with the right palm coming
underneath the left. As the palms change turn the
body 180 degrees to the other side. The feet both
pivot 90 degree in this turn. With this motion
  

2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4

 

2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8

 

2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12

Sliding the Shutter to Look at the Moon Exercise   

 

189 

2-13 2-14
Sliding the Shutter to Look at the Moon Exercise (con’t)
begin to inhale. See photos 2-12 through 2-14.
7) Execute a "sliding shutter" palm strike on this
side in a slow and smooth manner. See photos
2-15 and 2-16.
You have now completed the second part of
this exercise and are ready to begin the next
repetition. The next repetition begins again with
the shaking palm sequence. From the position
shown in photo 2-16, you simply execute a fan
chang with the left palm coming underneath the
right arm and turn your body back to face the
front as shown in photo 2-2. From this position
you are ready to start again.
Double Palm Change
The "double palm change" exercise is executed
in three parts. The first part is performed exactly
like the dragon back exercise which was presented
in the last volume of this book. The next two parts
are performed exactly like the double palm change
exercise which was also presented in the last
volume.
While the last exercise worked to "wake up the
tan t'ien" through the deep abdominal breathing,
slow motions, and mental intention focused on
the palms, this next exercise works to move the
ch'i from the tan t'ien to the palms by allowing the
rippling of the spine to help move the ch'i. The
meridians which run along the spine and the
190 
2-15 2-16
 
front of the body are two of the major ch'i pathways.
By loosening the spine and encouraging the ch 'i to
move through the wave like motions of this exercise,
the practitioner's energy flow along the spine and out
to the palms is enhanced.
This exercise also aids the function and energy of
the kidneys and the liver. The articulation of the lower
back during the dragon back movement, allowing
both the front and back of the lower torso to "open and
close," allows the kidneys and liver to be massaged
and manipulated as they move inside the body. The
ligamental attachments which hold these organs in
place are also stretched and this flexibility and motion
insures that the fluids which are stored and transported
by these organs does not become stagnant.
The "double palm change" exercise is executed
as follows:
1) From the position shown in photo 2-16, begin
to inhale and execute a fan chang and turn the
body back to face forward in a "horse" stance. The
two palms are held up at eye level with both palms
facing upward. See photos 3-1 and 3-2.
2) Now execute the dragon back maneuver as
described in the first volume of this book. In this
exercise the dragon back motion is executed slowly
with an emphasis on really stretching out the
spine as it ripples in the dragon back "wave."
Exhale with the striking phase of the dragon back.
See photos 3-3 and 3-4.
3) Execute a fan chang with the left palm coming
  

 
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4
 

3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8

 

3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12

The Double Palm Change Exercise   

 

191 

2-13 2-14
The Double Palm Change Exercise (con’t)
under the right arm. Turn the body to the left as the
fan chang is executed. Bring the palms up in front
of the face with both palms facing upward and held
at eye level. Now execute the double palm strike as
it was described in the first volume of this book.
See photos 3-5 through 3-7.
4) Execute a fan chang with the right palm coming
under the left arm. Turn the body to the right as
the fan chang is executed. Bring the palms up in
front of the face with both palms facing upward
and held at eye level. Now, once again, execute
the double palm strike as it was described in the
first volume of this book. See photos 3-8 through
3-12.
5) Now you will execute a fan chang and come
back to the forward position. When repeating the
exercise you will start the next repetition here by
executing the dragon back movement to the
forward direction as shown in photos 3-14 through
3-16. The position shown in photo 3-16 is where
you will finish just before transitioning to the
fourth exercise in this set.
The next three exercises, "unicorn turns its
body," "serving tea cups," and "serving tea cups
with throwing palm" are sometimes referred to in
general as "serving tea cups exercises" in the Pa
Kua parlance. This name has its origins in an old
story which is frequently told about Pa Kua
Chang's founder, Tung Hai Ch'uan. The story says
that Tung was working as a servant in the Emperor's
192 
2-15 2-16
 
palace and on one occasion the Emperor was
hosting a great party on the palatial grounds. The
grounds were so crowded with people that moving
around in the crowd was a difficult task. However,
while Tung was serving tea to the guest he moved
himself in and out of the crowd of people with
relative ease and served the tea cups to guests
without spilling a drop. It is said that the Emperor
was surprised at Tung's great agility and
questioned him about it. The story says that it was
then that Tung first revealed his art of Pa Kua
Chang.
Aside from the above mentioned story, these
exercises are also referred to as "serving tea cups"
exercises because the practitioner's intention while
executing the exercises is one of holding tea cups
in the hands and concentrating on not "spilling the
tea." Although the arms and body are continually
twisting throughout the execution of these
exercises, the palms will always face upward. The
image of holding tea cups and not spilling the tea
helps the practitioner retain an intense focus
(intention) on the hands and thus "keep the ch'i" in
the hands throughout the exercise.
Unicorn Turns its Body
The next exercise is called "Unicorn Turns its
Body." This exercise is designed to stretch and
loosen the hips, spine and neck joints and allow
movement in the areas of the liver and spleen.
  

4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4

 

4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8

 

 
4-9 4-10 4-11

The Unicorn Turns its Body Exercise   

 

193 

The twisting motion of the body is what provides
the opportunity for the liver and spleen to move.
The exercise is performed as follows:
1) From the position shown in photo 3-16, allow
the hands to come down to the sides with the
palms up. This exercise begins with the feet
parallel in a "horse riding stance." The arms are
rounded and the hands are held such that the
fingers are facing in towards the hips. The palms
are facing upwards as if the practitioner is holding
something in his or her hands. Park Bok Nam
likes to tell students that throughout this exercise
one can imagine that one hand is the sun, the
other hand is the moon, and the body is the earth.
While executing the movements of this exercise
the sun and the moon will always stay on opposite
sides of the earth as they revolve around the earth.
See photo 4-1.
2) From the beginning posture, you will toe in
with the left foot and shift the weight back on
the left leg. The left hand begins to move away
from the body towards the front with the fingers
facing forward as the right hand begins to move
behind the body with the fingers facing rearward.
Both palms remain facing upward. The intention
is focused on both palms (keeping the tea from
spilling out of the cups). The eyes are watching
the forward moving hand. The inhale begins as
you start to execute this first movement. See
photo 4-2.
3) The left hand continues moving forward, the
right hand continues moving rearward. The eyes
continue to follow the forward moving hand.
Both palms are still facing upward and the
intention is focused on the palms. Continue to
inhale. See photo 4-3.
4) The left hand continues moving forward, the
right hand continues moving rearward. The head
turns so that the eyes look at the back palm. This
facilitates a maximum twisting of the spine and
neck. The hips are twisted as far as possible to
the right. All of the weight is on the left leg. Both
palms are still facing upward. The right arm is
stretched to the rear and the left hand is stretched
forward. This facilitates a shearing action in the
middle torso which helps stretch the ligamental
attachments in the area of the liver and spleen.
The inhale is completed as the maximum stretch
194 
and twist is executed. See photo 4-4.
5) Now start to exhale and unwind the body.
The right hand moves forward with the fingers
facing the hip. The left hand starts to move
rearward with the fingers beginning to curl in
towards the hip. The weight begins to gradually
shift to the right leg. The eyes watch the left palm.
The palms are still facing upward with the
intention focused on the palms. See photo 4-5.
6) Return to the beginning posture with the arms
rounded, palms facing upwards and the fingers
pointing at the hips. See photo 4-6. The exhale
is completed and you are ready to repeat the
exercise on the other side as shown in photos 4-7
through 4-11.
Serving Tea Cups
The next exercise is one of many variations of
the "Serving Tea Cups" exercise. This exercise
serves to loosen the spine, neck, hips, shoulders,
wrists, and elbows and gently moves the liver,
spleen, heart and lungs. Energetically this exercise
helps to give the practitioner an awareness of
spiraling energy in the body and, due to the
movement of the joints, will facilitate development
of the "nerve ch'i." The exercise is executed as
follows:
1) This exercise begins with the feet parallel in a
"horse riding stance." The arms are rounded and
the hands are held such that the fingers are facing
in towards the hips. The palms are facing upwards
as if the practitioner is holding something in his
or her hands. See photo 5-1.
2) The left hand turns so that the fingers are facing
away from the front of the body and the hand
moves forward so that the fingers are eye height
and the palm is facing upward. The right hand
stays by the hip, but turns so that the fingers are
facing forward. The left elbow is pointed down,
the right elbow pointed straight back. The eyes
watch the left hand and the intention is focused
on the left palm. Begin to inhale. See photo 5-2
3) The left palm rotates, fingers turning towards
the left, the palm remains facing upwards. The
eyes continue to watch the left hand, the
intention is focused on the left palm as if holding
  

5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4

 

5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8

 

5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12

The Serving Tea Cup Exercise (con’t) 

 

195 
  

5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16

 

5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20

 

 
5-21 5-22 5-23

The Serving Tea Cup Exercise (con’t)   

 

196 

something in the hand. See photo 5-3.
4) Continue to rotate the fingers as above. As
the palm rotates, toe-in with the right foot and
begin to shift the body weight to the right. The
body begins twisting to the left. The palm comes
up over the head, palm always facing upward. The
eyes continue to watch the palm. This not only
helps focus the intention on the palm, but works
to stretch the neck. Continue inhaling. See photo
5-4.
5) Continue to rotate the palm in the same
direction as above. The body continues twisting
to the left. The palm has now rotated through
450 degrees (360 + 90). The palm has continually
remained facing upwards. The eyes have
continually watched the left hand and thus the
neck is rotating through its range of motion. The
elbow, shoulder, and wrist are now being stretched
through their full range of movement. Continue
inhaling. Postures 2-4 and 2-5 also help to open
up the lungs to facilitate the full inhale. See photo
5-5.
6) The left hand continues turning until the
fingers are facing to the rear. The left hand moves
down under the left armpit as it begins to move
backward. The eyes continue to watch the left
hand. Continue inhaling. See photo 5-6.
7) The left hand continues to move towards the
rear and the right hand begins to move forward.
The eyes continue to watch the left hand. Both
palms continually face upwards as if holding tea
cups. See photo 5-7.
8) The left hand continues moving towards the
rear while the right hand moves forwards The
left arm stretches back and the right arm stretches
forward as in the "Unicorn Turns its Body" exercise
shown previously. All of the weight is on the right
leg and the body is twisted to the maximum. The
eyes still look at the left hand to facilitate the
maximum twist of the neck and spine. The
twisting of the body helps to loosen the
ligamental attachments in the liver and spleen
region and thus energy naturally flows to these
organs. The practitioner reaches the full extent
of the inhale when executing this posture. See
photo 5-8.
9) The practitioner now starts to exhale and
unwind the body. The right hand moves rearward
with the fingers facing the hip. The left hand
197 
starts to move forward with the fingers beginning
to curl in towards the hip. The weight begins to
gradually shift to the left leg. The eyes watch the
left palm. The palms are still facing upward with
the intention focused on the palms. See photo 5-9.
10) Return to the beginning posture with the
arms rounded, palms facing upwards and the
fingers pointing at the hips. The exhale is
completed. See photo 5-10.
11) The left hand turns so that the fingers point
away from the front of the body and the hand
moves forward so that the fingers are eye height
and the palm is facing upward. The right hand
stays by the hip, but turns so that the fingers are
facing forward. The left elbow is pointed down,
the right elbow pointed straight back. The eyes
watch the left hand and the intention is focused
on the left palm. Begin to inhale. See photo 5-
11.
12) Bring the right hand forward and execute a
changing palm maneuver. The right hand comes
up along the forward of the left hand with the
palm facing upward. See photo 5-12.
13) The right palm extends upwards to eye
height. The eyes begin to watch the right palm
and you begin to execute the same movements
on the right side. See photos 5-13 through 5-23.
Serving Tea Cups
with Throwing Palm
The "serving tea cups with throwing palm"
exercise is performed exactly like the previous
exercise, however, a throwing palm is added to the
end of the exercise on each side. The throwing
palm is performed exactly as it was described in
the palm training chapter of this book. As in the
throwing palm exercise described in the palm
training chapter, the purpose of this exercise is to
bring ch'i and blood to the hands with the
whipping action of the relaxed arm. The throwing
palm portion of this exercise is the only part of this
entire set which is performed at a fast pace. The
exercise is performed as follows:
1) This exercise begins directly from the last

execution of the previous exercise. The first several
moves are a repetition of the serving tea cup exercise.
See photo 6-1. 2) The left palm rotates, fingers turning
towards the left, the palm remains facing upwards.
The eyes continue to watch the left hand, the intention
focused on the left palm as if holding something in the
hand. See photo 6-2.
4) Continue to rotate the fingers as above. As
the palm rotates, toe-in with the right foot and
begin to shift the body weight to the right. The
body begins twisting to the left. The palm comes
up over the head, palm always facing upward. The
eyes continue to watch the palm. This not only
helps focus the intention on the palm, but works
to stretch the neck, open the chest and stretch
the lower back. Continue inhaling. See photo 6-
3.
5) Continue to rotate the palm in the same
direction as above. The body continues twisting
to the left. The palm has now rotated through
450 degrees (360 + 90). The palm has continually
remained facing upwards. The eyes have
continually watched the left hand and thus the
neck is rotating through its range of motion. The
elbow, shoulder, and wrist are now being stretched
through their full range of movement. Continue
inhaling. Postures 6-3 and 6-4 also help to open
up the lungs to facilitate the full inhale. See photo
6-4.
6) The left hand continues turning until the
fingers are facing to the rear. The left hand moves
down under the left armpit as it begins to move
backward. The eyes continue to watch the left
hand. Continue inhaling. See photo 6-5.
7) The left hand continues to move towards the
rear and the right hand begins to move forward.
The eyes continue to watch the left hand. Both
palms continually face upwards as if holding tea
cups. See photo 6-6.
8) The left hand continues moving towards the
rear while the right hand moves forwards The
left arm stretches back and the right arm stretches
forward as in the "Unicorn Turns its Body" exercise
shown previously. All of the weight is on the right
leg and the body is twisted to the maximum. The
eyes still look at the left hand to facilitate
the maximum twist of the neck and spine.
The twisting of the body helps to loosen the
198 
ligamental attachments in the liver and spleen
region and thus energy naturally flows to these
organs. You reach the full extent of the inhale
when executing this posture. See photo 6-7.
9) Now start to exhale and unwind the body.
The right hand moves rearward with the fingers
facing the hip. The left hand starts to move
forward with the fingers beginning to curl in
towards the hip. The weight begins to gradually
shift to the left leg. The eyes watch the left palm.
The palms are still facing upward with the
intention focused on the palms. See photo 6-8.
10) Return to the beginning posture with the
arms rounded, palms facing upwards and the
fingers pointing at the hips. The exhale is
completed. See photo 6-9.
11) The left hand turns so that the fingers point
away from the front of the body and the hand
moves forward so that the fingers are eye height
and the palm is facing upward. The right hand
stays by the hip, but turns so that the fingers are
facing forward. The left elbow is pointed down,
the right elbow pointed straight back. The eyes
watch the left hand and the intention is focused
on the left palm. The left palm lifts straight up
with the palm facing upward. Begin to inhale.
See photo 6-10.
12) Now twist the torso to the left and allow this
motion to rotate the left palm to the downward
facing position. Relax the area around the left
rib cage and allow these muscles to expand with
the lifting of the arm. Twist the hips as far as you
comfortably can. Inhale as the hand is raised.
Allow the right hand to fall back down by the
ribs with the palm facing up. Ensure that the
shoulder remains relaxed. If you would like to
facilitate a greater stretch in the area of the ribs,
you can twist your right hand until the thumb is
facing downward. See photo 6-12.
13) While maintaining a completely relaxed
shoulder, arm, and hand, twist the torso back to
the left while bending straight over from the waist.
Audibly exhale through the nose with this motion
as you did in the throwing palm exercise described
in the palm training chapter of this volume.
Allow the hand to be thrown between your legs
with the bending of the waist and twisting of
the body. Allow the wrist to be very loose and
snap at the last moment as if you are trying to flick
  

6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4

 

6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8

 

6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12

The Serving Tea Cup with Throwing Palm Exercise 

 

199 
  

5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16

 

5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20

 

5-21 5-22 5-23 5-24

The Serving Tea Cup Exercise (con’t) 

 

200 

6-25 6-26
The Double Palm Change Exercise (con’t)
water off of your hand. To review the details of
this movement refer to the throwing palm section
of the palm training chapter. See photo 6-13.
5) From the downward hanging position, begin
to raise up and bring the left arm up with the palm
facing up. As the left palm comes up, bring the
right arm underneath the left. Both palms are
facing upwards. See photo 6-14.
6) Continue bringing the palms upward, the right
palm reaching upward to begin repeating this
exercise on the other side. See photo 6-15.
7) You are now ready to execute this exercise on
the other side. Repeat the steps on the other side
as shown in photos 6-16 through 6-27.
When you are ready to begin the next exercise,
you will start to transition smoothly into the
exercise from the position shown in photo 6-25.
Yin and Yang Opposing Palms
Exercise
The remaining two exercises in this set add a
new dimension to this group of exercises. Thus far,
all of the exercises, with the exception of the
throwing palm movement in the last exercise,
have been performed at a slow, continuous, fluid
pace. This manner of movement, combined with
full breathing and mental intention, has served to
gradually increase a full, smooth, and balanced
ch'i flow in the body. The movements of the  coming out of the nose.
201 
6-27
 
exercises have stretched and dilated the energy
meridians and loosened the joints and these
movements, combined with the mental intention
and breathing, have facilitated an increased flow
of energy from the tan t'ien to all areas of the
body.
At the end of the last exercise, we let gravity
and centrifugal force work to our advantage and
increased the flow of blood and ch'i to the hands
through those energy pathways that had been
opened up during the previous exercises. Now, in
the next two exercises, we will continue to stretch
the body and loosen the joints while also adding an
element to the exercise which helps promote a
powerful flow of energy from the tan t'ien to the
palms.
This technique occurs right at the end of the
motions of these two exercises. As you are
exhaling and are about to complete the last small
movement of the exercise, you forcefully expel the
last small bit of air from the lungs with an audible
short burst of air through the nose. The force
behind the exhale comes from the lower abdomen
expanding in a quick, crisp pulse. If you were to
press your fingers into the abdomen of someone
who was executing this technique, you would feel
your hand being sharply pushed away as the
practitioner's abdomen expanded in a quick burst.
You can try this yourself by placing your hands on
your abdomen and then quickly expelling the air
out of your lungs with an audible snorting sound
 
  

7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4

 

7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8

 

 
7-9 7-10

Yin and Yang Opposite Palm Exercise   

 

202 

The technique explained above helps to
promote the rapid movement of ch'i from the tan
t’ien to the hands. The pulsing of the tan t’ien
sends the energy out in a burst and the energy
follows the intention to the hands. Additionally,
the burst of expelled air, which is timed to occur at
the very end of a long smooth exhale, helps to
clear the lungs of any extra toxins which may not
be expelled during a normal breath or even a long
full breath. The short burst of expelled air acts to
"flush out the lungs," so to speak.
Along with the burst of expelled air described
above, the practitioner will sharply and crisply
execute the last small bit of physical movement.
The entire sequence of the exercise during the
inhale and most of the exhale is performed at a
slow steady pace, then, as the practitioner is
reaching the last few inches of the motion, the
movement becomes sharp, quick, and crisp and is
combined with the short blast of audible exhale.
This short crisp movement combined with the
pumping of ch'i through the body is the first
exercise the student in Park's system will practice
in order to begin to understand "shock power" or
what the Chinese call fa ching ( ). Of course
these quick motions are hard to describe in words
and impossible to see in photographs. If you want
to get a better idea of how this is performed, please
refer to the companion video.
The seventh exercise, "yin and yang opposing
palms," is a great exercise for opening up the rib
cage and stretching the intercostal muscles. As we
discussed in the chapter on palm training, the
importance of having very supple and loose
muscles around the rib cage, sternum and spine is
important to being able to generate powerful
strikes. Additionally, this exercise works to loosen
the mid back region and bends the spine in a
sidewards bow.
Gaining an increased degree of suppleness and
flexibility around the spine is essential for
maintaining optimum health and being able to
generate internal power. Thus far in this exercise
set we have executed many exercises which twist
the spine in various ways, a couple exercises
which arch the spine backwards, and one exercise
which ripples the spine in a segmented fashion.
These last two exercises work the spine in two
203 
different ways.
Along with twisting, the spine can also bow. In
bowing, the spine can move in four directions, it
can bow forward or backward, and it can also bow
side to side. This exercise works to bow the spine
side to side. The exercise is executed as follows:
1) Begin this exercise from the last downward
throwing motion of the throwing palm from the
last exercise. See photo 7-1.
2) Begin inhaling and turn the right palm upward.
Allow the left palm to come down in front of your
chest with the palm facing your chest. See photo
7-2.
3) Begin to raise the body upward and allow the
right palm to follow an arcing pattern out away
from your body. As the right hand is rising, the
palm turns to face the body. The left palm drops
down to the level of your navel with the palm
facing upward. See photo 7-4.
4) The body continues to raise to a standing
straight position while the right hand continues
moving to a position about neck height with the
palm facing down. The left and right palms are
now facing each other with the right palm directly
over the left as if you are holding a big ball. See
photo 7-5.
5) Now the palms begin to separate as you start to
exhale. The left palm moves directly downward
with the palm still facing upward. The right palm
moves upward with the palm facing downward.
Both palms are moving along the centerline of the
body. See photo 7-5.
6) Now as you are getting towards the end of your
exhale and the right and left palms are nearing the
full extent of their movement, exhale sharply and
audibly through the nose as if snorting and sharply
press the right palm upward and the left palm
downward in a quick extending stretch. With this
motion allow the right ribs to open up fully. Do
not allow the right shoulder to ride upwards, keep
the shoulder muscles relaxed. The left side ribs
collapse as the left shoulder sinks downward. See
photo 7-6.
7) Begin to inhale and bring the left palm straight
up the centerline of the body with the palm facing
upward. At the same time the right palm moves
out away from the body in an arcing motion with
the palm turning to face the body. See photo 7-7.

8) As the palms pass one another at about the
upper chest region, the left palm turns over as the
right palm continues down in an arcing motion
along the centerline of the body. See photo 7-8.
9) After the palms reach the position where they
are facing one another with the right palm at the
level of the navel and the left palm at the level of
the neck, high and low "holding ball" position,
begin to execute the exercise on the other side.
See photo 7-9 and 7-10.
Scooping the Moon From the Sea
Bottom
The eighth exercise, "scooping the moon from
the sea bottom," shares its name with an exercise
we presented in the last volume of this book. The
difference here is that the "scooping" is
performed with two hands to the front instead of
one hand to the side. The exercise is designed to
manipulate the lungs and kidneys and work the
spine in the forward bowing direction. The
exercise is performed as follows:
1) From the last position of the previous exercise
(shown in photo 7-10), begin to inhale, bend over
at the hips and bring both hands to an embracing
position in front of the body. See photos 8-1 and
8-2. The full extent of the inhale should be
reached when you get to the position shown in
photo 8-2.
2) As the body bends down farther, begin to
exhale and bring both hands down near the
ground as if scooping under a big ball. The arms
remain in a rounded position. See photo 8-3.
3) Now begin to inhale and bring the arms
straight up along the body as if lifting something.
The palms remain facing upward and the hands
are just a few inches from the chest as they raise
upward. See photos 8-4 and 8-5.
4) Continue bringing the palms up until they
reach a point at about shoulder level. The palms
are still facing upward. In this position you will
probably feel stretching in the twisting of your
wrists to keep the palms facing directly upward. It
is important that you bring the hands up this high
in order to facilitate a full breath into the lungs.
While executing this motion, keep the shoulders
204 
relaxed. See photo 8-6.
5) After you have completely inhaled in the last
position, begin to exhale and turn the palms to
face you as your arms move out away from your
body at about shoulder height. See photo 8-7.
6) Just before the arms reach their full extension,
exhale crisply and audibly and round the entire
back by quickly projecting the shoulders forward
while tucking the pelvis under and projecting the
small and middle parts of the back rearward. See
photo 8-8.
Begin the next repetition by inhaling and
lowering the body as shown in photo 8-2.
Closing
All ch'i kung exercise should include a closing
sequence which settles the body's energy back to
the tan t'ien, calms the mind, and relaxes the body.
The following closing sequence is one that is used
for all of the ch'i kung exercises in Park's system of
Pa Kua, including the ch'i kung circle walking
practice. It is performed as follows:
1) After finishing the final exercise as described
above, stand straight up and allow the hands to
fall down by the sides. See photo C-l.
2) Begin to inhale and bring both hands up the
center line of the body with the palms facing
upward. When the hands reach about shoulder
height, the palms should still be facing upward.
The palms should also be held so that the pinky
fingers are about 4 or 5 inches from the chest. Do
not hold the hands close to the chest. In this
position you may feel a stretching in the forearms
and wrist as you maintain the palm up position.
It is important that you maintain this palm up
position all the way up to the posture shown in
photo C-4 as this allows the ribs to open and the
lungs to expand completely with the inhale. See
photos C-2 through C-4.
3) When the palms have reached the position
shown in photo C-4, begin to exhale and rotate
the palms outward while still keeping them facing
upward. See photos C-5 through C-7.
4) Continue exhaling as you move the palms
straight out to the sides of the body by extending
the arms. See photos C-8 and C-9.
When you reach the posture depicted in photo

8-1 8-2
8-5 8-6
C-9 you should reach the end of the exhale. Relax
the shoulders and begin to breath naturally. Hold
this posture for a slow count of 30. Insure that the
palms remain facing upward. Concentrate on the
palms while holding this posture.
5) After holding the posture shown in photo C-9
for a count of 30, begin to inhale and slowly bring
the arms up over the head so that the palms face
each other. Allow the arms to rise until the palms
reach about shoulder width. See photos C-10
through C-13.
6) After you reach the posture shown in C-13,
exhale and allow the shoulders to completely
relax while you continue to hold your hands up
over your head. Begin to breath naturally and
hold this posture for a slow count of 30. While  on your palms and become aware of what you are
205 
8-3 8-4
8-7 8-8
you are holding this posture insure the shoulders
remain relaxed and the mind is focused on the
palms. See photo C-14.
7) Slowly begin to drop the hands down the
centerline of the body with the palms facing
downward until the hands are once again relaxed
by the sides. As the hands slowly move down the
front of the body bring your focus to the tan t'ien
and sink the energy in your body downwards. See
photos C-15 through C-20.
When you reach the position shown in photo
C-20, close your eyes if they are not already closed
and allow your entire body to relax and imagine
that your hands are heavy and all of your joints
are enlongating as they relax. Focus your attention
  

C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4

 

C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8

 

C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12

The Serving Tea Cup Exercise (con’t) 

 

206 

C-13 C--14
C-17 C-18
feeling there. After standing silently in this
position for as long as you feel comfortable,
slowly open the eyes and conclude the practice,
but remain relaxed and do not pick up any heavy
objects for 20 to 30 minutes. Ch’i kung practice
should always be scheduled as the last part of
your workout and after the practice has concluded
you should not perform any strenuous physical
exercise or labor.
Conclusion
The "standard eight" ch'i kung set serves many
purposes in developing the practitioner's body
and mind. If this set is practiced correctly, with a
focus on loosening the joints and coordinating
the breath and the body motions, the practitioner
207 
C-15 C-16
C-19 C-20
will be able to prepare his or her body for all of
the Pa Kua Chang training which is presented in
this book. With diligent practice of this exercise
set, the student will notice that the power palms,
the single palm change variations, the elbow
strikes, and the advance circle walking exercises
will all become easier to perform. Additionally, if
the student concentrates on "keeping the ch'i
feeling" during the practice of this set the
awareness of ch'i in the body will greatly increase.
  

208 
  

Chapter 8 

Conclusion 
We hope that you have enjoyed this book and
that you have learned something about the art of
Pa Kua Chang by reading this book and practicing
the material. Taking the building blocks we have
presented here and in the first volume of this
book, you now have enough Pa Kua Chang material
to build many various forms and applications on
your own. Afteryou have practice the solo exercises
for a sufficient amount of time and begin to
combine them with the circle walking footwork
and single palm change variations, we think that
you will be surprised at the natural movements
which come out of your body without you having
to think about them. When you can do this, then
you are really beginning to understand Pa Kua
Chang!
Although the components taught in this book
may seem quite simple, the material which is
presented in this book can really lead you into
some very complex and interesting Pa Kua Chang
movements. Be creative in your combinations of
the fundamentals which are presented here. Begin
walking the circle, k'ou pu to change directions
and then execute a low "scooping moon from sea
bottom" flowing right into "hiding flower under
leaf," unwind from there and move directly into
the "swallow penetrates through the forest,"
execute a k'ou pu and then move smoothly into
the "sliding the window shutter to look at the
moon" palm. From there you can throw and
shaking palm while executing and jump step
forward, turn back towards the center of the circle
and walk in the other direction. You've just
created the first section of a new form.
In studying and practicing the art of Pa Kua
Chang, you should eventually be able to
spontaneously perform the movements in the
execution of both forms and fighting applications.
You should try to eventually free yourself from
choreographed form sequences and be able to
express your art in the moment. You should be
able to begin practicing a "form" and
improvisationally express an entire sequence
without having a preconceived notion in mind.
When you reach this point in your practice, you
can really begin to research the art and reach deep
levels of understanding in the practice for both
health maintenance and fighting.
Enjoy your practice! If you have any questions
pertaining to the material in this book, please feel
free to call High View Publications at (408)
622-0789. If you would like to seek instruction
with Park Bok Nam at one of his schools, please
call (804) 794-8384.

209